WO2022181539A1 - Method for manufacturing laminate having conductor pattern - Google Patents

Method for manufacturing laminate having conductor pattern Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022181539A1
WO2022181539A1 PCT/JP2022/006927 JP2022006927W WO2022181539A1 WO 2022181539 A1 WO2022181539 A1 WO 2022181539A1 JP 2022006927 W JP2022006927 W JP 2022006927W WO 2022181539 A1 WO2022181539 A1 WO 2022181539A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
photosensitive layer
laminate
conductor pattern
exposure
mass
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/006927
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
壮二 石坂
悠 鬼塚
浩二 新田
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2023502388A priority Critical patent/JPWO2022181539A1/ja
Priority to CN202280016396.1A priority patent/CN116917806A/en
Publication of WO2022181539A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022181539A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/11Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having cover layers or intermediate layers, e.g. subbing layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/10Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which conductive material is applied to the insulating support in such a manner as to form the desired conductive pattern
    • H05K3/18Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which conductive material is applied to the insulating support in such a manner as to form the desired conductive pattern using precipitation techniques to apply the conductive material

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a laminate having conductor patterns.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a photosensitive resin laminate obtained by sequentially laminating a predetermined intermediate layer and a predetermined photosensitive resin layer on a support film.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern that can produce a laminate having a conductor pattern with excellent linearity.
  • a transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer is laminated to the transfer film and the substrate such that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface.
  • process and An exposure step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer a development step of performing a development treatment on the exposed photosensitive layer using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt to form a resist pattern; an etching process of performing an etching process or a plating process of performing a plating process on the metal layer in a region where the resist pattern is not arranged; a resist stripping step of stripping the resist pattern;
  • the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern includes a removal step of removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step and forming a conductor pattern on the substrate.
  • Measurement X After exposing the photosensitive layer with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the cross section of the resist pattern obtained by developing with the aqueous solution used in the developing step was observed. Let length X be the penetration length of the alkali metal on the side surface of the resist pattern.
  • [3] The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [1] or [2], wherein the photosensitive layer contains a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
  • [4] The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [3], wherein the polymerizable compound contains a polymerizable compound having a functionality of two or more.
  • [5] The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [3] or [4], wherein the polymerizable compound contains a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
  • [6] The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [3] to [5], wherein the polymerizable compound contains a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group.
  • the intermediate layer contains one or more selected from the group consisting of water-soluble cellulose derivatives, polyhydric alcohols, alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols, polyethers, phenol derivatives, and amide compounds [12]. Or a method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [13]. [15] Between the bonding step and the exposure step, the temporary support peeling step is provided, The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask.
  • the temporary support peeling step Manufacture of a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure by bringing the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer into contact with a photomask. Method.
  • the temporary support peeling step is provided, The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [12] to [14], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure by bringing the exposed surface of the intermediate layer into contact with a photomask. .
  • the temporary support peeling step is provided, The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask.
  • FIG. 4 is a partial schematic diagram of a cross section of a laminate having a line-shaped resist pattern; It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a transfer film.
  • a numerical range represented by "to” means a range including the numerical values before and after “to” as lower and upper limits.
  • the upper limit or lower limit described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit or lower limit of the numerical range described in other steps.
  • the upper limit or lower limit described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
  • process is not only an independent process, but even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, it is included in this term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved. .
  • the term “transparent” means that the average transmittance of visible light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is 80% or more, preferably 90% or more, unless otherwise specified.
  • the average transmittance of visible light is a value measured using a spectrophotometer, and can be measured using a spectrophotometer U-3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., for example.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are measured using TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, or TSKgel G2000HxL (all manufactured by Tosoh Corporation). (trade name), THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent, a differential refractometer as a detector, polystyrene as a standard substance, and a value converted using polystyrene as a standard substance measured by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer. is.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • the molecular weight of a compound having a molecular weight distribution is the weight average molecular weight (Mw).
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • the content of metal elements is a value measured using an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopic analyzer.
  • (meth)acryl is a concept that includes both acryl and methacryl
  • (meth)acryloyloxy group is a concept that includes both acryloyloxy and methacryloyloxy groups
  • (meth)acrylamide group is a concept that includes both acrylamide group and methacrylamide group
  • (meth)acrylate is a concept that includes both acrylate and methacrylate.
  • alkali-soluble means that the solubility in 100 g of a 1% by mass sodium carbonate aqueous solution with a liquid temperature of 22°C is 0.1 g or more.
  • an alkali-soluble resin is intended to be a resin that satisfies the solubility conditions described above.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in 100 g of water at pH 7.0 at a liquid temperature of 22°C is 0.1 g or more.
  • water-soluble resin is intended a resin that satisfies the solubility conditions set forth above.
  • the "solid content" of the composition means a component that forms a composition layer (e.g., photosensitive layer or intermediate layer) formed using the composition, and the composition contains solvents (e.g., organic solvents and water). etc.) means all ingredients except the solvent.
  • a liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
  • the method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern of the present invention comprises: A transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer is laminated to the transfer film and the substrate such that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface.
  • the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern includes a removal step of removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step and forming a conductor pattern on the substrate.
  • Measurement X After exposing the photosensitive layer with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the cross section of the resist pattern obtained by developing with the aqueous solution used in the developing step was observed. Let length X be the penetration length of the alkali metal on the side surface of the resist pattern.
  • the length X obtained by the measurement X of the photosensitive layer used in the method of the present invention is 1.0 ⁇ m or less. That is, penetration of the developer used in the development step is suppressed in the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer used in the method of the present invention.
  • the resist pattern formed from the photosensitive layer tends to spread toward the bottom, and the fluctuation of the shape of the bottom tends to increase. It is believed that forming a conductor pattern using such a resist pattern will adversely affect the linearity of the obtained conductor pattern.
  • the length X is 1.0 ⁇ m or less and the permeation of the developer is suppressed, the spread of the bottom of the resist pattern formed from the photosensitive layer is suppressed, and a bottom shape is formed. Also, the fluctuation of the shape is suppressed. And, as a result of forming a conductor pattern using such a resist pattern, it is believed that the linearity of the obtained conductor pattern is also improved. Also, the method of the present invention can form a conductor pattern with a small line width.
  • the more excellent linearity of the conductor pattern of the laminate and/or the smaller line width of the conductor pattern of the laminate is also referred to as the more excellent effect of the present invention.
  • the length X determined by the measurement X is 1.0 ⁇ m or less, preferably 0.6 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.4 ⁇ m or less. There is no lower limit to the length X, which is, for example, 0.0 ⁇ m or more.
  • Measurement X is performed as follows. Measurement X: After exposing the photosensitive layer with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the cross section of the resist pattern obtained by developing with the aqueous solution used in the developing step is observed, and the resist pattern is measured. Let length X be the penetration length of the alkali metal on the side surface.
  • measurement X using the transfer film used in the method of the present invention, on a substrate having a metal layer on the surface used in the method of the present invention, lamination under the same conditions as in the method of the present invention
  • the photosensitive layer disposed after the process and the temporary support peeling process is used as the measurement X target.
  • the transfer film, the photosensitive layer, the substrate having a metal layer on its surface, the bonding step, and the temporary support peeling step will be described later.
  • the same exposure light source as that used for exposure in the method of the present invention is used.
  • the amount of exposure is adjusted so that a resist pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1 can be obtained after development.
  • the transfer film has an intermediate layer, which will be described later, and the photosensitive layer disposed on the substrate having a metal layer on its surface has an intermediate layer on its surface, the exposure is carried out from the intermediate layer side.
  • the line width of the resist pattern formed for the measurement X is set so that the areas where the alkali metal permeates starting from both sides of the line-shaped resist pattern (hereinafter also simply referred to as “line”) do not overlap.
  • the line width may be 10 ⁇ m.
  • the pattern of the photomask used for exposure is appropriately adjusted so that a line with an appropriate width can be obtained.
  • measurement X after exposure, development is performed under the same conditions as in the development step carried out in the method of the present invention.
  • the developer (aqueous solution) used for development is also the same developer (aqueous solution) used in the development step carried out in the method of the present invention. The developing process and developer will be described later.
  • the laminate having the obtained resist pattern is cut in the direction perpendicular to the length direction of the lines, and the cross section of the resist pattern is observed.
  • JSM-7200F type FE-SEM field emission scanning electron microscope
  • SEM-EDX scanning electron microscope-energy dispersive X-ray analysis
  • a region from the outermost surface of the side wall of the resist pattern to a portion where the detection intensity of the alkali metal on the inner side of the resist pattern is half of the above peak is defined as a region where the alkali metal permeates.
  • FIG. 1 is a partial schematic view of a cross section (a cross section perpendicular to the length direction of the line) of a laminate having a linear resist pattern (line), and the laminate is a substrate having a metal layer on its surface. 101 and a line-shaped resist pattern (line) 107 are sequentially provided. A substrate 101 having a metal layer on its surface has a substrate 103 and a metal layer 105 in this order.
  • the line 107 has a region 109 in which the alkali metal has permeated and a region 111 in which the alkali metal has not permeated.
  • the length x is the length of the region where alkali metal penetration occurs.
  • the length x means the length in the width direction of the line, in the cross-sectional view of the line, in the area where the alkali metal permeates from the side surface of the line.
  • FIG. 1 shows a line with no skirting, but when the line is skirted (for example, in the vicinity of the metal layer 105 in the line 107, the width of the line 107 is widened). case), the length x is obtained at a position where the line width does not increase due to skirting.
  • the length x is determined from 10 random lines on the cross section of the laminate, and the average value is defined as the length X (the penetration length of the alkali metal) determined by the measurement X.
  • the photosensitive layer used in the method of the present invention preferably has a crosslinking reaction amount of 0.10 mmol/g or more, more preferably 0.20 mmol/g or more, as determined by the formula Y described below. , 0.30 mmol/g or more.
  • the upper limit of the amount of crosslinking reaction is preferably 1.20 mmol/g or less, more preferably 1.00 mmol/g or less, and even more preferably 0.80 mmol/g or less.
  • A is the value of the double bond equivalent (unit: mmol/g) of the photosensitive layer before exposure.
  • the double bond equivalent means the content of polymerizable carbon-carbon double bonds with respect to the total weight of the photosensitive layer.
  • the above double bond equivalent is determined by measuring the photosensitive layer with FT-IR (Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy).
  • the value of Ammol/g is, for example, 0.50 to 3.20 mmol/g, preferably 0.60 to 2.60 mmol/g, more preferably 1.20 to 2.50 mmol/g.
  • B exposes the photosensitive layer using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine so that the exposure amount of light with a wavelength of 365 nm is 20 mJ/cm 2 (overall exposure), and the photosensitive layer after exposure is FT.
  • - means the double bond reaction rate (unit: %) obtained by observing with IR.
  • the dominant wavelength of the high pressure mercury lamp exposure machine is 365 nm.
  • MAP-1200L manufactured by Dainippon Kaken Co., Ltd. is usually used. That is, the amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer before exposure is 100%, the amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer after exposure (Z%) is obtained, and Z is calculated from 100.
  • the value obtained by subtraction is the value of B.
  • the amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer before and after exposure is measured by FT-IR.
  • the B% value is preferably 5 to 70%, more preferably 10 to 50%.
  • the photosensitive layer used for determining the value of B is formed by the method of the present invention on a substrate having a metal layer on the surface used in the method of the present invention using the transfer film used in the method of the present invention. It is preferable that the photosensitive layer is arranged by carrying out the lamination step and the temporary support peeling step under the same conditions as those carried out.
  • the transfer film has an intermediate layer described below and the photosensitive layer disposed on the substrate having a metal layer on its surface has an intermediate layer on its surface, the exposure for obtaining the value of B is performed on the intermediate layer. do it from the side.
  • the exposure for obtaining the value of B is performed in the same manner as the exposure step performed in the method of the present invention except for the items specified as the exposure conditions for obtaining the value of B as described above. is preferred.
  • the film thickness of the photosensitive layer exposed using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposing machine is assumed to be 3 ⁇ m.
  • the test is performed after adjusting the thickness of the photosensitive layer to 3 ⁇ m.
  • the photosensitive layer of the transfer film is adjusted in advance by scraping to a thickness of 3 ⁇ m, and then the transfer film is used.
  • a procedure for determining the value of B may be performed.
  • the transfer film may be cooled appropriately.
  • the thickness of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film can be adjusted to 3 ⁇ m by the following procedure. That is, first, the photosensitive layer of the transfer film is scraped out, and a solution is prepared by dissolving the scraped photosensitive layer in an organic solvent (PGMEA: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, etc.). The solution is applied on a release film and then dried to obtain a coating film (a photosensitive layer formed using the solution).
  • PMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • the film thickness of the coating film is adjusted so as to be 3 ⁇ m in total with the film thickness of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film.
  • the transfer film is laminated on the coating film arranged on the surface of the release film so that the photosensitive layer overlaps.
  • a photosensitive layer having a total thickness of 3 ⁇ m which is composed of the coating film (the photosensitive layer formed using the solution) and the original photosensitive layer of the transfer film, is transferred.
  • the film will have.
  • the release film is removed from the transfer film, and a procedure for obtaining the value of B is performed using the transfer film having the photosensitive layer (a photosensitive layer having a total thickness of 3 ⁇ m). good.
  • the transfer film, the photosensitive layer, the substrate having a metal layer on its surface, the bonding step, and the temporary support peeling step will be described later.
  • the method of the present invention is roughly divided into a method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through an etching process and a method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through a plating process.
  • the method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through an etching process is also referred to as the first embodiment of the method of the present invention.
  • a method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through a plating process is also called a second embodiment of the method of the present invention. First, the first embodiment will be described, and then the second embodiment will be described.
  • the first embodiment of the present invention has at least the following steps (1-1) to (1-5) in order.
  • Step (1-1) laminate step: a transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer so that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface, A step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate.
  • Step (1-2) exposure step: a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer
  • Step (1-3) development step): using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt on the exposed photosensitive layer Steps and steps (1-4)
  • etching step of developing and forming a resist pattern: a step of etching the metal layer in the region where the resist pattern is not arranged.
  • Step (1-5) resist stripping step: a step of stripping the resist pattern
  • the first embodiment of the present invention includes steps (1-1) and (1-2), or step (1-2). ) and (1-3) have the following step (1-A).
  • Step (1-A) temporary support stripping step: a step of stripping the temporary support.
  • the length X obtained by the above measurement X is within a predetermined range.
  • the photosensitive layer used in the first embodiment of the present invention preferably has a cross-linking reaction amount determined by the formula Y within a predetermined range.
  • a transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer is bonded to the substrate such that the photosensitive layer is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on its surface. It is a process of matching.
  • the transfer film has a protective film which will be described later, it is preferable to carry out the bonding step after peeling off the protective film.
  • the transfer film preferably further has an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer. The transfer film will be described later.
  • the photosensitive layer side of the transfer film (the surface opposite to the temporary support side) is brought into contact with the metal layer on the substrate and pressed.
  • the pressure-bonding method include known transfer methods and lamination methods, and a method in which the surface of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is superimposed on the substrate, and pressure and heat are applied using rolls or the like is preferable.
  • the lamination method include a method using a known laminator such as a vacuum laminator and an autocut laminator.
  • the lamination temperature is preferably 70 to 130°C.
  • a substrate having a metal layer on its surface has a substrate and a metal layer disposed on the surface of the substrate.
  • the substrate with a metal layer any layer other than the above metal layer may be formed on the substrate, if necessary. That is, the substrate with a metal layer preferably has at least a substrate and a metal layer arranged on the surface of the substrate.
  • substrates include resin substrates, glass substrates, ceramic substrates, and semiconductor substrates, and substrates described in paragraph [0140] of WO2018/155193 are preferable.
  • As a material for the resin substrate polyethylene terephthalate, cycloolefin polymer, or polyimide is preferable.
  • the thickness of the resin substrate is preferably 5-200 ⁇ m, more preferably 10-100 ⁇ m.
  • a transparent substrate when using a photomask including light shielding portions arranged in a mesh pattern, it is preferable to use a transparent substrate.
  • transparent means that the transmittance of the exposure wavelength is 50% or more.
  • the total light transmittance is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 90%, and even more preferably 95%.
  • transparent substrates include resin substrates (for example, resin films) and glass substrates.
  • the resin substrate is preferably a resin substrate that transmits visible light.
  • Preferred components of the resin substrate that transmits visible light include, for example, polyamide-based resins, polyethylene terephthalate-based resins, polyethylene naphthalate-based resins, cycloolefin-based resins, polyimide-based resins, and polycarbonate-based resins.
  • Preferred components of the resin substrate that transmit visible light include, for example, polyamide, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), cycloolefin polymer (COP), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyimide, and polycarbonate.
  • the transparent substrate is preferably a polyamide film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cycloolefin polymer, a polyethylene naphthalate film, a polyimide film, or a polycarbonate film, and more preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film.
  • the thickness of the transparent substrate is not limited.
  • the thickness of the transparent substrate is preferably 10 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 20 to 120 ⁇ m, even more preferably 20 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the transparent substrate is measured by the following method. A scanning electron microscope (SEM) is used to observe a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the transparent substrate (that is, thickness direction). Based on the observed image obtained, the thickness of the transparent base material is measured at 10 points.
  • the average thickness of the transparent substrate is determined by arithmetically averaging the measured values.
  • the base material may be a silicon substrate, a glass substrate, or FR4 (Flame Retardant Type 4) or the like is preferably used.
  • the thickness of the base material is not particularly limited, and the wiring pattern may be formed on a part of the base material, and the wiring layer may be laminated.
  • a photomask including light shielding portions arranged in circular dots or openings arranged in circular dots will be described later.
  • the metal layer is a layer containing metal, and the metal is not particularly limited, and known metals can be used.
  • the metal layer is a conductive layer.
  • Main components (so-called main metals) of the metal layer include, for example, copper, chromium, lead, nickel, gold, silver, tin, and zinc.
  • the said main component intends the metal with the largest content among the metals contained in a metal layer.
  • the thickness of the metal layer is not particularly limited, preferably 50 nm or more, more preferably 100 nm or more. Although the upper limit is not particularly limited, it is preferably 2 ⁇ m or less.
  • the method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and examples include known methods such as a method of applying a dispersion liquid in which fine metal particles are dispersed and sintering the coating film, a sputtering method, and a vapor deposition method.
  • One or more metal layers may be arranged on the substrate.
  • the two or more metal layers may be the same or different, and are preferably made of different materials.
  • a substrate having at least one of a transparent electrode and lead wiring is also preferable, and the substrate can be used as a touch panel substrate.
  • the transparent electrode can function as a touch panel electrode.
  • the transparent electrodes are preferably composed of metal oxide films such as ITO (indium tin oxide) and IZO (indium zinc oxide), and metal fine wires such as metal mesh and metal nanowires. Examples of fine metal wires include fine metal wires of silver and copper, and silver conductive materials such as silver mesh and silver nanowires are preferred.
  • a metal is preferable as the material of the routing wiring.
  • the metal include gold, silver, copper, molybdenum, aluminum, titanium, chromium, zinc, and manganese, and alloys thereof in combination, preferably copper, molybdenum, aluminum, or titanium, Copper is more preferred.
  • the exposure step is a step of patternwise exposing the photosensitive layer.
  • “Pattern exposure” is a form of exposure in a pattern, and means an exposure form in which an exposed portion and a non-exposed portion are present. The positional relationship between the exposed portion (exposed region) and the non-exposed portion (non-exposed region) in the pattern exposure can be adjusted as appropriate.
  • the exposure direction the exposure may be performed from the side of the photosensitive layer or the side opposite to the side of the photosensitive layer (substrate side).
  • the exposure step is typically a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask. In the exposure step, the photomask and the layered product to be exposed may or may not be in contact with each other.
  • the exposure step includes the substrate side of the laminate from which the temporary support obtained in the temporary support peeling step has been peeled off.
  • the exposure step is carried out by bringing the surface on the opposite side into contact with a photomask and performing pattern exposure.
  • the surface (the surface of the photosensitive layer, the surface of the intermediate layer, etc.) exposed by peeling the temporary support of the laminate from which the temporary support is peeled off is brought into contact with the photomask, and the photosensitive layer is exposed.
  • An exposure step in which the layer is pattern-exposed is preferred.
  • the transfer film has a two-layer structure of a temporary support and a photosensitive layer
  • the exposed surface corresponds to the surface of the photosensitive layer
  • the transfer film includes the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive layer.
  • the surface of the intermediate layer corresponds.
  • a curing reaction of the components contained in the photosensitive layer may occur in the exposed regions of the photosensitive layer (regions corresponding to the openings of the photomask).
  • a development step is performed after the exposure to remove the non-exposed areas of the photosensitive layer to form a pattern.
  • the method of the present invention has a photomask stripping step of stripping the photomask used in the exposure step between the exposure step and the development treatment.
  • the photomask peeling process includes, for example, a known peeling process.
  • the light source for pattern exposure should be one that can irradiate at least light in a wavelength range (for example, 365 nm and 405 nm) capable of curing the photosensitive layer, and 365 nm is preferable.
  • a wavelength range for example, 365 nm and 405 nm
  • 365 nm is preferable.
  • dominant wavelength is meant the wavelength with the highest intensity.
  • Examples of light sources include various lasers, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps.
  • the exposure amount is preferably 5 to 200 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 10 to 200 mJ/cm 2 .
  • Light sources, exposure doses and exposure methods include, for example, paragraphs [0146] to [0147] of WO2018/155193, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a temporary support peeling step is performed between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the developing step. Above all, it is more preferable to have a peeling step between the bonding step and the exposure step.
  • a peeling process is a process of peeling a temporary support body from the laminated body of a transfer film and a board
  • the development step is a step of developing the exposed photosensitive layer using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt as a developer to form a pattern. By developing with the developer, the non-exposed regions of the photosensitive layer are removed, and a resist pattern having projections corresponding to the openings of the photomask is formed.
  • an alkaline aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt is preferred.
  • the alkali metal salt contained in the developer is preferably a compound that dissolves in water and exhibits alkalinity.
  • Alkali metal salts include, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, and potassium hydrogen carbonate.
  • the developer may contain compounds other than alkali metal salts that dissolve in water and exhibit alkalinity.
  • Examples of such compounds include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutyl ammonium hydroxide and choline (2-hydroxyethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide).
  • the content of water in the developer is preferably 50% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass, more preferably 90% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass, relative to the total mass of the developer.
  • the content of the alkali metal salt in the developer is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the developer.
  • Examples of the developing method include known developing methods. Specific examples include puddle development, shower development, spin development, and dip development. As the developing method, the developing method described in paragraph [0195] of WO 2015/093271 is preferable.
  • a rinse treatment for removing the developer remaining on the substrate with the metal layer before proceeding to the next step.
  • Water or the like can be used for the rinsing treatment.
  • a drying treatment for removing excess liquid from the substrate with the metal layer may be performed.
  • the position and size of the resist pattern formed on the metal layer-coated substrate are not particularly limited, but fine lines are preferred.
  • the line width of the resist pattern is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 15 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • a lower limit is 1.0 micrometers or more, for example.
  • Step (1-B) post-exposure step
  • Step (1-C) post-baking step
  • the resist pattern obtained on the substrate with the metal layer is further exposed (hereinafter, “step (1-B)” or “post Also referred to as an exposure step”) and/or a heating step (hereinafter also referred to as a “step (1-C)” or a “post-baking step”).
  • step (1-B) post-exposure step
  • step (1-C) post-exposure step
  • post-C post-baking step
  • the exposure amount in the post-exposure step is preferably 100-5000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 200-3000 mJ/cm 2 .
  • the post-baking temperature in the post-baking step is preferably 80 to 250°C, more preferably 90 to 160°C.
  • the post-baking time in the post-baking step is preferably 1 to 180 minutes, more preferably 10 to 60 minutes.
  • the etching step is a step of etching the metal layer in the region where the resist pattern is not arranged. Specifically, in the etching step, the resist pattern obtained by the above steps is used as an etching resist to etch the metal layer. When the etching process is performed, the metal layer is removed at the openings of the resist pattern, and the metal layer has the same pattern shape as the resist pattern.
  • Examples of the etching method include known etching methods. Specifically, the method described in paragraphs [0209] to [0210] of JP-A-2017-120435, the method described in paragraphs [0048] to [0054] of JP-A-2010-152155, and the etching solution Wet etching by immersion and dry etching such as plasma etching are included.
  • an acidic or alkaline etchant can be appropriately selected according to the object to be etched.
  • the acidic etchant include an acidic aqueous solution containing at least one acidic compound, and at least one selected from the group consisting of an acidic compound, ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, and potassium permanganate. and an acidic mixed aqueous solution of
  • the acidic compound contained in the acidic aqueous solution is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, and phosphoric acid.
  • Examples of the alkaline etchant include an alkaline aqueous solution containing at least one alkaline compound, and an alkaline mixed aqueous solution of an alkaline compound and a salt (eg, potassium permanganate, etc.).
  • Examples of alkaline compounds contained in the alkaline aqueous solution include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, and salts of organic amines (e.g., tetramethylammonium hydroxide etc.) is preferred.
  • the etchant preferably does not dissolve the resist pattern.
  • the developer used in the development step may also serve as the etchant used in the etching process. In this case, the development process and the etching process may be performed simultaneously.
  • etching treatment it is also preferable to perform a rinsing treatment to remove the etchant remaining on the substrate with the metal layer before proceeding to the next step.
  • a rinsing treatment Water or the like can be used for the rinse treatment.
  • a drying process for removing excess liquid from the substrate with the metal layer may be performed.
  • the resist stripping process is a process of removing the remaining resist pattern after the etching process.
  • a method of removing the remaining resist pattern includes, for example, a method of removing by chemical treatment, and a method of removing using a remover is preferable.
  • Examples of the method for removing the remaining resist pattern include a method of removing by a known method such as a spray method, a shower method, or a puddle method using a remover.
  • stripping solutions include removal solutions in which an alkaline compound is dissolved in at least one selected from the group consisting of water, dimethylsulfoxide, and N-methylpyrrolidone.
  • alkaline compounds compounds that exhibit alkalinity when dissolved in water
  • alkaline inorganic compounds such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, and tertiary amine compounds.
  • alkaline organic compounds such as quaternary ammonium salt compounds.
  • the liquid temperature of the stripping liquid is preferably 30 to 80.degree. C., more preferably 50 to 80.degree.
  • a preferred embodiment of the removal method includes a method of immersing a substrate having a pattern to be removed in a stripping solution being stirred at a liquid temperature of 50 to 80° C. for 1 to 30 minutes. It is also preferable that the stripping solution does not dissolve the metal layer.
  • a rinse treatment for removing the stripping solution remaining on the substrate.
  • Water or the like can be used for the rinse treatment.
  • a drying process for removing excess liquid from the substrate may be performed.
  • the resist pattern remaining on the substrate is removed, thereby removing the metal layer existing between the substrate and the resist pattern (the metal layer having the same pattern shape as the removed resist pattern).
  • a laminate having a conductive pattern exposed on the surface is obtained.
  • the second embodiment of the present invention has at least the following steps (2-1) to (2-6) in order.
  • Step (2-1) laminate step: a transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer so that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface, A step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate.
  • Step (2-5) resist stripping step: a step of stripping the resist pattern
  • Step (2-6) removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step, and placing the conductor pattern on the substrate
  • Step (2-A) temporary support stripping step: a step of stripping the temporary support.
  • the length X obtained by the above measurement X is within a predetermined range.
  • the photosensitive layer used in the second embodiment of the present invention preferably has a cross-linking reaction amount determined by the formula Y within a predetermined range.
  • step (2-B) or “post-exposure step”
  • step (2-C) or “post-baking step”
  • You may have The steps (2-B) and (2-C) in the second embodiment are the same as the steps (1-B) and (1-C) in the first embodiment, respectively.
  • the plating step is a step of forming a plated layer by plating on the metal layer (the metal layer exposed to the surface by the development step) in the area where the resist pattern is not arranged.
  • Examples of plating methods include electroplating and electroless plating, with electroplating being preferred from the standpoint of productivity.
  • a plating layer having a pattern shape similar to that of the area where the resist pattern is not arranged (opening of the resist pattern) is obtained on the substrate with the metal layer.
  • the metal contained in the plating layer examples include known metals. Specific examples include metals such as copper, chromium, lead, nickel, gold, silver, tin, and zinc, and alloys of these metals. Above all, the plated layer preferably contains copper or its alloy from the viewpoint of better conductivity of the conductive pattern. In addition, the plating layer preferably contains copper as a main component in order to improve the conductivity of the conductive pattern.
  • the thickness of the plating layer is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 1 ⁇ m.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less.
  • the protective layer laminating step is a step of forming a protective layer on the plating layer.
  • a material for the protective layer a material having resistance to stripping solution and/or etching solution in the resist stripping process and/or removal process is preferable. Examples include metals such as nickel, chromium, tin, zinc, magnesium, gold, and silver, alloys thereof, and resins. Among them, nickel or chromium is preferable as the material for the protective layer.
  • Examples of methods for forming the protective layer include electroless plating and electroplating, with electroplating being preferred.
  • the lower limit of the thickness of the protective layer is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, it is preferably 3.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less.
  • resist stripping step is a step of removing the remaining resist pattern after the plating step or protective layer forming step.
  • Step (2-5) can be performed in the same manner as step (1-5) described in the first embodiment.
  • the removal step is a step of removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step to obtain a conductor pattern on the substrate.
  • the plating layer formed by the plating step is used as an etching resist, and the metal layer located in the non-pattern forming region (in other words, the region not protected by the plating layer) is etched.
  • the method for removing part of the metal layer is not particularly limited, it is preferable to use a known etchant.
  • known etching solutions include ferric chloride solution, cupric chloride solution, ammonia alkali solution, sulfuric acid-hydrogen peroxide mixed solution, and phosphoric acid-hydrogen peroxide mixed solution. .
  • the metal layer exposed to the surface from the substrate is removed, and the plated layer (conductor pattern) having a pattern shape remains to obtain a laminate having the conductor pattern.
  • the upper limit of the line width of the formed conductor pattern is preferably 8 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 6 ⁇ m or less. Although the lower limit is not particularly limited, it is often 2 ⁇ m or more.
  • the method of the present invention may have other steps in addition to the above steps.
  • Other steps include, for example, the step of reducing the visible light reflectance described in paragraph [0172] of WO 2019/022089 and the surface of the insulating film described in paragraph [0172] of WO 2019/022089 , a step of forming a new conductive layer.
  • the method of the present invention may include a step of performing a process for reducing the visible light reflectance of part or all of the conductor pattern of the laminate.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance includes, for example, oxidation treatment.
  • the method of the present invention may include a step of forming an insulating film on the surface of the laminate having the conductor pattern, and a step of forming a new conductive layer (such as a conductor pattern) on the surface of the insulating film.
  • a first electrode pattern and an insulated second electrode pattern can be formed.
  • Examples of the process of forming the insulating film include a method of forming a known permanent film.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using an insulating photosensitive composition.
  • a conductive photosensitive composition may be used to form a new conductive layer in a desired pattern by photolithography.
  • the method of the present invention uses a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers (such as metal layers) on both surfaces of the laminate, and sequentially or simultaneously using the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the substrate. It is also preferred to form With the above configuration, it is possible to form a touch panel circuit wiring in which the first conductive pattern is formed on one substrate surface and the second conductive pattern is formed on the other substrate surface. It is also preferable to form the touch panel circuit wiring having the above configuration from both sides of the substrate by roll-to-roll.
  • conductive layers such as metal layers
  • the method for producing a laminate according to the present invention includes the production of conductive films such as touch panels, transparent heaters, transparent antennas, electromagnetic shielding materials, and light control films; the production of printed wiring boards and semiconductor packages; Manufacture of interconnect pillars and pins; Manufacture of metal masks; Manufacture of tape substrates such as COF (Chip on Film) and TAB (Tape Automated Bonding); Moreover, as said touch panel, a capacitive touch panel is mentioned.
  • the method for manufacturing a laminate according to the present invention can be used for forming a conductive film and peripheral circuit wiring in a touch panel.
  • the touch panel can be applied to, for example, display devices such as organic EL (electro-luminescence) display devices and liquid crystal display devices.
  • a photomask including a light shielding portion arranged in a mesh pattern is used during the exposure step.
  • the mode of using is mentioned.
  • the manufacturing method described above is suitable as a method for manufacturing a mesh-like metal wiring pattern.
  • a laminate having a conductive pattern obtained by the above manufacturing method can be used, for example, as a transparent conductive film. Specifically, it can be used for touch panel electrodes, transparent heaters, transparent antennas, electromagnetic wave shield materials, light control films, and the like.
  • the sheet resistance value of the mesh pattern region is preferably as low as possible, preferably 100 ⁇ / ⁇ or less, more preferably 20 ⁇ / ⁇ or less, and particularly preferably 5 ⁇ / ⁇ or less.
  • the second embodiment light shielding portions arranged in circular dots are formed during the exposure step.
  • An embodiment using a photomask containing The manufacturing method described above can be suitably used as a method for manufacturing vias and a method for manufacturing pillars and pins for interconnects between semiconductor chips and packages.
  • the diameter of the pillars and pins is preferably 1-20 ⁇ m, more preferably 2-10 ⁇ m, even more preferably 3-8 ⁇ m.
  • the length of the pillars and pins is preferably 1 to 20 ⁇ m, more preferably 3 to 10 ⁇ m.
  • a photomask including openings arranged in the form of circular dots is used in the exposure step.
  • the manufacturing method described above is suitable for manufacturing through holes and the like.
  • the diameter of the through-hole is preferably 1-20 ⁇ m, more preferably 2-10 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 3-8 ⁇ m.
  • the depth of the through-hole is preferably 1 to 20 ⁇ m, more preferably 3 to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern manufactured by the method of the present invention for example, in the first embodiment, light shielding portions arranged in circular dots are formed during the exposure step.
  • An embodiment using a photomask containing The manufacturing method described above is suitable for manufacturing through holes and the like.
  • the diameter of the through-hole is preferably 1-20 ⁇ m, more preferably 2-10 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 3-8 ⁇ m.
  • the depth of the through-hole is preferably 1 to 20 ⁇ m, more preferably 3 to 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • a photomask including a light shielding portion arranged in a circular dot shape may be a photomask in which one circular dot light shielding portion is arranged, or a photomask having two circular dot light shielding portions.
  • a photomask arranged as described above may be used.
  • the “photomask including openings arranged in circular dot shape” may be a photomask in which one circular dot-shaped opening is arranged, or a photomask in which two circular dot-shaped openings are arranged.
  • a photomask arranged as described above may be used.
  • the transfer film used in the method of the invention has a temporary support and a photosensitive layer.
  • the length X determined by the measurement X described above is within a predetermined range.
  • the photosensitive layer used in the first embodiment of the present invention preferably has a cross-linking reaction amount determined by the formula Y within a predetermined range.
  • the transfer film may have other layers in addition to the photosensitive layer described below. Other layers include, for example, an intermediate layer to be described later. Moreover, the transfer film may have other members (for example, a protective film) which will be described later.
  • Embodiments of the transfer film include, for example, the following configurations (1) to (2).
  • the transfer film preferably has an intermediate layer, and the following configuration (2) is more preferable.
  • a negative photosensitive layer described later is preferable.
  • the maximum width of the undulation of the transfer film is preferably 300 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 60 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the maximum width of waviness of the transfer film is a value measured by the following procedure. A test sample is prepared by cutting the transfer film in a direction perpendicular to the main surface so as to have a size of 20 cm long by 20 cm wide. In addition, when a transfer film has a protective film, a protective film is peeled from a transfer film.
  • test sample is placed on a flat and horizontal stage so that the surface of the temporary support faces the stage.
  • surface of the sample sample is scanned with a laser microscope (for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by Keyence Corporation) for the center 10 cm square range of the test sample to obtain a three-dimensional surface image.
  • the obtained three-dimensional surface image Subtract the minimum concave height from the maximum convex height observed in .
  • the above operation is performed for 10 test samples, and the arithmetic average value is taken as the maximum waviness width of the transfer film.
  • the photosensitive layer of the transfer film when it has another composition layer (for example, a photosensitive layer and / or an intermediate layer, etc.) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the photosensitive layer, another composition
  • another composition layer for example, a photosensitive layer and / or an intermediate layer, etc.
  • the total thickness of the layers is preferably 0.1 to 30%, more preferably 0.1 to 20%, of the thickness of the photosensitive layer.
  • the transmittance of the photosensitive layer for light with a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 30% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 99.9% or less, more preferably 99.0% or less.
  • the transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 2 has a temporary support 11, a composition layer 17 including an intermediate layer 13 and a photosensitive layer 15, and a protective film 19 in this order.
  • the transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 2 has the intermediate layer 13 and the protective film 19, the intermediate layer 13 and the protective film 19 may be omitted.
  • each layer (for example, a photosensitive layer and an intermediate layer) other than the protective film 19 that can be placed on the temporary support 11 is also referred to as a "composition layer".
  • the transfer film has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a member that supports the photosensitive layer, and is finally removed by the temporary support peeling process.
  • the temporary support may have either a single layer structure or a multilayer structure.
  • the temporary support is preferably a film, more preferably a resin film.
  • a film that has flexibility and does not undergo significant deformation, shrinkage, or elongation under pressure or under pressure and heat is also preferable, and a film that is free from deformation such as wrinkles and scratches is also preferable.
  • films include polyethylene terephthalate film (e.g., biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film), polymethyl methacrylate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polyimide film, and polycarbonate film, and polyethylene terephthalate film is preferred.
  • the temporary support preferably has high transparency from the viewpoint that pattern exposure can be performed through the temporary support.
  • the transmittance of the temporary support at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably less than 100%.
  • the haze of the temporary support is preferably as small as possible.
  • the haze of the temporary support is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 0.5% or less, and even more preferably 0.1% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0% or more.
  • the number of fine particles, foreign matter and defects in the temporary support is preferably as small as possible.
  • the number of fine particles (for example, fine particles with a diameter of 1 ⁇ m), foreign matter and defects in the temporary support is preferably 50/10 mm 2 or less, more preferably 10/10 mm 2 or less, and 3/10 mm. 2 or less is more preferable, and less than 1/10 mm 2 is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0 pieces/10 mm 2 or more.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is preferably 5 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 150 ⁇ m, even more preferably 5 to 50 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 5 to 25 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is calculated as an average value of arbitrary five points measured by cross-sectional observation with a SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope).
  • the temporary support may have a layer containing fine particles (lubricant layer) on one side or both sides of the temporary support from the viewpoint of handling.
  • the fine particles contained in the lubricant layer preferably have a diameter of 0.05 to 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • the surface of the temporary support in contact with the photosensitive layer may be subjected to a surface modification treatment.
  • Surface modification treatment includes, for example, treatment using UV irradiation, corona discharge, plasma, and the like.
  • the exposure amount in UV irradiation is preferably 10-2000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 50-1000 mJ/cm 2 .
  • the lamp output and illuminance are not particularly limited.
  • Light sources for UV irradiation include, for example, low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, ultra-high-pressure mercury lamps, carbon arc lamps, metal halide lamps, xenon lamps, chemical lamps, electrodeless discharge lamps, and, Light emitting diodes (LEDs) may be mentioned.
  • low-pressure mercury lamps high-pressure mercury lamps
  • ultra-high-pressure mercury lamps carbon arc lamps
  • metal halide lamps metal halide lamps
  • xenon lamps xenon lamps
  • chemical lamps electrodeless discharge lamps
  • LEDs Light emitting diodes
  • Examples of the temporary support include a 16 ⁇ m thick biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film, a 12 ⁇ m thick biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film, and a 9 ⁇ m thick biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film.
  • the temporary support for example, paragraphs [0017] to [0018] of JP-A-2014-085643, paragraphs [0019] to [0026] of JP-A-2016-027363, International Publication No. 2012/081680 and paragraphs [0029] to [0040] of WO2018/179370, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Examples of commercially available temporary supports include Lumirror 16KS40 and Lumirror 16FB40 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.); Cosmoshine A4100, Cosmoshine A4300, and Cosmoshine A8300 (manufactured by Toyobo).
  • the transfer film has a photosensitive layer.
  • a photosensitive layer As the photosensitive layer, a negative photosensitive layer is preferred.
  • the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer, the pattern formed corresponds to a cured film.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a resin to be described later and a polymerizable compound to be described later, or preferably contains a polymerizable compound to be described later and a polymerization initiator to be described later. It is more preferable to contain a polymerizable initiator, which will be described later.
  • the resin described later contains an alkali-soluble resin. That is, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a resin containing an alkali-soluble resin and a polymerizable compound.
  • the photosensitive layer contains 10.0 to 90.0% by weight of a resin, 5.0 to 70.0% by weight of a polymerizable compound, and 0.01 of a polymerization initiator, based on the total weight of the photosensitive layer. It is preferable to contain up to 20.0% by mass. Each component that the photosensitive layer may contain will be described below.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a resin.
  • a resin an alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
  • the resin preferably contains a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group from the viewpoint of suppressing thickening of the line width and deterioration of resolution when the focus position shifts during exposure.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group include an optionally substituted phenyl group and an optionally substituted aralkyl group.
  • the content of structural units derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 10.0% by mass or more, more preferably 20.0% by mass or more, more preferably 30.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin. % or more by mass is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80.0% by mass or less, more preferably 60.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 55.0% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the resin.
  • the weight average content of structural units derived from monomers having aromatic hydrocarbon groups is preferably within the above range.
  • monomers having an aromatic hydrocarbon group examples include monomers having an aralkyl group, styrene, and polymerizable styrene derivatives (e.g., methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxystyrene, 4 - vinyl benzoic acid, styrene dimer, styrene trimer, etc.), preferably a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene, more preferably styrene.
  • monomers having an aralkyl group e.g., methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxystyrene, 4 - vinyl benzoic acid, styrene dimer, styrene trimer, etc.
  • the content of structural units derived from styrene is preferably 10.0 to 80.0% by mass, preferably 20.0%, based on the total mass of the resin. ⁇ 60.0% by mass is more preferable, and 30.0 to 55.0% by mass is even more preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a plurality of resins, it is preferable that the weight average value of the content of structural units having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is within the above range.
  • the aralkyl group includes, for example, a phenylalkyl group optionally having a substituent (excluding a benzyl group) and a benzyl group optionally having a substituent.
  • An optional benzyl group is preferred.
  • Examples of monomers having a phenylalkyl group include phenylethyl (meth)acrylate.
  • Examples of monomers having a benzyl group include (meth)acrylates having a benzyl group such as benzyl (meth)acrylate and chlorobenzyl (meth)acrylate; vinyl monomers having a benzyl group such as vinylbenzyl chloride and vinylbenzyl alcohol. and preferably a (meth)acrylate having a benzyl group, more preferably a benzyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is benzyl (meth)acrylate
  • the content of structural units derived from benzyl (meth)acrylate is 10.0 to 90.0 with respect to the total mass of the resin. % by mass is preferable, 20.0 to 80.0% by mass is more preferable, and 30.0 to 70.0% by mass is even more preferable.
  • the resin containing a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group includes a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and at least one first monomer described later, and/or It is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the second monomers.
  • the resin that does not contain a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the first monomers described later, and the first monomer and at least one of the second monomers to be described later are more preferably obtained by polymerizing.
  • a 1st monomer is a monomer which has a carboxy group in a molecule
  • the first monomer include (meth)acrylic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, maleic anhydride, and maleic acid half ester.
  • (meth)acrylic acid is preferred.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the first monomer is preferably 5.0 to 50.0% by mass, more preferably 10.0 to 40.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin. 0 to 30.0% by mass is more preferable. When the content is 5.0% by mass or more, excellent developability and control of edge fuse properties can be achieved.
  • the structural unit derived from the first monomer in the resin may react with the third structural unit.
  • the content of structural units derived from the first monomer and not reacted with the third monomer in the resin is 0 with respect to the total mass of the resin. ⁇ 50.0% by mass is preferable, 0.0 to 20.0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.0 to 10.0% by mass is even more preferable.
  • the second monomer is a monomer that is non-acidic and has a polymerizable group in its molecule.
  • the polymerizable group has the same meaning as the polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound described below, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • Examples of the second monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth) acrylate.
  • tert-butyl (meth)acrylate 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylates such as 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate; esters of vinyl alcohol such as vinyl acetate; and (meth)acrylonitrile.
  • methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, or n-butyl (meth)acrylate is preferable, and methyl (meth)acrylate or ethyl (meth)acrylate is more preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the second monomer is preferably 1.0 to 80.0% by mass, more preferably 1.0 to 60.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin. 0 to 50.0% by mass is more preferable.
  • the resin may have any one of a linear structure, a branched structure and an alicyclic structure in the side chain.
  • a monomer containing a group having a branched structure in its side chain or a monomer containing a group having an alicyclic structure in its side chain a branched structure or alicyclic structure can be introduced into the side chain of the resin.
  • a group having an alicyclic structure may be either monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • “Side chain” means an atomic group branched off from the main chain.
  • the “main chain” means the relatively longest linking chain in the molecule of the polymer compound that constitutes the resin.
  • Examples of the monomer containing a group having a branched structure in the side chain include isopropyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, sec-butyl (meth)acrylate, tert-butyl (meth)acrylate, Isoamyl (meth)acrylate, tert-amyl (meth)acrylate, sec-amyl (meth)acrylate, 2-octyl (meth)acrylate, 3-octyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid and tert-octyl.
  • the monomer containing a group having an alicyclic structure in its side chain includes, for example, a monomer having a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and a monomer having a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • (Meth)acrylates having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group with 5 to 20 carbon atoms are also included.
  • (meth) acrylic acid (bicyclo[2.2.1] heptyl-2), (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-2-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid- 3-methyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3,5-dimethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3-ethyladamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3-methyl-5-ethyl-1 -adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3,5,8-triethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3,5-dimethyl-8-ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate 2-methyl- 2-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, octahydro-4,7-menthanoinden-5-yl
  • cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, (nor)bornyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, 1-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, 2-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate Fentyl acrylate, 1-menthyl (meth)acrylate, or tricyclodecane (meth)acrylate is preferred, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, (nor)bornyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, More preferred is 2-adamantyl (meth)acrylate or tricyclodecane (meth)acrylate.
  • the resin preferably has a polymerizable group, more preferably contains a structural unit having a polymerizable group, and contains a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. is more preferred.
  • the polymerizable group include a polymerizable group possessed by a polymerizable compound to be described later, preferably an ethylenically unsaturated group, and more preferably an acryloyl group or a methacryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable group is preferably a polymerizable group capable of undergoing a polymerization reaction with the polymerizable group of the polymerizable compound. It is also preferred that the resin having polymerizable groups also meet the preferred requirements as described above or below.
  • the resin containing a structural unit having a polymerizable group is preferably obtained by reacting a resin containing a structural unit derived from the first monomer with the third monomer.
  • the third monomer is a monomer having two or more polymerizable groups in its molecule, preferably a monomer having two polymerizable groups in its molecule.
  • the polymerizable group include a polymerizable group possessed by a polymerizable compound to be described later.
  • the third monomer preferably has two kinds of polymerizable groups, more preferably has an ethylenically unsaturated group and a cationic polymerizable group, an acryloyl group or a methacryloyl group and an epoxy It is more preferred to have a group.
  • Examples of the third monomer include glycidyl (meth)acrylate, allyl (meth)acrylate, and the like.
  • a structural unit represented by formula (P) is preferable.
  • R P represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • LP represents a divalent linking group.
  • P represents a polymerizable group.
  • R P represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 2 P is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • LP represents a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -NR N -, hydrocarbon groups, and groups in which these are combined. be done.
  • RN represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, and an arylene group.
  • the alkylene group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 3 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may have a heteroatom, and the methylene group in the alkylene group may be replaced with a heteroatom.
  • the heteroatom is preferably an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, more preferably an oxygen atom.
  • the cycloalkylene group may be either monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the cycloalkylene group preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the arylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a phenylene group is preferable as the arylene group.
  • the cycloalkylene group and the arylene group may have a heteroatom as a ring member atom.
  • the heteroatom is preferably an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, more preferably an oxygen atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include halogen atoms (eg, fluorine atoms), hydroxy groups, nitro groups, cyano groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, and alkenyl groups, with hydroxy groups being preferred.
  • L P an alkylene group optionally having a heteroatom is preferable.
  • P represents a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is as described above.
  • Examples of structural units having a polymerizable group include the following structural units.
  • the content of the structural unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 5.0 to 70.0% by mass, preferably 10.0 to 50%, based on the total mass of the resin. 0% by mass is more preferred, and 15.0 to 40.0% by mass is even more preferred.
  • a method for introducing a polymerizable group into a resin for example, epoxy compounds, blocked isocyanate compounds, isocyanate compounds, vinyl sulfone compounds, aldehyde compounds, methylol compounds, and carboxylic acid anhydrides.
  • a carboxy group of a structural unit derived from the first monomer of the obtained resin is introduced.
  • a third monomer preferably glycidyl (meth)acrylate
  • a polymerizable group preferably (meth)acryloxy group
  • the reaction temperature for the polymer reaction is preferably 80 to 110.degree.
  • the polymer reaction preferably uses a catalyst, more preferably an ammonium salt (tetraethylammonium bromide).
  • the reaction temperature of the polymerization reaction is preferably 70 to 100°C, more preferably 80 to 90°C.
  • the polymerization reaction preferably uses a polymerization initiator, more preferably an azo initiator as a polymerization initiator, V-601 (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) as a polymerization initiator, or V- 65 (manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) is more preferable.
  • the resin includes a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylate, a structural unit derived from styrene, or a structural unit derived from benzyl methacrylate, or a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and styrene.
  • a resin containing a structural unit derived from is preferable, and a resin containing a structural unit having a polymerizable group is more preferable.
  • the Tg of the resin is preferably 30 to 180°C, more preferably 40 to 150°C, even more preferably 50 to 120°C.
  • the acid value of the resin is preferably 220 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 190 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 170 mgKOH/g or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, still more preferably 80 mgKOH/g or more, and particularly preferably 90 mgKOH/g or more, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • “Acid number (mg KOH/g)" means the mass (mg) of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize 1 g of sample.
  • the acid value can be determined according to JIS K0070:1992, for example.
  • the acid value of the resin can be adjusted by the type of structural unit contained in the resin and/or the content of the structural unit containing an acid group. Resins satisfying the above acid value range preferably also satisfy the preferred requirements as described above or below.
  • the content of the resin satisfying the acid value range is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, more preferably 90% by mass, based on the total resin. ⁇ 100% by mass is more preferred.
  • the I/O value of the resin is preferably 0.90 or less, more preferably less than 0.70.
  • the I/O value of the resin is preferably 0.10 or more, more preferably 0.30 or more, and even more preferably 0.50 or more.
  • the I/O value is a parameter that represents a measure of the hydrophilicity/lipophilicity of a resin.
  • For the I/O value refer to "Organic Conceptual Diagram" (Yoshio Koda, Sankyo Publishing, 1984). The closer the I/O value of the resin is to 0 (zero), the lower the polarity of the resin (lipophilicity of the resin). high hydrophilicity).
  • the I/O value is an I/O value obtained by calculating I (hydrophilicity) and O (lipophilicity) based on the chemical structure of the resin.
  • Resins satisfying the above I/O value ranges also preferably satisfy the preferred requirements as described above or below.
  • the content of the resin satisfying the I/O value range is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total resin. , more preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 500,000 or less, more preferably 100,000 or less, even more preferably 30,000 or less, and particularly preferably 25,000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 3,000 or more, more preferably 4,000 or more, still more preferably 5,000 or more, and particularly preferably 10,000 or more.
  • the weight average molecular weight is 500,000 or less, resolution and developability can be improved.
  • the weight-average molecular weight is 3,000 or more, properties of development aggregates and properties of unexposed films such as edge-fuse properties and cut-chip properties of transfer films can be controlled.
  • the “edge fuse property” means the degree of easiness of protrusion of the photosensitive layer from the end face of the roll when the transfer film is wound into a roll.
  • the term “cut chip resistance” means the degree of easiness of chip flying when an unexposed film is cut with a cutter. If this chip adheres to the upper surface of the transfer film or the like, it will be transferred to the mask in the subsequent exposure process or the like, resulting in defective products.
  • the dispersity of the resin is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, still more preferably 1.0 to 4.0, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 3.0. Resins satisfying the above weight average molecular weight and/or dispersity ranges preferably also satisfy the preferred requirements as described above or below.
  • the content of the resin that satisfies the above weight average molecular weight and/or dispersity range is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total resin. % is more preferred, and 90 to 100% by mass is even more preferred.
  • One type of resin may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
  • a mixture of two types of resins containing structural units derived from monomers having aromatic hydrocarbon groups or a structure derived from monomers having aromatic hydrocarbon groups It is preferable to use a mixture of a resin containing the unit and a resin not containing a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the content of the resin containing a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 50.0% by mass or more, preferably 70.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin.
  • the above is more preferable, 80.0% by mass or more is still more preferable, and 90.0% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the resin.
  • the resin content is preferably 10.0 to 90.0% by mass, more preferably 20.0 to 80.0% by mass, and 30.0 to 70.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. is more preferred, and 40.0 to 60.0% by mass is particularly preferred.
  • the resin content is 90.0% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, the development time can be controlled.
  • the content of the resin is 10.0% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, the edge fuse resistance can be improved.
  • a method for synthesizing the resin for example, a method of adding an appropriate amount of a radical polymerization initiator to a solution obtained by diluting the above-described monomer with a solvent and heating and stirring the solution can be mentioned. You may synthesize
  • a solvent may be further added to adjust the desired concentration.
  • bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and emulsion polymerization can be used as methods for synthesizing the resin.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain other resins in addition to the above resins.
  • Other resins include, for example, acrylic resins, styrene-acrylic copolymers, polyurethane resins, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resins, polyester resins, polyamide resins, epoxy resins, polyacetal resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polyimide resins. , polybenzoxazole resins, polysiloxane resins, polyethyleneimines, polyallylamines, and polyalkylene glycols.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a polymerizable compound having a polymerizable group.
  • Polymerizable compound means a compound that polymerizes under the action of a polymerization initiator described later and that is different from the above resin.
  • the polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound may be any group that participates in the polymerization reaction.
  • a group having a cationic polymerizable group such as an epoxy group and an oxetane group;
  • the polymerizable group a group having an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, and an acryloyl group or a methacryloyl group is more preferable.
  • a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups (hereinafter, also referred to as “ethylenically unsaturated compound”) is preferable from the viewpoint of better photosensitivity of the photosensitive layer.
  • Compounds having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups (hereinafter also referred to as “polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds”) are more preferred.
  • the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups that the ethylenically unsaturated compound has in the molecule is preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and 2 to 3. More preferred, 3 being particularly preferred.
  • the polymerizable compound may have an alkyleneoxy group.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group, more preferably an ethyleneoxy group.
  • the number of alkyleneoxy groups added to the polymerizable compound is preferably 2 to 60, more preferably 2 to 30, and even more preferably 2 to 20 per molecule.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an ethyleneoxy group) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer, and 90 ⁇ 100% by mass is more preferred.
  • the polymerizable compound preferably contains a bifunctional or higher polymerizable compound, more preferably a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
  • N is an integer of 1 or more
  • the value of N means the number of polymerizable groups (preferably ethylenically unsaturated groups) possessed by the polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound is a bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated group having 2 or 3 ethylenically unsaturated groups in the molecule from the viewpoint of better balance between photosensitivity, resolution and peelability of the photosensitive layer.
  • the polymerizable compound is a bifunctional polymerizable compound (preferably a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) and a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound (preferably a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound). It is also preferred to include both.
  • the content of the bifunctional polymerizable compound is preferably 20.0% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of excellent peelability, and 40% by mass. More than 0.0% by mass is more preferable, 55.0% by mass or more is still more preferable, and 90.0% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less, more preferably 80.0% by mass or less. That is, all polymerizable compounds contained in the photosensitive layer may be bifunctional polymerizable compounds.
  • the content of the trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound is 10.0 with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound. % by mass or more is preferable, and 20.0% by mass or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less, more preferably 80.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50.0% by mass or less. That is, all polymerizable compounds contained in the photosensitive layer may be trifunctional or higher polymerizable compounds.
  • a (meth)acrylate compound having a (meth)acryloyl group as a polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer also preferably contains a polymerizable compound B1 having an aromatic ring and two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having one or more aromatic rings in the molecule among the above polymerizable compounds.
  • aromatic ring of the polymerizable compound B1 examples include aromatic hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring, and anthracene ring; thiophene ring, furan ring, pyrrole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, and pyridine ring. Aromatic heterocycles such as; The aromatic ring may have a substituent. Polymerizable compound B1 may have one or more aromatic rings.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 preferably has a bisphenol structure from the viewpoint of improving the resolution by suppressing swelling of the photosensitive layer due to the developer.
  • the bisphenol structure includes, for example, a bisphenol A structure derived from bisphenol A (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane) and a bisphenol derived from bisphenol F (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)methane).
  • the F structure and the bisphenol B structure derived from bisphenol B (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)butane) can be mentioned, with the bisphenol A structure being preferred.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure include compounds having a bisphenol structure and two polymerizable groups (preferably (meth)acryloyl groups) bonded to both ends of the bisphenol structure. Both ends of the bisphenol structure and the two polymerizable groups may be directly bonded or bonded via one or more alkyleneoxy groups.
  • the alkyleneoxy group added to both ends of the bisphenol structure is preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group, more preferably an ethyleneoxy group.
  • polymerizable compound B1 a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol A structure is preferable, and 2,2-bis(4-((meth)acryloxypolyalkoxy)phenyl)propane is more preferable.
  • 2,2-bis(4-((meth)acryloxypolyalkoxy)phenyl)propane includes, for example, 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxydiethoxy)phenyl)propane (FA-324M, Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) ), 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxyethoxypropoxy)phenyl)propane, and ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate (BPE) such as 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxypentaethoxy)phenyl)propane series, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxidedodecaethoxytetrapropoxy)phenyl)propane (FA-3200MY, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), and ethoxylated (10) bisphenol A di Acrylate (NK Ester A-BPE-10, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
  • a compound represented by the formula (B1) is also preferable as the polymerizable compound B1.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • A represents an ethylene group.
  • B represents a propylene group.
  • n1 and n3 each independently represent an integer of 1 to 39; n1+n3 represents an integer of 2-40.
  • n2 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 29; n2+n4 represents an integer of 0-30.
  • the arrangement of -(AO)- and -(B-O)- constitutional units may be either random or block. In the case of a block, either -(AO)- or -(B-O)- may be on the side of the biphenyl group.
  • n1+n2+n3+n4 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 4 to 12. Further, n2+n4 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4, still more preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 10.0% by mass or more, more preferably 20.0% by mass or more, more preferably 25.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of better resolution. % or more by mass is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70.0% by mass or less, more preferably 60.0% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of transferability and edge fusion (phenomenon in which the photosensitive composition exudes from the edge of the transfer member).
  • the content of the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 40.0% by mass or more, more preferably 50.0% by mass or more, more preferably 55.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of better resolution. % by mass or more is more preferable, and 60.0% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less, more preferably 99.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 95.0% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of releasability.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain other polymerizable compounds in addition to the above.
  • Other polymerizable compounds include, for example, known polymerizable compounds. Specifically, a compound having one ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule (monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound), a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring, and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound compound.
  • Examples of monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include ethyl (meth)acrylate, ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-(meth)acryloyloxyethyl succinate, polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate. , and phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate.
  • bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having no aromatic ring examples include alkylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polyalkylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, urethane di(meth)acrylate, and trimethylolpropane diacrylate. be done.
  • Alkylene glycol di(meth)acrylates include, for example, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate (DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), ethylene glycol dimethacrylate , 1,10-decanediol diacrylate, and neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate.
  • A-DCP tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate
  • DCP tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate
  • A-NOD-N 1,9-nonanediol
  • polyalkylene glycol di(meth)acrylate examples include polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate (NK Ester 4G, etc., manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, and polypropylene glycol. di(meth)acrylates (Aronix M-270, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • Urethane di(meth)acrylates include, for example, propylene oxide-modified urethane di(meth)acrylates, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di(meth)acrylates.
  • urethane di(meth)acrylate examples include, for example, 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.). is mentioned.
  • trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol (tri/tetra/penta/hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri/tetra) (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth) Acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth)acrylate, isocyanurate tri(meth)acrylate, glycerin tri(meth)acrylate, and alkylene oxide modified products thereof.
  • (Tri/tetra/penta/hexa)(meth)acrylate is a concept including tri(meth)acrylate, tetra(meth)acrylate, penta(meth)acrylate, and hexa(meth)acrylate.
  • (tri/tetra)(meth)acrylate” is a concept including tri(meth)acrylate and tetra(meth)acrylate.
  • alkylene oxide-modified trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds include, for example, caprolactone-modified (meth)acrylate compounds (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., and Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • KAYARAD registered trademark
  • DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • a -9300-1CL, etc. alkylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate compounds
  • KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku, ATM-35E and A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Allnex (registered Trademark) 135, etc.
  • ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate A-GLY-9E, etc.
  • the polymerizable compound may be a polymerizable compound having an acid group (for example, a carboxyl group, etc.).
  • the acid group may form an acid anhydride group.
  • the polymerizable compound having an acid group for example, Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Aronix (registered trademark) M -510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include polymerizable compounds having an acid group described in paragraphs [0025] to [0030] of JP-A-2004-239942.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably from 200 to 3,000, more preferably from 280 to 2,200, even more preferably from 300 to 2,200.
  • the polymerizable compound preferably contains a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 10 to 30000 mPa s, more preferably a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 300 to 5000 mPa s or more, and a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 500 to 3000 mPa s or more. It is further preferred to contain The polymerizable compound satisfying the above viscosity range also preferably satisfies the preferred requirements as described above or below.
  • the content of the polymerizable compounds satisfying the above range of viscosity is 10 to 100 with respect to all polymerizable compounds. % by mass is preferable, 40 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 90 to 99% by mass is even more preferable. Further, for example, the content of the polymerizable compound having a clogP of 500 or more is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 99% by mass, more preferably 35 to 65% by mass, based on the total polymerizable compound. .
  • the viscosity of a polymerizable compound is the viscosity measured at a temperature of 25° C. using a Brookfield viscometer (TVB-15 manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of the polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound is preferably 1.0 mmol/g or more, more preferably 2.0 mmol/g or more, and further preferably 3.0 mmol/g or more from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10.0 mmol/g or less.
  • Polymerizable group content means the equivalent amount (mol) of polymerizable groups contained per 1 g of the polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound preferably has a clogP of 1.0 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, still more preferably 5.0 or more, and particularly preferably more than 5.5. .
  • the clogP of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10.0 or less, more preferably 7.0 or less.
  • clogP is a value obtained by calculating the common logarithm logP of the partition coefficient P to 1-octanol and water.
  • the polymerizable compound satisfying the above clogP range preferably also satisfies the preferred requirements as described above or below.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound clogP satisfies the above range (for example, the range of 5.0 or more), relative to the total polymerizable compound, 10 to 100 mass %, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, even more preferably 90 to 99% by mass.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound having a clogP of more than 5.5 is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 99% by mass, and 35 to 65% by mass with respect to the total polymerizable compound. More preferred.
  • the polymerizable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among them, it is also preferable to use three or more kinds of polymerizable compounds from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • three types of polymerizable compounds are used, at least one of the three types is preferably polymerizable compound B1, and at least two of the three types are more preferably polymerizable compound B1.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10.0 to 70.0% by mass, more preferably 15.0 to 70.0% by mass, and 20.0 to 70.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % by mass is more preferred.
  • the mass ratio of the polymerizable compound content to the resin content is preferably 0.10 to 2.00, more preferably 0.50 to 1.50, 0.70 to 1.10 is more preferable because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains the polymerizable compound B1 and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound B1 to the content of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is 1.0. ⁇ 5.0 is preferred, 1.2 to 4.0 is more preferred, and 1.5 to 3.0 is even more preferred.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a polymerization initiator.
  • the polymerization initiator include known polymerization initiators depending on the type of polymerization reaction. Specific examples include thermal polymerization initiators and photopolymerization initiators.
  • the polymerization initiator may be either a radical polymerization initiator or a cationic polymerization initiator.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • a photopolymerization initiator is a compound that initiates polymerization of a polymerizable compound upon receiving actinic rays such as ultraviolet rays, visible rays, and X-rays. Examples of photopolymerization initiators include known photopolymerization initiators. Examples of photopolymerization initiators include radical photopolymerization initiators and cationic photopolymerization initiators, and radical photopolymerization initiators are preferred.
  • photoradical polymerization initiators examples include photopolymerization initiators having an oxime ester structure, photopolymerization initiators having an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone structure, photopolymerization initiators having an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone structure, and acylphosphine oxide. structure and a photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure.
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator is selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimers and derivatives thereof from the viewpoints of photosensitivity, visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and resolution. preferably includes at least one
  • the two 2,4,5-triarylimidazole structures in the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivative may be the same or different.
  • 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer examples include, for example, 2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-di (Methoxyphenyl)imidazole dimer, 2-(o-fluorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2-(o-methoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, and 2 -(p-methoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer.
  • photoradical polymerization initiators include, for example, paragraphs [0031] to [0042] of JP-A-2011-095716, and paragraphs [0064] to [0081] of JP-A-2015-014783.
  • a radical polymerization initiator is mentioned.
  • photoradical polymerization initiators examples include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p,p'-dimethoxybenzyl), TAZ-110 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.), benzophenone, 4,4'.
  • DBE ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate
  • benzoin methyl ether anisyl
  • TAZ-110 manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • benzophenone 4,4'.
  • a photocationic polymerization initiator is a compound that generates an acid upon receiving an actinic ray.
  • the photocationic polymerization initiator is preferably a compound that responds to an actinic ray with a wavelength of 300 nm or more (preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm) and generates an acid.
  • the sensitizer can be used.
  • the photocationic polymerization initiator is preferably a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid with a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid with a pKa of 3 or less, and an acid with a pKa of 2 or less. Photocationic polymerization initiators that generate are more preferred.
  • the lower limit is preferably -10.0 or more.
  • photocationic polymerization initiators examples include ionic photocationic polymerization initiators and nonionic photocationic polymerization initiators.
  • Ionic photocationic polymerization initiators include, for example, onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts.
  • Examples of the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator include ionic photocationic polymerization initiators described in paragraphs [0114] to [0133] of JP-A-2014-085643.
  • Nonionic photocationic polymerization initiators include, for example, trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oximesulfonate compounds.
  • trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, and imidosulfonate compounds include compounds described in paragraphs [0083] to [0088] of JP-A-2011-221494.
  • Oxime sulfonate compounds include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs [0084] to [0088] of WO2018/179640.
  • a polymerization initiator may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in 2 or more types.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator (preferably photopolymerization initiator) is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and even more preferably 10% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm during color development from the viewpoint of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and pattern visibility and resolution after development, and , acids, bases, or radicals to change the maximum absorption wavelength dye (color coupler).
  • the dye (color former) is also referred to as "dye N".
  • the dye N is contained, although the detailed mechanism is unknown, the adhesion to the adjacent layer (for example, the intermediate layer) is improved and the resolution is improved.
  • the dye "changes the maximum absorption wavelength due to acid, base, or radical” means that the dye in the colored state is decolored by acid, base, or radical, and the dye in the decolored state is acid or base. Alternatively, it may mean any one of a mode in which a color is developed by a radical and a mode in which a dye in a coloring state changes to a coloring state of another hue.
  • the dye N may be either a compound that changes from a decolored state to develop color upon exposure or a compound that changes from a colored state to decolor upon exposure.
  • it may be a dye that changes the state of color development or decoloration due to the action of an acid, a base, or a radical generated in the photosensitive layer by exposure, and an acid, a base, or a radical
  • It may be a dye that changes the state of coloring or decoloring by changing the state (for example, pH) in the photosensitive layer due to the presence of the dye.
  • it may be a dye that changes its coloring or decoloring state by being directly stimulated by an acid, a base, or a radical without being exposed to light.
  • the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by acid or radicals, and a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas and resolution. More preferred.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals and a photoradical polymerization initiator as the dye N.
  • the dye N is preferably a dye that develops color with an acid, a base, or a radical.
  • a photoradical polymerization initiator for example, a photoradical polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator), or a photobase generator is added to the photosensitive layer, and the photoradical polymerization initiator is added after exposure.
  • a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye, or a base-reactive dye e.g., a leuco dye develops color by radicals, acids, or bases generated from a photocationic polymerization initiator or a photobase generator. mentioned.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm during coloring of the dye N is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 to 700 nm, and even more preferably 550 to 650 nm.
  • the dye N may have one or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm during color development.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength with the highest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths should be 450 nm or more.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of Dye N is determined by measuring the transmission spectrum of a solution containing Dye N in the range of 400 to 780 nm (liquid temperature 25°C) using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an air atmosphere. can be measured by detecting the wavelength (maximum absorption wavelength) at which the light intensity becomes minimum.
  • Examples of dyes that develop or decolorize upon exposure include leuco compounds.
  • Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diarylmethane-based dyes, oxazine-based dyes, xanthene-based dyes, iminonaphthoquinone-based dyes, azomethine-based dyes, and anthraquinone-based dyes.
  • As the dye N a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the visibility of the exposed area and the non-exposed area.
  • leuco compounds examples include leuco compounds having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dyes), leuco compounds having a spiropyran skeleton (spiropyran dyes), leuco compounds having a fluorane skeleton (fluoran dyes), and diarylmethane skeletons.
  • triarylmethane dyes triarylmethane dyes
  • spiropyran dyes spiropyran dyes
  • fluorane skeleton fluorane skeleton
  • diarylmethane skeletons examples include leuco compounds having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dyes), leuco compounds having a spiropyran skeleton (spiropyran dyes), leuco compounds having a fluorane skeleton (fluoran dyes), and diarylmethane skeletons.
  • a leuco compound (diarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a rhodamine lactam skeleton (rhodamine lactam dye), a leuco compound having an indolylphthalide skeleton (indolylphthalide dye), and a leuco auramine skeleton leuco compounds (leuco auramine dyes) having Among them, triarylmethane-based dyes or fluoran-based dyes are preferable, and leuco compounds having a triphenylmethane skeleton (triphenylmethane-based dyes) or fluoran-based dyes are more preferable.
  • the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultine ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility in exposed and unexposed areas.
  • the lactone ring, sultine ring, or sultone ring of the leuco compound is reacted with a radical generated from a photoradical polymerization initiator or an acid generated from a photocationic polymerization initiator to change the leuco compound into a ring-closed state.
  • the color can be developed by changing the leuco compound into a ring-opened state.
  • the leuco compound is preferably a compound that has a lactone ring, a sultine ring, or a sultone ring, and develops a color when the lactone ring, sultine ring, or sultone ring is opened by a radical or an acid, and has a lactone ring. , a radical or an acid to open the lactone ring to develop a color.
  • Dyes N include, for example, dyes and leuco compounds.
  • dyes include brilliant green, ethyl violet, methyl green, crystal violet, basic fuchsine, methyl violet 2B, quinaldine red, rose bengal, methanil yellow, thymolsulfophthalein, xylenol blue, methyl orange, and paramethyl red.
  • Congo Fred Benzopurpurin 4B, ⁇ -Naphthyl Red, Nile Blue 2B, Nile Blue A, Methyl Violet, Malachite Green, Parafuchsin, Victoria Pure Blue-Naphthalene Sulfonate, Victoria Pure Blue BOH (manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • oil blue #603 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil pink #312 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil red 5B (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil scarlet #308 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil Red OG (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red RR (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Green #502 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Spiron Red BEH Special (manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), m-cresol purple, cresol red, rhodamine B, rhodamine 6G, sulforhodamine B, auramine, 4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxanilino-4-p-dieth
  • Leuco compounds include, for example, p,p',p''-hexamethyltriaminotriphenylmethane (leuco crystal violet), Pergascript Blue SRB (manufactured by Ciba-Geigy), crystal violet lactone, malachite green lactone, benzoyl leuco methylene blue, 2-(N-phenyl-N-methylamino)-6-(Np-tolyl-N-ethyl)aminofluorane, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6-(N-ethyl-p-toluidino)fluorane , 3,6-dimethoxyfluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-5-methyl-7-(N,N-dibenzylamino)fluorane, 3-(N-cyclohexyl-N-methylamino)-6 -methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino
  • the dye N a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals is preferable, and a dye that develops color by radicals is more preferable, from the viewpoint of excellent visibility in exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility and resolution after development.
  • Preferred dyes N are leuco crystal violet, crystal violet lactone, brilliant green, or victoria pure blue-naphthalene sulfonate.
  • the dye N may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of dye N is 0.1% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of excellent visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and pattern visibility and resolution after development. is preferred, 0.1 to 10% by mass is more preferred, 0.1 to 5% by mass is even more preferred, and 0.1 to 1% by mass is particularly preferred.
  • the content of the dye N means the content of the dye when all the dyes N contained in the total weight of the photosensitive layer are in a colored state.
  • a method for quantifying the content of the dye N will be described using a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
  • a solution of dye N (0.001 g) and a solution of dye N (0.01 g) in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone are prepared.
  • a photoradical polymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE01, manufactured by BASF Japan) is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiation with light of 365 nm, and all dyes N are brought into a colored state.
  • the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an air atmosphere to create a calibration curve.
  • the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are developed is measured in the same manner as described above, except that instead of the dye N, the photosensitive layer (3 g) is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the photosensitive layer, the content of dye N contained in the photosensitive layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
  • Photosensitive layer (3 g) is synonymous with 3 g of total solid content in the photosensitive composition.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a thermally crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the resulting cured film and the tackiness of the resulting uncured film.
  • a thermally crosslinkable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, which will be described later, is not treated as a polymerizable compound, but as a thermally crosslinkable compound.
  • Examples of the thermally crosslinkable compound include methylol compounds and blocked isocyanate compounds, and blocked isocyanate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the strength of the resulting cured film and the adhesiveness of the resulting uncured film.
  • blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when the resin and/or the polymerizable compound has at least one of a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, the hydrophilicity of the formed film is lowered and the photosensitive layer When the cured film is used as a protective film, the function tends to be enhanced.
  • a "blocked isocyanate compound” means a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected with a blocking agent.
  • the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is preferably 100 to 160°C, more preferably 130 to 150°C.
  • a method for measuring the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound for example, DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter (e.g., DSC6200, manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc.) is performed to determine the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate compound.
  • DSC Different scanning calorimeter
  • blocking agents having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160° C. include active methylene compounds such as malonic acid diesters, and oxime compounds.
  • Malonic acid diesters include, for example, dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, di-n-butyl malonate, and di-2-ethylhexyl malonate.
  • oxime compounds are preferable as blocking agents having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160° C. from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the film and improving the adhesion to the transferred material.
  • a blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure is obtained, for example, by isocyanurating hexamethylene diisocyanate and protecting it.
  • an oxime compound is used as a blocking agent because it is easier to adjust the dissociation temperature to a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure and can reduce development residue.
  • Compounds having an oxime structure are preferred.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group has, for example, the same definition as the polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • Block isocyanate compounds include, for example, AOI-BM, MOI-BM, and MOI-BP, etc.
  • Karenz series registered trademark
  • series registered trademark
  • As the blocked isocyanate compound the following compounds are preferred.
  • the thermally crosslinkable compound may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the thermally crosslinkable compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain other additives, if necessary, in addition to the above components.
  • Other additives include, for example, radical polymerization inhibitors, benzotriazoles, carboxybenzotriazoles, sensitizers, surfactants, plasticizers, heterocyclic compounds (e.g., triazole, etc.), pyridines (e.g., isonicotine amide, etc.), and purine bases (eg, adenine, etc.).
  • additives include, for example, metal oxide particles, chain transfer agents, antioxidants, dispersants, acid multipliers, development accelerators, conductive fibers, ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, cross-linking agents, organic , or an inorganic suspending agent, and paragraphs [0165] to [0184] of JP-A-2014-085643, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Other additives may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • radical polymerization inhibitors include thermal polymerization inhibitors described in paragraph [0018] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784, and phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or 4-methoxyphenol is preferred.
  • examples of the radical polymerization inhibitor include naphthylamine, cuprous chloride, nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, and diphenylnitrosamine. Nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt is preferred from the viewpoint of not impairing the sensitivity of the photosensitive layer. .
  • the content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.001 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, and 0.02 to 2.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 0% by mass is more preferred.
  • the content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound. 0% by mass is more preferred.
  • benzotriazoles examples include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1-chloro-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis(N-2-ethylhexyl)aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis(N-2-ethylhexyl)aminomethylene-1,2,3-tolyltriazole and bis(N-2-hydroxyethyl)aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole.
  • Carboxybenzotriazoles for example, function as rust inhibitors.
  • Carboxybenzotriazoles include, for example, carboxybenzotriazole (4-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole and 5-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole), N-(N,N- di-2-ethylhexyl)aminomethylenecarboxybenzotriazole, N-(N,N-di-2-hydroxyethyl)aminomethylenecarboxybenzotriazole, and N-(N,N-di-2-ethylhexyl)aminoethylenecarboxy Benzotriazoles are included.
  • Specific examples of carboxybenzotriazoles include CBT-1 (manufactured by Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • the total content of radical polymerization inhibitors, benzotriazoles, and carboxybenzotriazoles is preferably 0.01 to 3% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. preferable.
  • the content is 0.01% by mass or more, the storage stability of the photosensitive layer is more excellent.
  • the content is 3% by mass or less, the maintenance of sensitivity and suppression of decolorization of the dye are more excellent.
  • Sensitizers include, for example, known sensitizers, dyes and pigments. Sensitizers include, for example, dialkylaminobenzophenone compounds, pyrazoline compounds, anthracene compounds, coumarin compounds, xanthone compounds, thioxanthone compounds, acridone compounds, oxazole compounds, benzoxazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, triazole compounds (e.g., 1,2,4-triazole), stilbene compounds, triazine compounds, thiophene compounds, naphthalimide compounds, triarylamine compounds, and aminoacridine compounds.
  • Sensitizers include, for example, known sensitizers, dyes and pigments. Sensitizers include, for example, dialkylaminobenzophenone compounds, pyrazoline compounds, anthracene compounds, coumarin compounds, xanthone compounds, thioxanthone compounds, acridone compounds,
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to light sources and improving the curing speed due to the balance between polymerization speed and chain transfer. 0.05 to 1% by mass is more preferable.
  • surfactant examples include those described in paragraph [0017] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs [0060] to [0071] of JP-A-2009-237362.
  • a nonionic surfactant a fluorosurfactant, or a silicone surfactant is preferred.
  • fluorosurfactants include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144, F- 437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-551-A, F-552, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560, F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP.MFS-330, EXP. MFS-578, EXP.
  • an acrylic compound having a molecular structure with a functional group containing a fluorine atom is also preferable, in which the portion of the functional group containing the fluorine atom is cleaved when heat is applied to volatilize the fluorine atom.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include DIC's Megafac DS series (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016) and Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)). be done.
  • the fluorosurfactant it is also preferable to use a copolymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
  • the fluorosurfactant has 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) structural units derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group) (preferably 5 or more). ) and a structural unit derived from an acrylate compound.
  • examples of the fluorosurfactant include fluoropolymers having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain, such as MEGAFACE RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, and RS-72- K (manufactured by DIC Corporation).
  • fluorine-based surfactants from the viewpoint of improving environmental suitability, compounds having linear perfluoroalkyl groups having 7 or more carbon atoms, such as perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA) and perfluorooctane sulfonic acid (PFOS), are used.
  • PFOA perfluorooctanoic acid
  • PFOS perfluorooctane sulfonic acid
  • Surfactants derived from alternative materials are preferred.
  • nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, their ethoxylates and propoxylates (e.g., glycerol propoxylate and glycerol ethoxylate), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxy Ethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, and sorbitan fatty acid ester; specific examples include Pluronic (registered trademark) L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, and 25R2 (manufactured by BASF); Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, and 150R1, HYDROPALAT WE 3323 (manufactured by BASF); Solsperse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lu
  • silicone-based surfactants include linear polymers composed of siloxane bonds, and modified siloxane polymers in which organic groups are introduced into side chains and/or terminals.
  • silicone-based surfactants include EXP. S-309-2, EXP. S-315, EXP. S-503-2, EXP. S-505-2 (manufactured by DIC Corporation); DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE, Toray Silicone DC3PA, Toray Silicone SH7PA, Toray Silicone DC11PA, Toray Silicone SH21PA, Toray Silicone SH28PA, Toray Silicone SH29PA, Toray Silicone SH30PA, and Toray Silicone SH8400 (manufactured by Dow Corning Toray); X-22-4952, X-22-4272, X-22-6266, KF-351A, K354L, KF-355A, KF-945, KF-640, KF- 642, KF-643, X-22-6191, X-22-4515, KF-6004, KP-341, KF-6001, KF-6002, KP-101, KP-103, KP-104, KP-105, KP-
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, and 0.05 to 0.8% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % by mass is more preferred.
  • Plasticizers and heterocyclic compounds include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs [0097] to [0103] and paragraphs [0111] to [0118] of WO2018/179640.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain impurities.
  • Impurities include, for example, metal impurities or their ions, halide ions, residual organic solvents, residual monomers, and water.
  • Metal impurities and halide ions include, for example, sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, and ions thereof and halide ions.
  • sodium ions, potassium ions, and halide ions are preferably contained in the following amounts because they are easily mixed.
  • Metal impurities are compounds different from the particles (eg, metal oxide particles) that may be included in the transfer film.
  • the content of metal impurities is preferably 80 mass ppm or less, more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and even more preferably 2 mass ppm or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1 mass ppb or more, more preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • Methods for adjusting the content of impurities include, for example, a method of selecting a material with a low impurity content as a raw material for the photosensitive layer, a method of preventing contamination of impurities during the formation of the photosensitive layer, and a method of washing. a method of removing by The content of impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
  • residual organic solvent examples include benzene, formaldehyde, trichlorethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, and hexane.
  • the content of the residual organic solvent is preferably 100 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 20 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 4 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 mass ppb or more, more preferably 100 mass ppb or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • a method for adjusting the content of the residual organic solvent there is a method for adjusting the drying treatment conditions in the transfer film manufacturing method described below. Also, the content of the residual organic solvent can be quantified by a known method such as gas chromatography analysis.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain residual monomers of the constituent units of the resin.
  • the content of the remaining monomer is preferably 5000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 2000 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 500 ppm by mass or less relative to the total mass of the resin, from the viewpoint of patterning properties and reliability.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1 mass ppm or more, more preferably 10 mass ppm or more, relative to the total mass of the resin.
  • the residual monomer of each structural unit of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 3000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 600 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 100 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • Mass ppm or less is more preferable.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, more preferably 1 mass ppm or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the residual amount of the monomer when synthesizing the alkali-soluble resin by polymer reaction is also within the above range.
  • the content of glycidyl acrylate is preferably within the above range.
  • the method for adjusting the content of the remaining monomers include a method for adjusting the content of the impurities.
  • the amount of residual monomers can be measured by known methods such as liquid chromatography and gas chromatography.
  • the water content in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and lamination properties.
  • the photosensitive layer satisfies at least one or more (eg, 1 to 4) requirements selected from the following requirements 1 to 4. preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer has a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less and contains a resin having a polymerizable group.
  • Requirement 2 The photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less and a polymerizable compound having a clogP of 5.0 or more (preferably more than 5.5).
  • the photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less and a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 300 to 5000 mPa ⁇ s.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and contains a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
  • the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and the resin has a crosslinkable group, thereby forming a dense crosslinked structure. can be constructed, and penetration of the developer into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
  • the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and clogP is a predetermined value or more and contains a hydrophobic polymerizable compound to improve the photosensitive It is believed that the layer becomes hydrophobic and the penetration of the developer into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
  • the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and the photosensitive layer absorbs moisture by containing a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of a predetermined value or more. It is thought that the penetration of the developing solution into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
  • the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and a dense crosslinked structure can be formed by containing a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound. It is thought that the penetration of the developing solution into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
  • the thickness (film thickness) of the photosensitive layer is often 0.1 ⁇ m or more, preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more, and particularly preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the film thickness is often 300 ⁇ m or less, preferably 100 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 50 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the content of the polymerizable group in the photosensitive layer is preferably 1.0 mmol/g or more, more preferably 2.0 mmol/g or more, and further preferably 3.0 mmol/g or more from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10.0 mmol/g or less. Moreover, you may interpret by replacing the said polymerizable content with content of a double bond.
  • the acid value of the photosensitive layer is preferably 10 to 150 mgKOH/g, more preferably 40 to 100 mgKOH/g, still more preferably 50 to 100 mgKOH/g, particularly preferably 50 to 90 mgKOH/g, most preferably 60 to 80 mgKOH/g. preferable.
  • the method for measuring the acid value include a method for measuring the acid value in the resin and a method for calculating the acid value from the content of a resin whose acid value is known.
  • the transfer film may have an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer.
  • the intermediate layer is preferably arranged between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer.
  • the intermediate layer include a water-soluble resin layer and an oxygen blocking layer having an oxygen blocking function described as a "separation layer" in JP-A-5-072724.
  • an oxygen-blocking layer is also preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of exposure is improved, the time load of the exposure machine is reduced, and the productivity is improved.
  • the oxygen barrier layer exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an alkaline aqueous solution (1% by weight aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22°C). Each component that the intermediate layer may contain will be described below.
  • the intermediate layer may contain a water-soluble resin.
  • water-soluble resins include polyvinyl alcohol-based resins, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based resins, cellulose-based resins, polyether-based resins, gelatin, and polyamide resins.
  • Cellulose-based resins include, for example, water-soluble cellulose derivatives.
  • Water-soluble cellulose derivatives include, for example, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, and ethylcellulose.
  • Polyether-based resins include, for example, polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, their alkylene oxide side adducts, and vinyl ether-based resins.
  • Polyamide resins include, for example, acrylamide-based resins, vinylamide-based resins, and allylamide-based resins.
  • water-soluble resins examples include copolymers of (meth)acrylic acid/vinyl compounds, preferably copolymers of (meth)acrylic acid and allyl (meth)acrylate, and methacrylic acid and allyl methacrylate. and copolymers are more preferred.
  • each composition ratio (mol% of (meth)acrylic acid/mol% of vinyl compound) is 90/10 to 20/80. is preferred, and 80/20 to 30/70 is more preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the water-soluble resin is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 7,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 200,000 or less, more preferably 100,000 or less, even more preferably 50,000 or less.
  • the dispersity of the water-soluble resin is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3.
  • One type of water-soluble resin may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
  • the content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100% by mass or less, more preferably 99.99% by mass or less, and even more preferably 99.9% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer.
  • the intermediate layer may contain other components in addition to the above resins.
  • polyhydric alcohols, alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols, phenol derivatives, or amide compounds are preferable, and polyhydric alcohols, phenol derivatives, or amide compounds are more preferable.
  • Polyhydric alcohols include, for example, glycerin, diglycerin, and diethylene glycol.
  • the number of hydroxy groups possessed by the polyhydric alcohol is preferably 2-10.
  • alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols include compounds obtained by adding ethyleneoxy groups, propyleneoxy groups, and the like to the above polyhydric alcohols.
  • the average number of alkyleneoxy groups to be added is preferably 1-100, preferably 2-50, more preferably 2-20.
  • phenol derivatives include bisphenol A and bisphenol S.
  • Amide compounds include, for example, N-methylpyrrolidone.
  • the intermediate layer may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of water-soluble cellulose derivatives, polyhydric alcohols, alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols, polyether resins, phenol derivatives, and amide compounds. preferable.
  • the molecular weight of other components is preferably less than 5,000, more preferably 4,000 or less, even more preferably 3,000 or less, particularly preferably 2,000 or less, and most preferably 1,500 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 60 or more.
  • the content of other components is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer.
  • the upper limit is preferably less than 30% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass or less, and even more preferably 5% by mass or less.
  • the intermediate layer may contain impurities.
  • Impurities include, for example, impurities contained in the photosensitive layer.
  • the thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 3.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more.
  • the transfer film may have other members in addition to the above members.
  • Other members include, for example, a protective film.
  • Protective films include, for example, resin films having heat resistance and solvent resistance. Specific examples include polyolefin films such as polypropylene films and polyethylene films, polyester films such as polyethylene terephthalate films, polycarbonate films, and polystyrene films. As the protective film, a resin film made of the same material as the temporary support may be used. Especially, as a protective film, a polyolefin film is preferable, and a polypropylene film or a polyethylene film is more preferable.
  • the thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 50 ⁇ m, even more preferably 5 to 40 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 15 to 30 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 ⁇ m or more from the viewpoint of excellent mechanical strength, and preferably 100 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of being relatively inexpensive.
  • the number of fisheyes with a diameter of 80 ⁇ m or more contained in the protective film is preferably 5/m 2 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0/m 2 or more.
  • "Fish eye” means that when a film is produced by methods such as heat melting, kneading, extrusion, biaxial stretching, casting, etc., foreign substances, undissolved substances, and oxidation-degraded substances of the material are found in the film. It means what is taken.
  • the number of particles having a diameter of 3 ⁇ m or more contained in the protective film is preferably 30 particles/mm 2 or less, more preferably 10 particles/mm 2 or less, and even more preferably 5 particles/mm 2 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0/mm 2 or more. When it is within the above range, it is possible to suppress defects caused by transferring irregularities caused by particles contained in the protective film to the photosensitive layer or the conductive layer.
  • the surface of the protective film opposite to the surface in contact with the photosensitive layer or the surface in contact thereof preferably has an arithmetic mean roughness Ra of 0.01 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.02 ⁇ m or more. 0.03 ⁇ m or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably less than 0.50 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.40 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 0.30 ⁇ m or less.
  • a method for producing the transfer film 10 includes, for example, a step of applying an intermediate layer forming composition to the surface of the temporary support 11 to form a coating film, and drying the coating film to form the intermediate layer 13. a) coating a photosensitive composition on the surface of the intermediate layer 13 to form a coating film, and drying the coating film to form the photosensitive layer 15;
  • a method for producing a transfer film a method including a step of applying a photosensitive composition to the surface of a temporary support to form a coating film, and further drying this coating film to form a photosensitive layer. be done. In this case the transfer film does not have an intermediate layer 13 .
  • the transfer film 10 is manufactured by pressure-bonding the protective film 19 onto the photosensitive layer 15 of the laminate manufactured by the manufacturing method described above.
  • the transfer film manufacturing method includes a step of providing a protective film 19 so as to be in contact with the surface of the photosensitive layer 15 opposite to the temporary support 11 side, so that the temporary support 11, the intermediate layer 13, the photosensitive It is preferred to manufacture transfer film 10 with layer 15 and protective film 19 .
  • a method for producing the transfer film by including a step of providing a protective film 19 so as to be in contact with the surface of the photosensitive layer 15 opposite to the temporary support 11 side, the temporary support 11, the intermediate layer 13, It is also preferred to manufacture the transfer film 10 with a photosensitive layer 15 and a protective film 19 .
  • a roll-shaped transfer film may be produced and stored by winding the transfer film 10 produced by the above production method.
  • the transfer film in roll form can be provided as it is in the step of bonding with a substrate (substrate with a metal layer) in a roll-to-roll method, which will be described later.
  • Photosensitive composition and method for forming photosensitive layer As a method for forming the photosensitive layer, a coating method in which a photosensitive composition containing components contained in the photosensitive layer (for example, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, etc.) and a solvent is used is preferred. As a method for forming the photosensitive layer, for example, a photosensitive composition is applied on the intermediate layer to form a coating film, and if necessary, the coating film is dried at a predetermined temperature to form a photosensitive layer. is preferred. The amount of residual solvent is adjusted by the drying treatment of the coating film.
  • a photosensitive composition containing components contained in the photosensitive layer for example, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, etc.
  • a solvent for example, a photosensitive composition is applied on the intermediate layer to form a coating film, and if necessary, the coating film is dried at a predetermined temperature to form a photosensitive layer. is preferred. The amount of residual solvent
  • the photosensitive composition preferably contains components contained in the photosensitive layer and a solvent.
  • the content of each component contained in the photosensitive layer is as described above.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse components other than the solvent contained in the photosensitive layer.
  • solvents include alkylene glycol ether solvents, alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents, alcohol solvents (e.g., methanol and ethanol), ketone solvents (e.g., acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.), aromatic hydrocarbon solvents (e.g., toluene, etc.).
  • aprotic polar solvents e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide, etc.
  • cyclic ether solvents e.g., tetrahydrofuran, etc.
  • ester solvents e.g., n-propyl acetate, etc.
  • amide solvents lactone solvents, and combinations thereof and mixed solvents.
  • the solvent preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of alkylene glycol ether solvents and alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents.
  • a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of alkylene glycol ether solvents and alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents and at least one selected from the group consisting of ketone solvents and cyclic ether solvents is more preferable.
  • a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, a ketone solvent, and a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable.
  • Alkylene glycol ether solvents include, for example, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, ethylene glycol dialkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether (eg, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate), propylene glycol dialkyl ether, diethylene glycol dialkyl ether, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl. ethers and dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers.
  • Alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents include, for example, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, and dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate.
  • Examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs [0092] to [0094] of International Publication No. 2018/179640, and the solvents described in paragraph [0014] of JP-A-2018-177889. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in 2 or more types.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 1,200 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive composition.
  • Examples of the coating method of the photosensitive composition include known coating methods. Specific examples include a printing method, a spray method, a roll coating method, a bar coating method, a curtain coating method, a spin coating method, and a die coating method (slit coating method).
  • Heat drying or reduced pressure drying is preferable as a method for drying the coating film of the photosensitive composition.
  • the drying temperature is preferably 90° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher, and even more preferably 110° C. or higher.
  • the upper limit is preferably 130°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower.
  • a drying method a method of continuously changing the drying temperature may be used.
  • the drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer.
  • the upper limit is preferably 600 seconds or less, more preferably 450 seconds or less, and even more preferably 300 seconds or less.
  • a transfer film may be produced by laminating a protective film to the photosensitive layer.
  • methods for bonding the protective film to the photosensitive layer include known methods.
  • Apparatuses for bonding the protective film to the photosensitive layer include, for example, known laminators such as a vacuum laminator and an autocut laminator.
  • the laminator it is preferable to have a heatable roller such as a rubber roller and to apply pressure and heat.
  • composition for Intermediate Layer Formation and Method for Forming Intermediate Layer As a method for forming the intermediate layer, a coating method in which a composition for forming an intermediate layer containing components contained in the intermediate layer (for example, a water-soluble resin, etc.) and a solvent is used for coating is preferable.
  • a method for forming the intermediate layer for example, the composition for forming an intermediate layer is applied onto a temporary support to form a coating film, and if necessary, the coating film is dried at a predetermined temperature to form an intermediate layer. A method of forming layers is preferred. The amount of residual solvent is adjusted by the drying treatment of the coating film.
  • the composition for forming the intermediate layer contains the components contained in the intermediate layer and the solvent.
  • the contents of the components contained in the intermediate layer are as described above.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse the components contained in the intermediate layer.
  • the solvent is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of water and water-miscible organic solvents, more preferably water or a mixed solvent of water and water-miscible organic solvents.
  • water-miscible organic solvents include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, glycerin, and mixed solvents thereof, preferably alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, methanol or Ethanol is more preferred.
  • a solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in 2 or more types.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the intermediate layer-forming composition.
  • Examples of methods for forming the intermediate layer include known coating methods. Specific examples include slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
  • Heat drying or reduced pressure drying is preferable as a method for drying the coating film of the intermediate layer forming composition.
  • the drying temperature is preferably 90° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher, and even more preferably 110° C. or higher.
  • the upper limit is preferably 130°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower.
  • a drying method a method of continuously changing the drying temperature may be used.
  • the drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer.
  • the upper limit is preferably 600 seconds or less, more preferably 450 seconds or less, and even more preferably 300 seconds or less.
  • the photosensitive layer of the transfer film was formed using a photosensitive composition.
  • the components used for the preparation of the photosensitive composition are as follows, and each component shown below was mixed according to the formulation shown in the table shown later, and each photosensitive composition used in Examples or Comparative Examples was prepared. Obtained.
  • the "composition” column shows the types of structural units possessed by each resin (compound), and the mass ratio of the content of each structural unit is shown in parentheses.
  • the name of the monomer from which each structural unit is derived is shown.
  • compound 1 is a resin having structural units based on styrene, structural units based on methyl methacrylate, and structural units based on methacrylic acid in a mass ratio of 52:19:29, respectively.
  • the structural unit represented as "methacrylic acid-glycidyl methacrylate” means a structural unit obtained by reacting a carboxy group of a structural unit based on methacrylic acid with glycidyl methacrylate.
  • the structural unit described as "methacrylic acid” is a structural unit that does not correspond to the structural unit described as "methacrylic acid-glycidyl methacrylate”.
  • ⁇ Antirust agent> ⁇ CBT-1 Carboxybenzotriazole, manufactured by Johoku Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • the intermediate layer of the transfer film was formed using the intermediate layer-forming composition.
  • the components used in the preparation of the composition for forming the intermediate layer are as follows. A composition for
  • ⁇ Resin> ⁇ PVA: Polyvinyl alcohol, product name “Kuraray Poval PVA-205”, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.
  • ⁇ PVP Polypyrrolidone, product name “Polyvinylpyrrolidone K-30”, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.
  • HPMC Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, product name “Metolose” 60SH-03", manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Each transfer film composed of a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer was produced. Specifically, it is as follows. First, on a temporary support (16 ⁇ m thick polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.)), an intermediate layer forming composition was applied using a bar coater so that the thickness after drying was 1.0 ⁇ m. and dried in an oven at 90° C. to form an intermediate layer. Furthermore, on the intermediate layer, a photosensitive composition is applied using a bar coater so that the thickness after drying becomes 3.0 ⁇ m, dried at 80° C. using an oven, and the photosensitive layer (negative type A photosensitive layer) was formed. A 16 ⁇ m-thick polyethylene terephthalate (16KS40, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was pressure-bonded onto the obtained photosensitive layer as a protective film to prepare a transfer film used in each example or comparative example.
  • a temporary support (16 ⁇ m thick polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumir
  • a copper layer with a thickness of 500 nm was prepared by sputtering on a PET film (polyethylene terephthalate film) with a thickness of 188 ⁇ m. , a roll temperature of 90° C., a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, and a linear velocity of 3.0 m/min. was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the lamination conditions of , to obtain a laminate.
  • the laminate has a configuration of "PET film-copper layer-photosensitive layer-intermediate layer-temporary support". The steps up to this point are referred to as a layered product manufacturing stage.
  • the temporary support was peeled off from the obtained laminate to expose the intermediate layer on the surface of the laminate.
  • a photomask having a pattern with a line ( ⁇ m)/space ( ⁇ m) ratio of 10/10 was brought into close contact with the intermediate layer exposed on the surface of the laminate.
  • Light was irradiated using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine (MAP-1200L, manufactured by Dai Nippon Kaken Co., Ltd., dominant wavelength: 365 nm). The amount of exposure was such that the resist pattern obtained after development reproduces the line-and-space shape of the photomask. After that, development was carried out using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 28° C. as a developer.
  • a laminate having a line-and-space resist pattern with an average line width of 10 ⁇ m was obtained.
  • the steps up to this point are referred to as a first pattern formation step.
  • the laminate has a configuration of "PET film-copper layer-resist pattern".
  • the obtained laminate was cut perpendicularly to the length direction of the line, and the cross section was observed to determine the permeation length X (unit: ⁇ m) of the developing solution. Specifically, X was obtained by observing by the method described in the specification.
  • a photomask is brought into close contact with the intermediate layer exposed on the surface of the laminate, and a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine (MAP-1200L, manufactured by Dainippon Kaken Co., Ltd., dominant wavelength: 365 nm). was used to irradiate (exposure) light.
  • exposure whole surface exposure
  • the photosensitive layer after exposure is observed by FT-IR, and the amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer before exposure is assumed to be 100%, and the carbon-carbon double reacted by exposure
  • LWR Line Width Roughness
  • the following table shows the evaluation results of each example or comparative example.
  • formulations of the photosensitive composition and the composition for forming the intermediate layer used to prepare the transfer film used in each example or comparative example are shown.
  • Compounds 1 to 4 (resin) are used in the formulation of the photosensitive composition in the form of a solution (resin solution) containing a compound that is a resin. ).
  • the photosensitive composition used in Example 1 contains 25.2 parts by mass of a resin solution having a solid content (compound 1) of 30% by mass with respect to the total mass.
  • the solvent in the resin solution is PGMEA (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate).
  • the viscosity of the polymerizable compound is measured at a temperature of 25° C. using a Brookfield viscometer (TVB-15 manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.).
  • the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the penetration length X of the developer, which is obtained by the measurement X, is 0.6 ⁇ m or less, and the present invention is obtained when it is 0.4 ⁇ m or less. It was confirmed that the effect of
  • Comparison between Examples 1 and 7 and between Examples 2 and 4 shows that the photosensitive layer of the transfer film used in the method of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound having 3 or more polymerizable groups. It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when it is included.
  • the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the photosensitive layer of the transfer film used in the method of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound having a clogP of 5.0 or more. It was confirmed that the effects of the present invention are more excellent when the polymerizable compound having a clogP of more than 5.5 is included.
  • a laminate having a conductor pattern was produced as follows. First, the steps up to the first pattern formation step in [Measurement X] described above were performed in the same manner to obtain a substrate on which a resist pattern was formed (a laminate having a resist pattern). (However, when evaluating the conductor pattern resolution (minimum resolution line width), the line width of the finally formed conductor pattern was adjusted by varying the exposure dose during exposure.)
  • the laminate had a configuration of "PET film-copper layer-resist pattern", and the copper layer was used as a seed layer.
  • the laminate was placed in a copper sulfate plating solution (copper sulfate 75 g/L, sulfuric acid 190 g/L, chloride ion 50 ppm by mass, manufactured by Meltex Inc., "Coppergleam PCM", 5 mL/L), and 1 A/dm 2 Copper plating treatment was performed under the conditions of After the laminate after the copper plating treatment is washed with water and dried, the resist pattern is peeled off by immersing it in a stripping solution (Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., "R-100", 0.2% by volume) at 50 ° C.
  • a stripping solution Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., "R-100", 0.2% by volume
  • the copper layer (seed layer) of the laminate was removed with an aqueous solution containing 0.1% by mass sulfuric acid and 0.1% by mass hydrogen peroxide.
  • a substrate laminate having a conductor pattern
  • conductor pattern linearity (LWR) and conductor pattern resolution (minimum resolution line width) are measured in the same manner as described above. evaluated to

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Manufacturing Of Printed Wiring (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention addresses the problem of providing a method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern, whereby a laminate having a conductor pattern with excellent linearity can be produced. The method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to the present invention comprises a prescribed step that uses a transfer film and the like having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer having a length X determined by a measurement X below of 1.0 μm or less. Measurement X: A cross-section of a resist pattern, which is developed and obtained after the photosensitive layer has been exposed with a line pattern of a line width to space width of 1:1, is observed, and a penetration length of alkali metal in a side surface of the resist pattern is used as the length X.

Description

導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法LAMINATED PRODUCTION METHOD HAVING CONDUCTOR PATTERN
 本発明は、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a laminate having conductor patterns.
 所定の導体パターンを得るための工程数が少ないことから、感光性層を有する転写フィルムを用いて任意の基板上にレジストパターンを配置して、このレジストパターンを利用して導体パターンを形成する方法が使用される場合がある。 Since the number of steps for obtaining a predetermined conductor pattern is small, a method in which a resist pattern is arranged on an arbitrary substrate using a transfer film having a photosensitive layer and a conductor pattern is formed using this resist pattern. is sometimes used.
 特許文献1では、支持フィルム上に、所定の中間層と、所定の感光性樹脂層とを順次積層してなる感光性樹脂積層体が開示されている。 Patent Document 1 discloses a photosensitive resin laminate obtained by sequentially laminating a predetermined intermediate layer and a predetermined photosensitive resin layer on a support film.
特開2008-175957号公報JP 2008-175957 A
 ところで、直線性に劣る導体パターンでは、特に導体パターンを細線化した場合において、わずかな直線性に違いに起因して導体パターンの断線及び/又は短絡を生じさせ、通電に悪影響を及ぼす可能性がある。
 本発明者らが特許文献1に記載された感光性樹脂積層体(転写フィルム)を用いて導体パターンの形成を試みたところ、基板上に形成される導体パターンの直線性に改善の余地があることを知見した。
By the way, in a conductor pattern with poor linearity, especially when the conductor pattern is thinned, a slight difference in linearity may cause disconnection and/or short circuit of the conductor pattern, which may adversely affect current flow. be.
When the present inventors attempted to form a conductor pattern using the photosensitive resin laminate (transfer film) described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the linearity of the conductor pattern formed on the substrate. I found out.
 そこで、本発明は、直線性に優れる導体パターンを有する積層体を作製できる、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法を提供することを課題とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern that can produce a laminate having a conductor pattern with excellent linearity.
 本発明者らは、以下の構成により上記課題を解決できることを見出した。 The inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by the following configuration.
 〔1〕
 仮支持体と、感光性層とを有する転写フィルムを、上記感光性層側が、表面に金属層を有する基板の上記金属層に接するように、上記転写フィルムと上記基板とを貼合する貼合工程と、
 上記感光性層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
 露光された上記感光性層にアルカリ金属塩を含む水溶液を用いて現像処理を実施し、レジストパターンを形成する現像工程と、
 上記レジストパターンが配置されていない領域にある上記金属層に、エッチング処理を行うエッチング処理工程、又は、めっき処理を行うめっき処理工程と、
 上記レジストパターンを剥離するレジスト剥離工程と、
 更に、上記めっき処理工程を有する場合は、上記レジスト剥離工程によって露出した上記金属層を除去し、上記基板上に導体パターンを形成する除去工程と、を有する、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法であって、
 上記貼合工程と上記露光工程との間、又は、上記露光工程と上記現像工程との間に、更に、上記仮支持体を剥離する仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
 上記感光性層は、以下の測定Xで求められる長さXが、1.0μm以下となる、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 測定X:上記感光性層を、ライン幅とスペース幅が1:1のラインパターンで露光した後、上記現像工程で使用される上記水溶液で現像して得られるレジストパターンの断面を観察し、上記レジストパターンの側面におけるアルカリ金属の浸み込み長さを長さXとする。
 〔2〕
 上記感光性層が、式Yで求められる感光性層の架橋反応量が0.20mmol/g以上となる、〔1〕に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 式Y:
 架橋反応量=(A×B)÷100
 ただし、露光前の上記感光性層の二重結合当量をAmmol/gとし、高圧水銀灯露光機を用いて波長365nmの光の露光量が20mJ/cmとなるように露光した後の上記感光性層をFT-IRで観測して求められる二重結合反応率をB%とする。
 なお、上記高圧水銀灯露光機を用いて露光される上記感光性層の膜厚は3μmとする。
 〔3〕
 上記感光性層が、重合開始剤及び重合性化合物を含む、〔1〕又は〔2〕に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔4〕
 上記重合性化合物が、2官能以上の重合性化合物を含む、〔3〕に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔5〕
 上記重合性化合物が、3官能以上の重合性化合物を含む、〔3〕又は〔4〕に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔6〕
 上記重合性化合物が、エチレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物を含む、〔3〕~〔5〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔7〕
 上記感光性層が、I/O値が0.70未満である樹脂を含む、〔1〕~〔6〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔8〕
 上記感光性層が、重合性基を有する樹脂を含む、〔1〕~〔7〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔9〕
 上記感光性層が、重量平均分子量が5,000~30,000である樹脂を含む、〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔10〕
 上記感光性層が、酸価が、80~200mgKOH/gである樹脂を含む、〔1〕~〔9〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔11〕
 上記感光性層の膜厚が、5μm以下である、〔1〕~〔10〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔12〕
 上記転写フィルムが、上記仮支持体と上記感光性樹層との間に、中間層を有する、〔1〕~〔11〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔13〕
 上記中間層が、水溶性樹脂を含む、〔12〕に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔14〕
 上記中間層が、水溶性セルロース誘導体、多価アルコール類、多価アルコール類のアルキレンオキサイド付加物、ポリエーテル類、フェノール誘導体、及び、アミド化合物からなる群より選ばれる1種以上を含む〔12〕又は〔13〕に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔15〕
 上記貼合工程と上記露光工程との間に、上記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
 上記露光工程が、フォトマスクを介してパターン露光を行う工程である、〔1〕~〔11〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔16〕
 上記貼合工程と上記露光工程との間に、上記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
 上記露光工程が、露出した上記感光性層の表面とフォトマスクとを接触させてパターン露光を行う工程である、〔1〕~〔11〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔17〕
 上記貼合工程と上記露光工程との間に、上記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
 上記露光工程が、露出した上記中間層の表面とフォトマスクとを接触させてパターン露光を行う工程である、〔12〕~〔14〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔18〕
 上記露光工程と上記現像工程との間に、上記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
 上記露光工程が、フォトマスクを介してパターン露光を行う工程である、〔1〕~〔11〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔19〕
 上記フォトマスクが、メッシュ状に配置された遮光部を含む、〔15〕~〔18〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔20〕
 上記フォトマスクが、円形ドット状に配置された遮光部を含む、〔15〕~〔18〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 〔21〕
 上記フォトマスクが、円形ドット状に配置された開口部を含む、〔15〕~〔18〕のいずれかに記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
[1]
A transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer is laminated to the transfer film and the substrate such that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface. process and
An exposure step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer;
a development step of performing a development treatment on the exposed photosensitive layer using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt to form a resist pattern;
an etching process of performing an etching process or a plating process of performing a plating process on the metal layer in a region where the resist pattern is not arranged;
a resist stripping step of stripping the resist pattern;
Further, when the plating step is included, the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern includes a removal step of removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step and forming a conductor pattern on the substrate. and
Between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the development step, a temporary support peeling step of peeling the temporary support,
A method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern, wherein the photosensitive layer has a length X of 1.0 μm or less, which is obtained by the following measurement X.
Measurement X: After exposing the photosensitive layer with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the cross section of the resist pattern obtained by developing with the aqueous solution used in the developing step was observed. Let length X be the penetration length of the alkali metal on the side surface of the resist pattern.
[2]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [1], wherein the photosensitive layer has a crosslinking reaction amount of 0.20 mmol/g or more as determined by the formula Y.
Formula Y:
Crosslinking reaction amount = (A × B) ÷ 100
However, the double bond equivalent of the photosensitive layer before exposure is Ammol/g, and the photosensitivity after exposure using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine so that the exposure amount of light with a wavelength of 365 nm is 20 mJ / cm 2 The double bond reaction rate obtained by observing the layer with FT-IR is defined as B%.
The film thickness of the photosensitive layer exposed using the high-pressure mercury lamp exposure device is set to 3 μm.
[3]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [1] or [2], wherein the photosensitive layer contains a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
[4]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [3], wherein the polymerizable compound contains a polymerizable compound having a functionality of two or more.
[5]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [3] or [4], wherein the polymerizable compound contains a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
[6]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [3] to [5], wherein the polymerizable compound contains a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group.
[7]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having an I/O value of less than 0.70.
[8]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having a polymerizable group.
[9]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [8], wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 5,000 to 30,000.
[10]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [9], wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having an acid value of 80 to 200 mgKOH/g.
[11]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [10], wherein the photosensitive layer has a thickness of 5 μm or less.
[12]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the transfer film has an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer.
[13]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [12], wherein the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble resin.
[14]
The intermediate layer contains one or more selected from the group consisting of water-soluble cellulose derivatives, polyhydric alcohols, alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols, polyethers, phenol derivatives, and amide compounds [12]. Or a method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to [13].
[15]
Between the bonding step and the exposure step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask.
[16]
Between the bonding step and the exposure step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
Manufacture of a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure by bringing the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer into contact with a photomask. Method.
[17]
Between the bonding step and the exposure step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [12] to [14], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure by bringing the exposed surface of the intermediate layer into contact with a photomask. .
[18]
Between the exposure step and the development step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask.
[19]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [15] to [18], wherein the photomask includes a light shielding portion arranged in a mesh shape.
[20]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [15] to [18], wherein the photomask includes light shielding portions arranged in circular dots.
[21]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of [15] to [18], wherein the photomask includes openings arranged in circular dots.
 本発明によれば、直線性に優れる導体パターンを有する積層体を作製できる、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法を提供できる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern that can produce a laminate having a conductor pattern with excellent linearity.
ライン状のレジストパターンを有する積層体の断面の部分概略図である。FIG. 4 is a partial schematic diagram of a cross section of a laminate having a line-shaped resist pattern; 転写フィルムの一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a transfer film.
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において、段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本明細書に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。
The present invention will be described in detail below.
In this specification, a numerical range represented by "to" means a range including the numerical values before and after "to" as lower and upper limits.
In the present specification, in the numerical ranges described stepwise, the upper limit or lower limit described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit or lower limit of the numerical range described in other steps. . Moreover, in the numerical ranges described in this specification, the upper limit or lower limit described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
 本明細書において、「工程」の用語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても、その工程の所期の目的が達成されれば本用語に含まれる。 In this specification, the term "process" is not only an independent process, but even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, it is included in this term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved. .
 本明細書において、「透明」とは、特に断りのない限り、波長400~700nmの可視光の平均透過率が、80%以上であることを意味し、90%以上であることが好ましい。
 本明細書において、可視光の平均透過率は、分光光度計を用いて測定される値であり、例えば、日立製作所株式会社製の分光光度計U-3310を用いて測定できる。
As used herein, the term “transparent” means that the average transmittance of visible light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is 80% or more, preferably 90% or more, unless otherwise specified.
As used herein, the average transmittance of visible light is a value measured using a spectrophotometer, and can be measured using a spectrophotometer U-3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., for example.
 本明細書において、特段の断りのない限り、重量平均分子量(Mw)、及び、数平均分子量(Mn)は、カラムとして、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、若しくは、TSKgel G2000HxL(いずれも東ソー(株)製の商品名)、溶離液としてTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)、検出器として示差屈折計、標準物質としてポリスチレンを使用し、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により測定した標準物質のポリスチレンを用いて換算した値である。
 また、本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、分子量分布がある化合物の分子量は、重量平均分子量(Mw)である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、金属元素の含有量は、誘導結合プラズマ(ICP:Inductively Coupled Plasma)分光分析装置を用いて測定した値である。
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are measured using TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, or TSKgel G2000HxL (all manufactured by Tosoh Corporation). (trade name), THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent, a differential refractometer as a detector, polystyrene as a standard substance, and a value converted using polystyrene as a standard substance measured by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer. is.
Moreover, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, the molecular weight of a compound having a molecular weight distribution is the weight average molecular weight (Mw).
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the content of metal elements is a value measured using an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopic analyzer.
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリル及びメタクリルの両方を包含する概念であり、「(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基」は、アクリロイルオキシ基及びメタクリロイルオキシ基の両方を包含する概念であり、「(メタ)アクリルアミド基」は、アクリルアミド基及びメタクリルアミド基の両方を包含する概念であり、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレート及びメタクリレートの両方を包含する概念である。 In the present specification, "(meth)acryl" is a concept that includes both acryl and methacryl, and "(meth)acryloyloxy group" is a concept that includes both acryloyloxy and methacryloyloxy groups. , "(meth)acrylamide group" is a concept that includes both acrylamide group and methacrylamide group, and "(meth)acrylate" is a concept that includes both acrylate and methacrylate.
 なお、本明細書において、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、液温が22℃である1質量%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。したがって、例えば、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とは、上述の溶解度条件を満たす樹脂を意図する。 In this specification, "alkali-soluble" means that the solubility in 100 g of a 1% by mass sodium carbonate aqueous solution with a liquid temperature of 22°C is 0.1 g or more. Thus, for example, an alkali-soluble resin is intended to be a resin that satisfies the solubility conditions described above.
 本明細書において「水溶性」とは、液温が22℃であるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。したがって、例えば、水溶性樹脂とは、上述の溶解度条件を満たす樹脂を意図する。 As used herein, "water-soluble" means that the solubility in 100 g of water at pH 7.0 at a liquid temperature of 22°C is 0.1 g or more. Thus, for example, by water-soluble resin is intended a resin that satisfies the solubility conditions set forth above.
 組成物の「固形分」とは、組成物を用いて形成される組成物層(例えば、感光性層又は中間層)を形成する成分を意味し、組成物が溶剤(例えば、有機溶剤及び水等)を含む場合、溶剤を除いた全ての成分を意味する。また、組成物層を形成する成分であれば、液体状の成分も固形分とみなす。 The "solid content" of the composition means a component that forms a composition layer (e.g., photosensitive layer or intermediate layer) formed using the composition, and the composition contains solvents (e.g., organic solvents and water). etc.) means all ingredients except the solvent. In addition, as long as it is a component that forms a composition layer, a liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
[導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法]
 本発明の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法(以下単に、本発明の方法ともいう)は、
 仮支持体と、感光性層とを有する転写フィルムを、上記感光性層側が、表面に金属層を有する基板の上記金属層に接するように、上記転写フィルムと上記基板とを貼合する貼合工程と、
 上記感光性層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
 露光された上記感光性層にアルカリ金属塩を含む水溶液を用いて現像処理を実施し、レジストパターンを形成する現像工程と、
 上記レジストパターンが配置されていない領域にある上記金属層に、エッチング処理を行うエッチング処理工程、又は、めっき処理を行うめっき処理工程と、
 上記レジストパターンを剥離するレジスト剥離工程と、
 更に、上記めっき処理工程を有する場合は、上記レジスト剥離工程によって露出した上記金属層を除去し、上記基板上に導体パターンを形成する除去工程と、を有する、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法であって、
 上記貼合工程と上記露光工程との間、又は、上記露光工程と上記現像工程との間に、更に、上記仮支持体を剥離する仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
 上記感光性層は、以下の測定Xで求められる長さXが、1.0μm以下となる、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
 測定X:上記感光性層を、ライン幅とスペース幅が1:1のラインパターンで露光した後、上記現像工程で使用される上記水溶液で現像して得られるレジストパターンの断面を観察し、上記レジストパターンの側面におけるアルカリ金属の浸み込み長さを長さXとする。
[Method for producing laminate having conductor pattern]
The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern of the present invention (hereinafter simply referred to as the method of the present invention) comprises:
A transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer is laminated to the transfer film and the substrate such that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface. process and
An exposure step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer;
A developing step of performing a developing process using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt on the exposed photosensitive layer to form a resist pattern;
an etching process of performing an etching process or a plating process of performing a plating process on the metal layer in a region where the resist pattern is not arranged;
a resist stripping step of stripping the resist pattern;
Further, when the plating step is included, the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern includes a removal step of removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step and forming a conductor pattern on the substrate. and
Between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the development step, a temporary support peeling step of peeling the temporary support,
A method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern, wherein the photosensitive layer has a length X of 1.0 μm or less, which is obtained by the following measurement X.
Measurement X: After exposing the photosensitive layer with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the cross section of the resist pattern obtained by developing with the aqueous solution used in the developing step was observed. Let length X be the penetration length of the alkali metal on the side surface of the resist pattern.
 上記構成により、本発明の課題が解決されるメカニズムは必ずしも明らかではないが、本発明者らは、以下のように考えている。
 まず、本発明の方法の特徴点としては、本発明の方法で使用される感光性層が測定Xで求められる長さXが1.0μm以下となる点が挙げられる。すなわち、本発明の方法で使用する感光性層の露光部は、現像工程において使用される現像液の染み込みが抑制されている。
 感光性層における露光部に現像液が深く染み込むと、感光性層から形成されるレジストパターンが裾広がり形状になりやすく、また、上記裾の形状の揺らぎも大きくなりやすい。このようなレジストパターンを用いて導体パターンを形成すると、得られる導体パターンの直線性にも悪影響を与えると考えている。
 一方で、長さXが1.0μm以下となり、現像液の染み込みが抑制されていれば、感光性層から形成されるレジストパターンにおける裾の広がりが抑制され、また、裾形状が形成されるとしてもその形状の揺らぎが抑制される。そして、このようなレジストパターンを用いて導体パターンを形成する結果、得られる導体パターンの直線性も改善した、と考えている。
 また、本発明の方法では線幅の小さい導体パターンを形成することも可能である。
 以下、積層体が有する導体パターンの直線性がより優れること、及び/又は、積層体が有する導体パターンの線幅をより小さくできることを、本発明の効果がより優れるともいう。
Although the mechanism by which the above configuration solves the problems of the present invention is not necessarily clear, the present inventors believe as follows.
First, as a characteristic point of the method of the present invention, the length X obtained by the measurement X of the photosensitive layer used in the method of the present invention is 1.0 μm or less. That is, penetration of the developer used in the development step is suppressed in the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer used in the method of the present invention.
When the developer penetrates deeply into the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer, the resist pattern formed from the photosensitive layer tends to spread toward the bottom, and the fluctuation of the shape of the bottom tends to increase. It is believed that forming a conductor pattern using such a resist pattern will adversely affect the linearity of the obtained conductor pattern.
On the other hand, if the length X is 1.0 μm or less and the permeation of the developer is suppressed, the spread of the bottom of the resist pattern formed from the photosensitive layer is suppressed, and a bottom shape is formed. Also, the fluctuation of the shape is suppressed. And, as a result of forming a conductor pattern using such a resist pattern, it is believed that the linearity of the obtained conductor pattern is also improved.
Also, the method of the present invention can form a conductor pattern with a small line width.
Hereinafter, the more excellent linearity of the conductor pattern of the laminate and/or the smaller line width of the conductor pattern of the laminate is also referred to as the more excellent effect of the present invention.
〔測定X〕
 本発明の方法において、測定Xで求められる長さXは、1.0μm以下であり、0.6μm以下が好ましく、0.4μm以下がより好ましい。長さXの下限に制限はなく、例えば、0.0μm以上である。
[Measurement X]
In the method of the present invention, the length X determined by the measurement X is 1.0 μm or less, preferably 0.6 μm or less, more preferably 0.4 μm or less. There is no lower limit to the length X, which is, for example, 0.0 μm or more.
 測定Xは以下の通り実施される。
 測定X:感光性層を、ライン幅とスペース幅が1:1のラインパターンで露光した後、現像工程で使用される水溶液で現像して得られるレジストパターンの断面を観察し、上記レジストパターンの側面におけるアルカリ金属の浸み込み長さを長さXとする。
Measurement X is performed as follows.
Measurement X: After exposing the photosensitive layer with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the cross section of the resist pattern obtained by developing with the aqueous solution used in the developing step is observed, and the resist pattern is measured. Let length X be the penetration length of the alkali metal on the side surface.
 測定Xにおいて、本発明の方法に用いられる転写フィルムを用いて、本発明の方法に用いられる表面に金属層を有する基板上に、本発明の方法で実施されるのと同様の条件の貼合工程及び仮支持体剥離工程をして配置された感光性層を、測定Xの対象とする。
 転写フィルム、感光性層、表面に金属層を有する基板、貼合工程、仮支持体剥離工程については後述する。
In measurement X, using the transfer film used in the method of the present invention, on a substrate having a metal layer on the surface used in the method of the present invention, lamination under the same conditions as in the method of the present invention The photosensitive layer disposed after the process and the temporary support peeling process is used as the measurement X target.
The transfer film, the photosensitive layer, the substrate having a metal layer on its surface, the bonding step, and the temporary support peeling step will be described later.
 また、測定Xにおいて、ライン幅とスペース幅が1:1のラインパターンで露光する際、露光光源は本発明の方法で露光に使用するのと同じ露光光源を使用する。
 露光量は、現像後にライン幅とスペース幅が1:1のレジストパターンを得られるように調整する。
 転写フィルムが後述の中間層を有し、表面に金属層を有する基板上に配置された感光性層が表面に中間層を有している場合、露光は中間層側から行う。
 測定Xのために形成されるレジストパターンのライン幅は、ライン状のレジストパターン(以下、単に「ライン」ともいう)の両側面を起点とするアルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域が重複しないように、十分に広い幅を確保することとし、例えば、ライン幅は10μmでもよい。適切な幅のラインが得られるように、露光に用いるフォトマスクのパターンを適宜調整する。
 測定Xでは、露光後、本発明の方法で実施される現像工程と同様の条件で現像を行う。現像に使用する現像液(水溶液)も、本発明の方法で実施される現像工程で使用する現像液(水溶液)と同じ現像液を使用する。
 現像工程、現像液については後述する。
In the measurement X, when exposing with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the same exposure light source as that used for exposure in the method of the present invention is used.
The amount of exposure is adjusted so that a resist pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1 can be obtained after development.
When the transfer film has an intermediate layer, which will be described later, and the photosensitive layer disposed on the substrate having a metal layer on its surface has an intermediate layer on its surface, the exposure is carried out from the intermediate layer side.
The line width of the resist pattern formed for the measurement X is set so that the areas where the alkali metal permeates starting from both sides of the line-shaped resist pattern (hereinafter also simply referred to as “line”) do not overlap. In addition, a sufficiently wide width should be ensured. For example, the line width may be 10 μm. The pattern of the photomask used for exposure is appropriately adjusted so that a line with an appropriate width can be obtained.
In measurement X, after exposure, development is performed under the same conditions as in the development step carried out in the method of the present invention. The developer (aqueous solution) used for development is also the same developer (aqueous solution) used in the development step carried out in the method of the present invention.
The developing process and developer will be described later.
 現像後、得られたレジストパターンを有する積層体を、ラインの長さ方向と垂直方向に切断し、レジストパターンの断面を観察する。
 観察には、日本電子社製 JSM-7200F型FE-SEM(電界放出型走査電子顕微鏡)を用いて、加速電圧5kV、照射電流18でSEM-EDX(走査電子顕微鏡-エネルギー分散型X線分析)マッピング分析を行う。断面のアルカリ金属のEDXマッピング像から、断面のアルカリ金属の強度分布をプロットし、ピークの半値幅をアルカリ金属の浸み込みが生じている領域とする。具体的には、通常、レジストパターンの側壁の表面部又はその近傍にアルカリ金属の検出強度のピークが存在し、上記ピークから、レジストパターンの内部側に行くにしたがってアルカリ金属の検出強度は低減していく。レジストパターンの側壁の最表面から、レジストパターンの内部側におけるアルカリ金属の検出強度が上記ピークの半分になる部分までの領域を、アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域として定義する。
After development, the laminate having the obtained resist pattern is cut in the direction perpendicular to the length direction of the lines, and the cross section of the resist pattern is observed.
For observation, JSM-7200F type FE-SEM (field emission scanning electron microscope) manufactured by JEOL Ltd. was used, and SEM-EDX (scanning electron microscope-energy dispersive X-ray analysis) was performed at an acceleration voltage of 5 kV and an irradiation current of 18. Conduct a mapping analysis. From the EDX mapping image of the alkali metal of the cross section, the intensity distribution of the alkali metal of the cross section is plotted, and the half width of the peak is defined as the region where the alkali metal permeates. Specifically, there is usually a peak of the alkali metal detection intensity at or near the surface of the side wall of the resist pattern, and the alkali metal detection intensity decreases toward the inside of the resist pattern from the peak. To go. A region from the outermost surface of the side wall of the resist pattern to a portion where the detection intensity of the alkali metal on the inner side of the resist pattern is half of the above peak is defined as a region where the alkali metal permeates.
 次に、ラインの側面から、アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域が、どれだけの長さであるかを求める。なお、ラインの上部からアルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域については、アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域の長さを求める対象とはしない。
 図1を用いて、アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域の長さの求め方を説明する。図1は、ライン状のレジストパターン(ライン)を有する積層体の断面(ラインの長さ方向に対して垂直な断面)の部分概略図であり、上記積層体は、表面に金属層を有する基板101、ライン状のレジストパターン(ライン)107を順に有する。表面に金属層を有する基板101は、基板103、金属層105を順に有する。ライン107中には、アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域109と、アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じていない領域111が存在する。この場合、長さxが、アルカリ金属の染み込み生じている領域の長さである。つまり、長さxは、ラインの断面図において、ラインの側面からアルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域のラインの幅方向の長さを意味する。
 図1には、裾引きが生じていないラインを示したが、ラインが裾引きしている場合(例えば、ライン107における金属層105の近傍部分であって、ライン107の幅が広くなっている場合)、裾引きによるライン幅の増大が生じていない位置で長さxを求める。
 積層体の断面のランダムな10本のラインから長さxを求め、その平均値を、測定Xで求められる長さX(アルカリ金属の浸み込み長さ)とする。
Next, the length of the region in which the alkali metal has permeated from the side of the line is determined. Note that the length of the area where the alkali metal permeates from the upper part of the line is not determined.
A method of determining the length of the region in which the alkali metal has permeated will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a partial schematic view of a cross section (a cross section perpendicular to the length direction of the line) of a laminate having a linear resist pattern (line), and the laminate is a substrate having a metal layer on its surface. 101 and a line-shaped resist pattern (line) 107 are sequentially provided. A substrate 101 having a metal layer on its surface has a substrate 103 and a metal layer 105 in this order. The line 107 has a region 109 in which the alkali metal has permeated and a region 111 in which the alkali metal has not permeated. In this case, the length x is the length of the region where alkali metal penetration occurs. In other words, the length x means the length in the width direction of the line, in the cross-sectional view of the line, in the area where the alkali metal permeates from the side surface of the line.
FIG. 1 shows a line with no skirting, but when the line is skirted (for example, in the vicinity of the metal layer 105 in the line 107, the width of the line 107 is widened). case), the length x is obtained at a position where the line width does not increase due to skirting.
The length x is determined from 10 random lines on the cross section of the laminate, and the average value is defined as the length X (the penetration length of the alkali metal) determined by the measurement X.
〔架橋反応量、式Y〕
 本発明の方法において用いられる感光性層は、以下に説明する式Yで求められる架橋反応量は、0.10mmol/g以上となることが好ましく、0.20mmol/g以上となることがより好ましく、0.30mmol/g以上となることが更に好ましい。架橋反応量の上限は、1.20mmol/g以下となることが好ましく、1.00mmol/g以下となることがより好ましく、0.80mmol/g以下となることが更に好ましい。
[Crosslinking reaction amount, formula Y]
The photosensitive layer used in the method of the present invention preferably has a crosslinking reaction amount of 0.10 mmol/g or more, more preferably 0.20 mmol/g or more, as determined by the formula Y described below. , 0.30 mmol/g or more. The upper limit of the amount of crosslinking reaction is preferably 1.20 mmol/g or less, more preferably 1.00 mmol/g or less, and even more preferably 0.80 mmol/g or less.
 式Y:
 架橋反応量=(A×B)÷100
Formula Y:
Crosslinking reaction amount = (A × B) ÷ 100
 式Y中、Aは、露光前の感光性層の二重結合当量(単位:mmol/g)の値である。
 上記二重結合当量とは、感光性層の全質量に対する、重合性の炭素-炭素二重結合の含有量を意味する。
 上記炭素-炭素二重結合が存在する形態に制限はなく、後述する樹脂に由来してもよく、後述する重合性化合物に由来してもよく、これらの両方に由来してもよい。
 上記二重結合当量は、感光性層をFT-IR(Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy)で測定して求められる。
 Ammol/gの値は、例えば0.50~3.20mmol/gであり、0.60~2.60mmol/gが好ましく、1.20~2.50mmol/gがより好ましい。
In formula Y, A is the value of the double bond equivalent (unit: mmol/g) of the photosensitive layer before exposure.
The double bond equivalent means the content of polymerizable carbon-carbon double bonds with respect to the total weight of the photosensitive layer.
There is no limitation on the form in which the carbon-carbon double bond exists, and it may be derived from a resin to be described later, may be derived from a polymerizable compound to be described later, or may be derived from both of them.
The above double bond equivalent is determined by measuring the photosensitive layer with FT-IR (Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy).
The value of Ammol/g is, for example, 0.50 to 3.20 mmol/g, preferably 0.60 to 2.60 mmol/g, more preferably 1.20 to 2.50 mmol/g.
 式Y中、Bは、感光性層を高圧水銀灯露光機を用いて波長365nmの光の露光量が20mJ/cmとなるように露光(全面露光)し、露光した後の感光性層をFT-IRで観測して求められる二重結合反応率(単位:%)を意味する。
 上記高圧水銀灯露光機の主波長は365nmである。
 高圧水銀灯露光機としては、通常、MAP-1200L、大日本科研社製を使用する。
 すなわち、露光前の感光性層中の炭素-炭素二重結合の量を100%として、露光後の感光性層中の炭素-炭素二重結合の量(Z%)を求め、100からZを引いて得られる値が、Bの値である。
 露光前及び露光後の感光性層中の炭素-炭素二重結合の量は、FT-IRで測定する。
 B%の値は、5~70%が好ましく、10~50%がより好ましい。
In formula Y, B exposes the photosensitive layer using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine so that the exposure amount of light with a wavelength of 365 nm is 20 mJ/cm 2 (overall exposure), and the photosensitive layer after exposure is FT. - means the double bond reaction rate (unit: %) obtained by observing with IR.
The dominant wavelength of the high pressure mercury lamp exposure machine is 365 nm.
As the high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine, MAP-1200L manufactured by Dainippon Kaken Co., Ltd. is usually used.
That is, the amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer before exposure is 100%, the amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer after exposure (Z%) is obtained, and Z is calculated from 100. The value obtained by subtraction is the value of B.
The amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer before and after exposure is measured by FT-IR.
The B% value is preferably 5 to 70%, more preferably 10 to 50%.
 Bの値を求めるために使用される感光性層は、本発明の方法に用いられる転写フィルムを用いて、本発明の方法に用いられる表面に金属層を有する基板上に、本発明の方法で実施されるのと同様の条件の貼合工程及び仮支持体剥離工程をして配置された感光性層であることが好ましい。
 転写フィルムが後述の中間層を有し、表面に金属層を有する基板上に配置された感光性層が表面に中間層を有している場合、Bの値を求めるための露光は、中間層側から行う。
 Bの値を求めるための露光は、上述のようにBの値を求めるための露光の条件として特定されている事項以外については、本発明の方法で実施される露光工程と同様に実施されることが好ましい。
 ただし、Bの値を求めるにあたって、高圧水銀灯露光機を用いて露光される感光性層の膜厚は3μmとする。
 転写フィルムが有する感光性層の膜厚が3μm以外である場合、感光性層の膜厚が3μmになるように調整して試験を行う。
 例えば、転写フィルムが有する感光性層の膜厚が3μm超である場合、事前に上記転写フィルムが有する感光性層を、膜厚3μmになるまで削って調整してから、上記転写フィルムを用いてBの値を求めるための手順を実施すればよい。上記転写フィルムが有する感光性層を削る際、上記転写フィルムを適宜冷却してもよい。
 また、例えば、転写フィルムが有する感光性層の膜厚が3μm未満である場合、以下の手順で3μmの膜厚の感光性層に調整できる。すなわち、まず、転写フィルムが有する感光性層を削り出し、削り出した感光性層を有機溶媒(PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート等)で溶解した溶解液を作製する。上記溶解液を離型フィルム上に塗布してから乾燥し、塗膜(溶解液を用いて形成された感光性層)を得る。この際、上記塗膜の膜厚は、転写フィルムが有する感光性層の膜厚と合計して3μmになるように調整する。そして、上記離型フィルムの表面上に配置された上記塗膜の上に、転写フィルムを、感光性層が重なるように貼り合せる。これにより、上記塗膜(溶解液を用いて形成された感光性層)と、上記転写フィルムが元から有している感光性層とで、合計3μmの膜厚である感光性層を、転写フィルムは有することとなる。その後、上記転写フィルムから、上記離型フィルムを取り除き、上記感光性層(合計3μmの膜厚である感光性層)を有する上記転写フィルムを用いてBの値を求めるための手順を実施すればよい。
 転写フィルム、感光性層、表面に金属層を有する基板、貼合工程、仮支持体剥離工程については後述する。
The photosensitive layer used for determining the value of B is formed by the method of the present invention on a substrate having a metal layer on the surface used in the method of the present invention using the transfer film used in the method of the present invention. It is preferable that the photosensitive layer is arranged by carrying out the lamination step and the temporary support peeling step under the same conditions as those carried out.
When the transfer film has an intermediate layer described below and the photosensitive layer disposed on the substrate having a metal layer on its surface has an intermediate layer on its surface, the exposure for obtaining the value of B is performed on the intermediate layer. do it from the side.
The exposure for obtaining the value of B is performed in the same manner as the exposure step performed in the method of the present invention except for the items specified as the exposure conditions for obtaining the value of B as described above. is preferred.
However, in determining the value of B, the film thickness of the photosensitive layer exposed using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposing machine is assumed to be 3 μm.
When the thickness of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film is other than 3 μm, the test is performed after adjusting the thickness of the photosensitive layer to 3 μm.
For example, when the thickness of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film is more than 3 μm, the photosensitive layer of the transfer film is adjusted in advance by scraping to a thickness of 3 μm, and then the transfer film is used. A procedure for determining the value of B may be performed. When scraping the photosensitive layer of the transfer film, the transfer film may be cooled appropriately.
Further, for example, when the thickness of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film is less than 3 μm, the thickness of the photosensitive layer can be adjusted to 3 μm by the following procedure. That is, first, the photosensitive layer of the transfer film is scraped out, and a solution is prepared by dissolving the scraped photosensitive layer in an organic solvent (PGMEA: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, etc.). The solution is applied on a release film and then dried to obtain a coating film (a photosensitive layer formed using the solution). At this time, the film thickness of the coating film is adjusted so as to be 3 μm in total with the film thickness of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film. Then, the transfer film is laminated on the coating film arranged on the surface of the release film so that the photosensitive layer overlaps. As a result, a photosensitive layer having a total thickness of 3 μm, which is composed of the coating film (the photosensitive layer formed using the solution) and the original photosensitive layer of the transfer film, is transferred. The film will have. After that, the release film is removed from the transfer film, and a procedure for obtaining the value of B is performed using the transfer film having the photosensitive layer (a photosensitive layer having a total thickness of 3 μm). good.
The transfer film, the photosensitive layer, the substrate having a metal layer on its surface, the bonding step, and the temporary support peeling step will be described later.
〔本発明の実施形態〕
 本発明の方法では、大別して、エッチング処理工程を経て導体パターンを有する積層体を製造する方法と、めっき処理工程を経て導体パターンを有する積層体を製造する方法とが存在する。
 以下、エッチング処理工程を経て導体パターンを有する積層体を製造する方法を、本発明の方法における第1実施形態ともいう。また、めっき処理工程を経て導体パターンを有する積層体を製造する方法を、本発明の方法における第2実施形態ともいう。
 まず、第1実施形態について、説明し、次いで第2実施形態について説明する。
[Embodiment of the present invention]
The method of the present invention is roughly divided into a method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through an etching process and a method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through a plating process.
Hereinafter, the method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through an etching process is also referred to as the first embodiment of the method of the present invention. A method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern through a plating process is also called a second embodiment of the method of the present invention.
First, the first embodiment will be described, and then the second embodiment will be described.
〔第1実施形態〕
 本発明の第1実施形態は、少なくとも以下の工程(1-1)~(1-5)を順に有する。
・工程(1-1)(貼合工程):仮支持体と、感光性層とを有する転写フィルムを、上記感光性層側が、表面に金属層を有する基板の上記金属層に接するように、転写フィルムと上記基板とを貼合する工程。
・工程(1-2)(露光工程):上記感光性層をパターン露光する工程
・工程(1-3)(現像工程):露光された上記感光性層にアルカリ金属塩を含む水溶液を用いて現像処理を実施し、レジストパターンを形成する工程
・工程(1-4)(エッチング処理工程):レジストパターンが配置されていない領域にある上記金属層に、エッチング処理を行う工程。
・工程(1-5)(レジスト剥離工程):レジストパターンを剥離する工程
 更に、本発明の第1実施形態は、工程(1-1)と(1-2)、又は、工程(1-2)と(1-3)との間に、以下の工程(1-A)を有する。
・工程(1-A)(仮支持体剥離工程):仮支持体を剥離する工程。
 なお、本発明の第1実施形態で用いられる感光性層は、上述の測定Xで求められる長さXが、所定の範囲内となる。
 また、本発明の第1実施形態で用いられる感光性層は、式Yで求められる架橋反応量が所定の範囲内となることが好ましい。
[First embodiment]
The first embodiment of the present invention has at least the following steps (1-1) to (1-5) in order.
- Step (1-1) (lamination step): a transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer so that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface, A step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate.
Step (1-2) (exposure step): a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer Step (1-3) (development step): using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt on the exposed photosensitive layer Steps and steps (1-4) (etching step) of developing and forming a resist pattern: a step of etching the metal layer in the region where the resist pattern is not arranged.
Step (1-5) (resist stripping step): a step of stripping the resist pattern Further, the first embodiment of the present invention includes steps (1-1) and (1-2), or step (1-2). ) and (1-3) have the following step (1-A).
• Step (1-A) (temporary support stripping step): a step of stripping the temporary support.
In addition, in the photosensitive layer used in the first embodiment of the present invention, the length X obtained by the above measurement X is within a predetermined range.
Moreover, the photosensitive layer used in the first embodiment of the present invention preferably has a cross-linking reaction amount determined by the formula Y within a predetermined range.
<工程(1-1)、貼合工程>
 貼合工程は、仮支持体と、感光性層とを有する転写フィルムを、上記感光性層が、表面に金属層を有する基板の上記金属層に接するように、転写フィルムと上記基板とを貼合する工程である。
 転写フィルムが後述する保護フィルムを有する場合、保護フィルムを剥離した後に貼合工程を実施することが好ましい。
 転写フィルムは、仮支持体と感光性層との間に、更に中間層を有することも好ましい。
 転写フィルムについては後述する。
<Step (1-1), bonding step>
In the bonding step, a transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer is bonded to the substrate such that the photosensitive layer is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on its surface. It is a process of matching.
When the transfer film has a protective film which will be described later, it is preferable to carry out the bonding step after peeling off the protective film.
The transfer film preferably further has an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer.
The transfer film will be described later.
 貼合においては、転写フィルムの感光性層側(仮支持体側とは反対側の表面)が、基板上の金属層に接触させて圧着させるのが好ましい。
 圧着方法としては、例えば、公知の転写方法及びラミネート方法が挙げられ、転写フィルムの感光性層の仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を基板に重ね、ロール等による加圧及び加熱する方法が好ましい。
 貼合方法としては、例えば、真空ラミネーター及びオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを用いる方法が挙げられる。
 ラミネート温度としては、70~130℃が好ましい。
In the lamination, it is preferable that the photosensitive layer side of the transfer film (the surface opposite to the temporary support side) is brought into contact with the metal layer on the substrate and pressed.
Examples of the pressure-bonding method include known transfer methods and lamination methods, and a method in which the surface of the photosensitive layer of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is superimposed on the substrate, and pressure and heat are applied using rolls or the like is preferable. .
Examples of the lamination method include a method using a known laminator such as a vacuum laminator and an autocut laminator.
The lamination temperature is preferably 70 to 130°C.
 表面に金属層を有する基板(金属層付き基板)は、基板と、基板の表面に配置される金属層とを有する。
 金属層付き基板は、基板上に、必要に応じて上記金属層以外の任意の層が形成されていてもよい。つまり、金属層付き基板は、基板と、基板の表面に配置される金属層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 基板としては、例えば、樹脂基板、ガラス基板、セラミック基板、及び、半導体基板が挙げられ、国際公開第2018/155193号の段落[0140]に記載の基板が好ましい。
 樹脂基板の材料としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、シクロオレフィンポリマー、又は、ポリイミドが好ましい。
 樹脂基板の厚みとしては、5~200μmが好ましく、10~100μmがより好ましい。
 特に、露光工程において、メッシュ状に配置された遮光部を含むフォトマスクを使用する場合には、透明基材を用いることが好ましい。
 なお、ここでいう「透明」とは、露光波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味する。透明基材の透過率は、全光線透過率が、80%以上であることが好ましく、90%であることがより好ましく、95%であることが更に好ましい。
 透明基材としては、例えば、樹脂基板(例えば、樹脂フィルム)、及び、ガラス基板が挙げられる。樹脂基板は、可視光を透過する樹脂基板であることが好ましい。可視光を透過する樹脂基板の好ましい成分としては、例えば、ポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリエチレンナフタレート系樹脂、シクロオレフィン系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、及び、ポリカーボネート系樹脂が挙げられる。可視光を透過する樹脂基板のより好ましい成分としては、例えば、ポリアミド、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)、ポリイミド、及びポリカーボネートが挙げられる。
 上記透明基材としては、なかでも、ポリアミドフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、シクロオレフィンポリマー、ポリエチレンナフタレートフィルム、ポリイミドフィルム、又は、ポリカーボネートフィルムであることが好ましく、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムであることがより好ましい。
 透明基材の厚さは、制限されない。透明基材の厚さは、10~200μmであることが好ましく、20~120μmであることがより好ましく、20~100μmであることが更に好ましい。
 上記透明基材の厚さは、以下の方法によって測定される。走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)を用いて、透明基材の主面に対して垂直な方向(すなわち、厚さ方向)の断面を観察する。得られた観察画像に基づいて、透明基材の厚さを10点測定する。測定値を算術平均することで、透明基材の平均厚さを求める。
A substrate having a metal layer on its surface (a substrate with a metal layer) has a substrate and a metal layer disposed on the surface of the substrate.
As for the substrate with a metal layer, any layer other than the above metal layer may be formed on the substrate, if necessary. That is, the substrate with a metal layer preferably has at least a substrate and a metal layer arranged on the surface of the substrate.
Examples of substrates include resin substrates, glass substrates, ceramic substrates, and semiconductor substrates, and substrates described in paragraph [0140] of WO2018/155193 are preferable.
As a material for the resin substrate, polyethylene terephthalate, cycloolefin polymer, or polyimide is preferable.
The thickness of the resin substrate is preferably 5-200 μm, more preferably 10-100 μm.
In particular, in the exposure step, when using a photomask including light shielding portions arranged in a mesh pattern, it is preferable to use a transparent substrate.
The term "transparent" as used herein means that the transmittance of the exposure wavelength is 50% or more. As for the transmittance of the transparent substrate, the total light transmittance is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 90%, and even more preferably 95%.
Examples of transparent substrates include resin substrates (for example, resin films) and glass substrates. The resin substrate is preferably a resin substrate that transmits visible light. Preferred components of the resin substrate that transmits visible light include, for example, polyamide-based resins, polyethylene terephthalate-based resins, polyethylene naphthalate-based resins, cycloolefin-based resins, polyimide-based resins, and polycarbonate-based resins. Preferred components of the resin substrate that transmit visible light include, for example, polyamide, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), cycloolefin polymer (COP), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyimide, and polycarbonate.
Among others, the transparent substrate is preferably a polyamide film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cycloolefin polymer, a polyethylene naphthalate film, a polyimide film, or a polycarbonate film, and more preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film.
The thickness of the transparent substrate is not limited. The thickness of the transparent substrate is preferably 10 to 200 μm, more preferably 20 to 120 μm, even more preferably 20 to 100 μm.
The thickness of the transparent substrate is measured by the following method. A scanning electron microscope (SEM) is used to observe a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the transparent substrate (that is, thickness direction). Based on the observed image obtained, the thickness of the transparent base material is measured at 10 points. The average thickness of the transparent substrate is determined by arithmetically averaging the measured values.
 また、特に、円形ドット状に配置された遮光部又は円形ドット状に配置された開口部を含むフォトマスクを使用する場合、基材としては、シリコン基板、ガラス基板、又は、FR4(Flame Retardant Type 4)等の有機基板を用いることが好ましい。その場合、基材の厚みは特に限定されず、基材の一部に配線パターンが形成されていてり、配線層が積層化されていてもよい。なお、円形ドット状に配置された遮光部又は円形ドット状に配置された開口部を含むフォトマスクについては、後段部にて説明する。 In particular, when using a photomask including light-shielding portions arranged in circular dots or openings arranged in circular dots, the base material may be a silicon substrate, a glass substrate, or FR4 (Flame Retardant Type 4) or the like is preferably used. In that case, the thickness of the base material is not particularly limited, and the wiring pattern may be formed on a part of the base material, and the wiring layer may be laminated. A photomask including light shielding portions arranged in circular dots or openings arranged in circular dots will be described later.
 金属層は金属を含む層であり、金属としては特に制限されず、公知の金属を使用できる。金属層は、導電性の層であることが好ましい。
 金属層の主成分(いわゆる、主金属)としては、例えば、銅、クロム、鉛、ニッケル、金、銀、すず、及び、亜鉛等が挙げられる。なお、上記主成分とは、金属層中に含まれる金属のうち、最も含有量が大きい金属を意図する。
The metal layer is a layer containing metal, and the metal is not particularly limited, and known metals can be used. Preferably, the metal layer is a conductive layer.
Main components (so-called main metals) of the metal layer include, for example, copper, chromium, lead, nickel, gold, silver, tin, and zinc. In addition, the said main component intends the metal with the largest content among the metals contained in a metal layer.
 金属層の厚みとしては特に制限されず、50nm以上が好ましく、100nm以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、2μm以下が好ましい。 The thickness of the metal layer is not particularly limited, preferably 50 nm or more, more preferably 100 nm or more. Although the upper limit is not particularly limited, it is preferably 2 μm or less.
 金属層の形成方法としては特に制限されず、例えば、金属微粒子を分散した分散液を塗布して、塗膜を焼結する方法、スパッタリング法、及び、蒸着法等の公知の方法が挙げられる。 The method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and examples include known methods such as a method of applying a dispersion liquid in which fine metal particles are dispersed and sintering the coating film, a sputtering method, and a vapor deposition method.
 基板上には、金属層を1層又は2層以上配置してもよい。
 金属層を2層以上配置する場合、2層以上配置される金属層同士は、同一及び不同のいずれであってもよく、異なる材質の金属層であることが好ましい。
One or more metal layers may be arranged on the substrate.
When two or more metal layers are arranged, the two or more metal layers may be the same or different, and are preferably made of different materials.
 基板としては、透明電極及び引き回り配線の少なくとも一方を有する基板も好ましく、上記基板はタッチパネル用基板として使用できる。
 透明電極は、タッチパネル用電極として機能し得る。
 透明電極は、ITO(酸化インジウムスズ)及びIZO(酸化インジウム亜鉛)等の金属酸化膜、並びに、金属メッシュ及び金属ナノワイヤー等の金属細線により構成されることが好ましい。
 金属細線としては、例えば、銀及び銅等の金属細線が挙げられ、銀メッシュ及び銀ナノワイヤー等の銀導電性材料が好ましい。
As the substrate, a substrate having at least one of a transparent electrode and lead wiring is also preferable, and the substrate can be used as a touch panel substrate.
The transparent electrode can function as a touch panel electrode.
The transparent electrodes are preferably composed of metal oxide films such as ITO (indium tin oxide) and IZO (indium zinc oxide), and metal fine wires such as metal mesh and metal nanowires.
Examples of fine metal wires include fine metal wires of silver and copper, and silver conductive materials such as silver mesh and silver nanowires are preferred.
 引き回し配線の材質としては、金属が好ましい。
 上記金属としては、例えば、金、銀、銅、モリブデン、アルミニウム、チタン、クロム、亜鉛、及び、マンガン、並びに、これらを組み合わせた合金が挙げられ、銅、モリブデン、アルミニウム、又は、チタンが好ましく、銅がより好ましい。
A metal is preferable as the material of the routing wiring.
Examples of the metal include gold, silver, copper, molybdenum, aluminum, titanium, chromium, zinc, and manganese, and alloys thereof in combination, preferably copper, molybdenum, aluminum, or titanium, Copper is more preferred.
<工程(1-2)、露光工程>
 露光工程は、感光性層をパターン露光する工程である。
 「パターン露光」とは、パターン状に露光する形態であり、露光部と非露光部とが存在する形態の露光を意味する。
 パターン露光における露光部(露光領域)と非露光部(非露光領域)との位置関係は、適宜調整できる。
 露光方向は、感光性層側又は感光性層側とは反対側(基板側)から露光してもよい。
 露光工程は、典型的には、フォトマスクを介してパターン露光を行う工程である。露光工程において、フォトマスクと被感光物である積層体とは、接触していてもよいし、接触していなくてもよい。
<Step (1-2), exposure step>
The exposure step is a step of patternwise exposing the photosensitive layer.
“Pattern exposure” is a form of exposure in a pattern, and means an exposure form in which an exposed portion and a non-exposed portion are present.
The positional relationship between the exposed portion (exposed region) and the non-exposed portion (non-exposed region) in the pattern exposure can be adjusted as appropriate.
As for the exposure direction, the exposure may be performed from the side of the photosensitive layer or the side opposite to the side of the photosensitive layer (substrate side).
The exposure step is typically a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask. In the exposure step, the photomask and the layered product to be exposed may or may not be in contact with each other.
 貼合工程と露光工程との間に後述する仮支持体剥離工程を行った場合、露光工程としては、仮支持体剥離工程にて得られた仮支持体が剥離された積層体の基板側とは反対側の表面とフォトマスクとを接触させて、パターン露光する露光工程が好ましい。言い換えれば、仮支持体が剥離された積層体の仮支持体が剥離されることにより露出した表面(感光層の表面、又は、中間層の表面等)とフォトマスクとを接触させて、感光性層にパターン露光する露光工程が好ましい。なお、上記露出した表面としては、転写フィルムが仮支持体と感光性層との2層構成である場合、感光性層の表面が該当し、転写フィルムが仮支持体と中間層と感光性層との3層構成である場合、中間層の表面が該当する。
 このような露光工程を採用すれば、より高精細なレジストパターンが得られ、最終的に、より高精細な導体パターンを得られる。
 このような露光工程は、特に、貼合工程と露光工程との間で、後述する仮支持体剥離工程を行った場合に採用することが好ましい。
When the temporary support peeling step described later is performed between the bonding step and the exposure step, the exposure step includes the substrate side of the laminate from which the temporary support obtained in the temporary support peeling step has been peeled off. Preferably, the exposure step is carried out by bringing the surface on the opposite side into contact with a photomask and performing pattern exposure. In other words, the surface (the surface of the photosensitive layer, the surface of the intermediate layer, etc.) exposed by peeling the temporary support of the laminate from which the temporary support is peeled off is brought into contact with the photomask, and the photosensitive layer is exposed. An exposure step in which the layer is pattern-exposed is preferred. When the transfer film has a two-layer structure of a temporary support and a photosensitive layer, the exposed surface corresponds to the surface of the photosensitive layer, and the transfer film includes the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive layer. In the case of a three-layer structure of and, the surface of the intermediate layer corresponds.
By adopting such an exposure process, a finer resist pattern can be obtained, and finally a finer conductor pattern can be obtained.
Such an exposure step is preferably employed particularly when a temporary support peeling step, which will be described later, is performed between the bonding step and the exposure step.
上記パターン露光する露光工程である場合、感光性層の露光領域(フォトマスクの開口部に相当する領域)において感光性層に含まれる成分の硬化反応が生じ得る。露光後に現像工程を実施することで感光性層の非露光領域が除去されて、パターンが形成される。 In the case of the pattern exposure step, a curing reaction of the components contained in the photosensitive layer may occur in the exposed regions of the photosensitive layer (regions corresponding to the openings of the photomask). A development step is performed after the exposure to remove the non-exposed areas of the photosensitive layer to form a pattern.
 本発明の方法は、露光工程と現像処理との間で、露光工程で用いたフォトマスクを剥離するフォトマスク剥離工程を有することも好ましい。
 フォトマスク剥離工程としては、例えば、公知の剥離工程が挙げられる。
It is also preferable that the method of the present invention has a photomask stripping step of stripping the photomask used in the exposure step between the exposure step and the development treatment.
The photomask peeling process includes, for example, a known peeling process.
 パターン露光の光源としては、少なくとも感光性層を硬化し得る波長域の光(例えば、365nm及び405nm)を照射できるものであればよく、365nmが好ましい。「主波長」とは、最も強度が高い波長を意味する。 The light source for pattern exposure should be one that can irradiate at least light in a wavelength range (for example, 365 nm and 405 nm) capable of curing the photosensitive layer, and 365 nm is preferable. By "dominant wavelength" is meant the wavelength with the highest intensity.
 光源としては、例えば、各種レーザー、発光ダイオード(LED)、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯及びメタルハライドランプが挙げられる。
 露光量としては、5~200mJ/cmが好ましく、10~200mJ/cmがより好ましい。
 光源、露光量及び露光方法としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/155193号の段落[0146]~[0147]が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of light sources include various lasers, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps.
The exposure amount is preferably 5 to 200 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 10 to 200 mJ/cm 2 .
Light sources, exposure doses and exposure methods include, for example, paragraphs [0146] to [0147] of WO2018/155193, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
<工程(1-A)、仮支持体剥離工程>
 貼合工程と露光工程との間、又は、露光工程と現像工程との間に、仮支持体剥離工程が行われる。
 中でも、上記貼合工程と上記露光工程のとの間に、剥離工程を有することがより好ましい。
 剥離工程は、転写フィルムと金属層付き基板との積層体から仮支持体を剥離する工程である。
 仮支持体の剥離方法としては、例えば、公知の剥離方法が挙げられる。具体的には、特開2010-072589号公報の段落[0161]~[0162]に記載されたカバーフィルム剥離機構が挙げられる。
<Step (1-A), temporary support peeling step>
A temporary support peeling step is performed between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the developing step.
Above all, it is more preferable to have a peeling step between the bonding step and the exposure step.
A peeling process is a process of peeling a temporary support body from the laminated body of a transfer film and a board|substrate with a metal layer.
Examples of the peeling method of the temporary support include known peeling methods. Specifically, there is a cover film peeling mechanism described in paragraphs [0161] to [0162] of JP-A-2010-072589.
<工程(1-3)、現像工程>
 現像工程は、露光された感光性層を、現像液としてアルカリ金属塩を含む水溶液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する工程である。
 上記現像液を用いて現像することで、感光性層の非露光領域が除去され、フォトマスクの開口部を凸部とするレジストパターンが形成される。
<Step (1-3), development step>
The development step is a step of developing the exposed photosensitive layer using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt as a developer to form a pattern.
By developing with the developer, the non-exposed regions of the photosensitive layer are removed, and a resist pattern having projections corresponding to the openings of the photomask is formed.
 現像液としては、アルカリ金属塩を含むアルカリ性水溶液が好ましい。
 現像液に含まれるアルカリ金属塩は、水に溶解してアルカリ性を示す化合物が好ましい。
 アルカリ金属塩としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、及び、炭酸水素カリウムが挙げられる。
 現像液は、アルカリ金属塩以外の、水に溶解してアルカリ性を示す化合物を含んでもよく、そのような化合物としては、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、コリン(2-ヒドロキシエチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド)が挙げられる。
 現像液中、水の含有量は、現像液の全質量に対して、50質量%以上100質量%未満が好ましく、90質量%以上100質量%未満がより好ましい。
 現像液中、アルカリ金属塩の含有量は、現像液の全質量に対して、0.01~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~10質量%がより好ましい。
As the developer, an alkaline aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt is preferred.
The alkali metal salt contained in the developer is preferably a compound that dissolves in water and exhibits alkalinity.
Alkali metal salts include, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, and potassium hydrogen carbonate.
The developer may contain compounds other than alkali metal salts that dissolve in water and exhibit alkalinity. Examples of such compounds include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutyl ammonium hydroxide and choline (2-hydroxyethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide).
The content of water in the developer is preferably 50% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass, more preferably 90% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass, relative to the total mass of the developer.
The content of the alkali metal salt in the developer is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the developer.
 現像方法としては、例えば、公知の現像方法が挙げられる。
 具体的には、パドル現像、シャワー現像、スピン現像、及び、ディップ現像が挙げられる。
 現像方法としては、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落[0195]に記載の現像方法が好ましい。
Examples of the developing method include known developing methods.
Specific examples include puddle development, shower development, spin development, and dip development.
As the developing method, the developing method described in paragraph [0195] of WO 2015/093271 is preferable.
 現像後、次の工程に移行する前に、金属層付き基板上に残存する現像液を除去するリンス処理を実施するのも好ましい。リンス処理には、水等を使用できる。
 現像及び/又はリンス処理の後、余分な液を金属層付き基板上から除去する乾燥処理を行ってもよい。
After development, it is also preferable to perform a rinse treatment for removing the developer remaining on the substrate with the metal layer before proceeding to the next step. Water or the like can be used for the rinsing treatment.
After the development and/or rinsing treatment, a drying treatment for removing excess liquid from the substrate with the metal layer may be performed.
 金属層付き基板上に形成されるレジストパターンの位置及び大きさは特に制限されないが、細線状が好ましい。
 具体的には、レジストパターンの線幅は、20μm以下が好ましく、15μm以下がより好ましく、10μm以下が更に好ましく、5μm以下が特に好ましい。下限は、例えば、1.0μm以上である。
The position and size of the resist pattern formed on the metal layer-coated substrate are not particularly limited, but fine lines are preferred.
Specifically, the line width of the resist pattern is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 15 μm or less, still more preferably 10 μm or less, and particularly preferably 5 μm or less. A lower limit is 1.0 micrometers or more, for example.
<工程(1-B)(ポスト露光工程)、及び、工程(1-C)(ポストベーク工程)>
 第1実施形態は、現像工程と後述するエッチング工程との間に、金属層付き基板上に得られたレジストパターンを、更に、露光する工程(以下、「工程(1-B)」又は「ポスト露光工程」ともいう。)及び/又は加熱する工程(以下、「工程(1-C)」又は「ポストベーク工程」ともいう。)を有していてもよい。
 第1実施形態がポスト露光工程及びポストベーク工程の両方を有する場合、ポスト露光工程を実施した後に、ポストベーク工程を実施することが好ましい。
 ポスト露光工程における露光量は、100~5000mJ/cmが好ましく、200~3000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
 ポストベーク工程におけるポストベークの温度は、80~250℃が好ましく、90~160℃がより好ましい。
 ポストベーク工程におけるポストベークの時間は、1~180分が好ましく、10~60分がより好ましい。
<Step (1-B) (post-exposure step) and Step (1-C) (post-baking step)>
In the first embodiment, between the development step and the etching step described later, the resist pattern obtained on the substrate with the metal layer is further exposed (hereinafter, “step (1-B)” or “post Also referred to as an exposure step”) and/or a heating step (hereinafter also referred to as a “step (1-C)” or a “post-baking step”).
When the first embodiment has both a post-exposure step and a post-bake step, it is preferable to perform the post-bake step after performing the post-exposure step.
The exposure amount in the post-exposure step is preferably 100-5000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 200-3000 mJ/cm 2 .
The post-baking temperature in the post-baking step is preferably 80 to 250°C, more preferably 90 to 160°C.
The post-baking time in the post-baking step is preferably 1 to 180 minutes, more preferably 10 to 60 minutes.
<工程(1-4)、エッチング工程>
 エッチング工程は、レジストパターンが配置されていない領域にある上記金属層に、エッチング処理を行う工程である。
 具体的には、エッチング工程において、上述の工程までに得られたレジストパターンをエッチングレジストとして使用し、金属層をエッチング処理する工程である。
 エッチング工程を実施すると、レジストパターンの開口部において金属層が除去され、金属層がレジストパターンと同様のパターン形状を有することとなる。
<Step (1-4), etching step>
The etching step is a step of etching the metal layer in the region where the resist pattern is not arranged.
Specifically, in the etching step, the resist pattern obtained by the above steps is used as an etching resist to etch the metal layer.
When the etching process is performed, the metal layer is removed at the openings of the resist pattern, and the metal layer has the same pattern shape as the resist pattern.
 エッチング処理の方法としては、例えば、公知のエッチング方法が挙げられる。
 具体的には、特開2017-120435号公報の段落[0209]~[0210]に記載の方法、特開2010-152155号公報の段落[0048]~[0054]に記載の方法、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング、及び、プラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングが挙げられる。
Examples of the etching method include known etching methods.
Specifically, the method described in paragraphs [0209] to [0210] of JP-A-2017-120435, the method described in paragraphs [0048] to [0054] of JP-A-2010-152155, and the etching solution Wet etching by immersion and dry etching such as plasma etching are included.
 ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性又はアルカリ性のエッチング液を適宜選択できる。
 酸性のエッチング液としては、例えば、少なくとも1つの酸性化合物を含む酸性水溶液、並びに、酸性化合物と、塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、及び、過マンガン酸カリウムからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つとの酸性の混合水溶液が挙げられる。
 酸性水溶液に含まれる酸性化合物(水に溶解して酸性を示す化合物)としては、塩酸、硫酸、硝酸、酢酸、フッ酸、シュウ酸、及び、リン酸からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つが好ましい。
 アルカリ性のエッチング液としては、例えば、少なくとも1つのアルカリ性化合物を含むアルカリ性水溶液、及び、アルカリ性化合物と塩(例えば、過マンガン酸カリウム等)とのアルカリ性の混合水溶液が挙げられる。
 アルカリ性水溶液に含まれるアルカリ性化合物(水に溶解してアルカリ性を示す化合物)としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、及び、有機アミンの塩(例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド等)からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つが好ましい。
 エッチング液は、レジストパターンを溶解しないことが好ましい。
 現像工程で使用される現像液が、エッチング処理に用いられるエッチング液を兼ねてもよい。この場合、現像工程とエッチング工程とが同時に実施されてもよい。
As the etchant used for wet etching, an acidic or alkaline etchant can be appropriately selected according to the object to be etched.
Examples of the acidic etchant include an acidic aqueous solution containing at least one acidic compound, and at least one selected from the group consisting of an acidic compound, ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, and potassium permanganate. and an acidic mixed aqueous solution of
The acidic compound contained in the acidic aqueous solution (compound that exhibits acidity when dissolved in water) is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, and phosphoric acid. .
Examples of the alkaline etchant include an alkaline aqueous solution containing at least one alkaline compound, and an alkaline mixed aqueous solution of an alkaline compound and a salt (eg, potassium permanganate, etc.).
Examples of alkaline compounds contained in the alkaline aqueous solution (compounds exhibiting alkalinity when dissolved in water) include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, and salts of organic amines (e.g., tetramethylammonium hydroxide etc.) is preferred.
The etchant preferably does not dissolve the resist pattern.
The developer used in the development step may also serve as the etchant used in the etching process. In this case, the development process and the etching process may be performed simultaneously.
 エッチング処理後、次の工程に移行する前に、金属層付き基板上に残存するエッチング液を除去するリンス処理を実施するのも好ましい。リンス処理には、水等を使用できる。
 エッチング処理及び/又はリンス処理の後、余分な液を金属層付き基板上から除去する乾燥処理を行ってもよい。
After the etching treatment, it is also preferable to perform a rinsing treatment to remove the etchant remaining on the substrate with the metal layer before proceeding to the next step. Water or the like can be used for the rinse treatment.
After the etching process and/or the rinsing process, a drying process for removing excess liquid from the substrate with the metal layer may be performed.
<工程(1-5)、レジスト剥離工程>
 レジスト剥離工程は、エッチング工程の後、残存するレジストパターンを除去する工程である。
 残存するレジストパターンを除去する方法としては、例えば、薬品処理により除去する方法が挙げられ、剥離液を用いて除去する方法が好ましい。
 残存するレジストパターンを除去する方法としては、例えば、剥離液を用いて、スプレー法、シャワー法、又は、パドル法等の公知の方法により除去する方法が挙げられる。
<Step (1-5), resist stripping step>
The resist stripping process is a process of removing the remaining resist pattern after the etching process.
A method of removing the remaining resist pattern includes, for example, a method of removing by chemical treatment, and a method of removing using a remover is preferable.
Examples of the method for removing the remaining resist pattern include a method of removing by a known method such as a spray method, a shower method, or a puddle method using a remover.
 剥離液としては、例えば、アルカリ性化合物を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、及び、N-メチルピロリドンからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つに溶解させた除去液が挙げられる。
 アルカリ性化合物(水に溶解してアルカリ性を示す化合物)としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム及び水酸化カリウム等のアルカリ性無機化合物、並びに、第1級アミン化合物、第2級アミン化合物、第3級アミン化合物及び第4級アンモニウム塩化合物等のアルカリ性有機化合物が挙げられる。
 剥離液の液温としては、30~80℃が好ましく、50~80℃がより好ましい。
 除去方法の好適態様としては、液温が50~80℃である撹拌中の剥離液に、除去対象のパターンを有する基板を1~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
 剥離液は、金属層を溶解しないことも好ましい。
Examples of stripping solutions include removal solutions in which an alkaline compound is dissolved in at least one selected from the group consisting of water, dimethylsulfoxide, and N-methylpyrrolidone.
Examples of alkaline compounds (compounds that exhibit alkalinity when dissolved in water) include alkaline inorganic compounds such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, and tertiary amine compounds. and alkaline organic compounds such as quaternary ammonium salt compounds.
The liquid temperature of the stripping liquid is preferably 30 to 80.degree. C., more preferably 50 to 80.degree.
A preferred embodiment of the removal method includes a method of immersing a substrate having a pattern to be removed in a stripping solution being stirred at a liquid temperature of 50 to 80° C. for 1 to 30 minutes.
It is also preferable that the stripping solution does not dissolve the metal layer.
 剥離液によりレジストパターンを剥離した後、基板上に残存する剥離液を除去するリンス処理を実施するのも好ましい。リンス処理には、水等を使用できる。
 剥離液によるレジストパターンの剥離及び/又はリンス処理の後、余分な液を基板上から除去する乾燥処理を行ってもよい。
After stripping the resist pattern with the stripping solution, it is also preferable to perform a rinse treatment for removing the stripping solution remaining on the substrate. Water or the like can be used for the rinse treatment.
After stripping and/or rinsing the resist pattern with a stripping solution, a drying process for removing excess liquid from the substrate may be performed.
 レジスト剥離工程を行うと、基板上から残存するレジストパターンが除去され、これによって基板とレジストパターンの間に存在していた金属層(除去されたレジストパターンと同様のパターン形状を有する金属層)が表面に露出し、導体パターンを有する積層体が得られる。 When the resist stripping process is performed, the resist pattern remaining on the substrate is removed, thereby removing the metal layer existing between the substrate and the resist pattern (the metal layer having the same pattern shape as the removed resist pattern). A laminate having a conductive pattern exposed on the surface is obtained.
〔第2実施形態〕
 本発明の第2実施形態は、少なくとも以下の工程(2-1)~(2-6)を順に有する。
・工程(2-1)(貼合工程):仮支持体と、感光性層とを有する転写フィルムを、上記感光性層側が、表面に金属層を有する基板の上記金属層に接するように、転写フィルムと上記基板とを貼合する工程。
・工程(2-2)(露光工程):上記感光性層をパターン露光する工程
・工程(2-3)(現像工程):露光された上記感光性層にアルカリ金属塩を含む水溶液を用いて現像処理を実施し、レジストパターンを形成する工程
・工程(2-4)(めっき処理工程):レジストパターンが配置されていない領域にある上記金属層に、めっき処理を行う工程。
・工程(2-5)(レジスト剥離工程):レジストパターンを剥離する工程
・工程(2-6)(除去工程):レジスト剥離工程によって露出した上記金属層を除去し、上記基板上に導体パターンを形成する除去工程
 更に、本発明の第2実施形態は、工程(2-1)と(2-2)、又は、工程(2-2)と(2-3)との間に、以下の工程(2-A)を有する。
・工程(2-A)(仮支持体剥離工程):仮支持体を剥離する工程。
 なお、本発明の第2実施形態で用いられる感光性層は、上述の測定Xで求められる長さXが、所定の範囲内となる。
 また、本発明の第2実施形態で用いられる感光性層は、式Yで求められる架橋反応量が所定の範囲内となることが好ましい。
[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment of the present invention has at least the following steps (2-1) to (2-6) in order.
- Step (2-1) (lamination step): a transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer so that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface, A step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate.
- Step (2-2) (exposure step): a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer - Step (2-3) (development step): using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt on the exposed photosensitive layer Steps and steps (2-4) (plating step) of developing and forming a resist pattern: a step of plating the metal layer in the region where the resist pattern is not arranged.
・Step (2-5) (resist stripping step): a step of stripping the resist pattern ・Step (2-6) (removal step): removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step, and placing the conductor pattern on the substrate Further, in the second embodiment of the present invention, between steps (2-1) and (2-2) or steps (2-2) and (2-3), the following It has a step (2-A).
• Step (2-A) (temporary support stripping step): a step of stripping the temporary support.
In addition, in the photosensitive layer used in the second embodiment of the present invention, the length X obtained by the above measurement X is within a predetermined range.
Moreover, the photosensitive layer used in the second embodiment of the present invention preferably has a cross-linking reaction amount determined by the formula Y within a predetermined range.
<工程(2-1)~(2-3)、(2-A)~(2-C)>
 第2実施形態における工程(2-1)~(2-3)、(2-A)は、それぞれ、第1実施形態における工程(1-1)~(1-3)、(1-A)として説明したのと同様である。
 また、第2実施形態において、工程(2-3)(現像工程)と後述する工程(2-4)との間に、金属層付き基板上に得られたレジストパターンを、更に、露光する工程(以下、「工程(2-B)」又は「ポスト露光工程」ともいう。)及び/又は加熱する工程(以下、「工程(2-C)」又は「ポストベーク工程」ともいう。)を有していてもよい。
 第2実施形態における工程(2-B)、(2-C)は、それぞれ、第1実施形態における工程(1-B)、(1-C)として説明したのと同様である。
<Steps (2-1) to (2-3), (2-A) to (2-C)>
Steps (2-1) to (2-3) and (2-A) in the second embodiment are respectively steps (1-1) to (1-3) and (1-A) in the first embodiment. It is the same as explained as
Further, in the second embodiment, between the step (2-3) (development step) and the step (2-4) described later, the resist pattern obtained on the substrate with the metal layer is further exposed. (hereinafter also referred to as “step (2-B)” or “post-exposure step”) and / or a heating step (hereinafter also referred to as “step (2-C)” or “post-baking step”) You may have
The steps (2-B) and (2-C) in the second embodiment are the same as the steps (1-B) and (1-C) in the first embodiment, respectively.
<工程(2-4)、めっき工程>
 めっき工程は、レジストパターンが配置されていない領域にある金属層(現像工程によって表面に露出した金属層)上に、めっき処理によってめっき層を形成する工程である。
 めっき処理の方法としては、例えば、電解めっき法及び無電解めっき法が挙げられ、生産性の点から、電解めっき法が好ましい。
 めっき工程を実施すると、金属層付き基板上に、レジストパターンが配置されていない領域(レジストパターンの開口部)と同様のパターン形状を有するめっき層が得られる。
<Step (2-4), plating step>
The plating step is a step of forming a plated layer by plating on the metal layer (the metal layer exposed to the surface by the development step) in the area where the resist pattern is not arranged.
Examples of plating methods include electroplating and electroless plating, with electroplating being preferred from the standpoint of productivity.
When the plating step is carried out, a plating layer having a pattern shape similar to that of the area where the resist pattern is not arranged (opening of the resist pattern) is obtained on the substrate with the metal layer.
 めっき層に含まれる金属としては、例えば、公知の金属が挙げられる。
 具体的には、銅、クロム、鉛、ニッケル、金、銀、すず、及び、亜鉛等の金属、並びに、これらの金属の合金が挙げられる。
 なかでも、めっき層は、導電パターンの導電性がより優れる点から、銅又はその合金を含むことが好ましい。また、導電パターンの導電性がより優れる点から、めっき層は、主成分として銅を含むことが好ましい。
Examples of the metal contained in the plating layer include known metals.
Specific examples include metals such as copper, chromium, lead, nickel, gold, silver, tin, and zinc, and alloys of these metals.
Above all, the plated layer preferably contains copper or its alloy from the viewpoint of better conductivity of the conductive pattern. In addition, the plating layer preferably contains copper as a main component in order to improve the conductivity of the conductive pattern.
 めっき層の厚みとしては、0.1μm以上が好ましく、1μmがより好ましい。上限は、20μm以下が好ましい。 The thickness of the plating layer is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 1 μm. The upper limit is preferably 20 μm or less.
<工程(2-D)、保護層形成工程>
 第2実施形態においては、めっき工程と後述のレジスト剥離工程との間に、保護層形成工程を有することも好ましい。
 保護層積層工程は、めっき層の上に保護層を形成する工程である。
 保護層の材料としては、レジスト剥離工程及び/又は除去工程における剥離液及び/又はエッチング液に対する耐性を有する材料が好ましい。例えば、ニッケル、クロム、錫、亜鉛、マグネシウム、金、銀等の金属、これらの合金、及び、樹脂が挙げられる。なかでも、保護層の材料としては、ニッケル又はクロムが好ましい。
<Step (2-D), protective layer forming step>
In the second embodiment, it is also preferable to have a protective layer forming step between the plating step and the resist stripping step described later.
The protective layer laminating step is a step of forming a protective layer on the plating layer.
As a material for the protective layer, a material having resistance to stripping solution and/or etching solution in the resist stripping process and/or removal process is preferable. Examples include metals such as nickel, chromium, tin, zinc, magnesium, gold, and silver, alloys thereof, and resins. Among them, nickel or chromium is preferable as the material for the protective layer.
 保護層の形成方法としては、例えば、無電解めっき法、電気めっき法等が挙げられ、電気めっき法が好ましい。 Examples of methods for forming the protective layer include electroless plating and electroplating, with electroplating being preferred.
 保護層の厚みの下限値としては特に制限されないが、0.3μm以上が好ましく、0.5μm以上がより好ましい。上限値としては特に制限されないが、3.0μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましい。 Although the lower limit of the thickness of the protective layer is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.3 μm or more, more preferably 0.5 μm or more. Although the upper limit is not particularly limited, it is preferably 3.0 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less.
<工程(2-5)、レジスト剥離工程>
 レジスト剥離工程は、めっき工程又は保護層形成工程の後、残存するレジストパターンを除去する工程である。
 工程(2-5)は、第1実施形態で説明した工程(1-5)と同様に行える。
<Step (2-5), resist stripping step>
The resist stripping step is a step of removing the remaining resist pattern after the plating step or protective layer forming step.
Step (2-5) can be performed in the same manner as step (1-5) described in the first embodiment.
<工程(2-6)、除去工程>
 除去工程は、レジスト剥離工程によって露出した金属層を除去して、基板上に導体パターンを得る工程である。
 なお、除去工程では、めっき工程によって形成されためっき層をエッチングレジストとして使用し、非パターン形成領域(言い換えると、めっき層で保護されていない領域)に位置する金属層のエッチング処理を行う。
<Step (2-6), removal step>
The removal step is a step of removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step to obtain a conductor pattern on the substrate.
In the removing step, the plating layer formed by the plating step is used as an etching resist, and the metal layer located in the non-pattern forming region (in other words, the region not protected by the plating layer) is etched.
 金属層の一部を除去する方法としては特に制限されないが、公知のエッチング液を使用するのが好ましい。
 公知のエッチング液の一態様としては、例えば、塩化第二鉄溶液、塩化第二銅溶液、アンモニアアルカリ溶液、硫酸-過酸化水素混合液、及び、リン酸-過酸化水素混合液等が挙げられる。
Although the method for removing part of the metal layer is not particularly limited, it is preferable to use a known etchant.
Examples of known etching solutions include ferric chloride solution, cupric chloride solution, ammonia alkali solution, sulfuric acid-hydrogen peroxide mixed solution, and phosphoric acid-hydrogen peroxide mixed solution. .
 除去工程を行うと、基板上から表面に露出していた金属層が除去されるとともに、パターン形状を有するめっき層(導体パターン)が残存し、導体パターンを有する積層体が得られる。 When the removing step is performed, the metal layer exposed to the surface from the substrate is removed, and the plated layer (conductor pattern) having a pattern shape remains to obtain a laminate having the conductor pattern.
 形成される導体パターンの線幅の上限値としては、8μm以下が好ましく、6μm以下がより好ましい。下限値としては特に制限されないが、2μm以上の場合が多い。 The upper limit of the line width of the formed conductor pattern is preferably 8 μm or less, more preferably 6 μm or less. Although the lower limit is not particularly limited, it is often 2 μm or more.
〔その他工程〕
 本発明の方法(第1実施形態及び/又は第2実施形態)では、上記各工程以外に、その他工程を有していてもよい。
 その他工程としては、例えば、国際公開第2019/022089号の段落[0172]に記載の可視光線反射率を低下させる工程及び国際公開第2019/022089号の段落[0172]に記載の絶縁膜の表面に新たな導電層を形成する工程が挙げられる。
[Other processes]
The method of the present invention (first embodiment and/or second embodiment) may have other steps in addition to the above steps.
Other steps include, for example, the step of reducing the visible light reflectance described in paragraph [0172] of WO 2019/022089 and the surface of the insulating film described in paragraph [0172] of WO 2019/022089 , a step of forming a new conductive layer.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本発明の方法は、積層体が有する導体パターンの一部又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理を行う工程を有していてもよい。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、例えば、酸化処理が挙げられる。積層体が銅を含む導体パターンを有する場合、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とし、導体パターンを黒化することにより、積層体の可視光線反射率を低下できる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、例えば、特開2014-150118号公報の段落[0017]~[0025]、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落[0041]、[0042]、[0048]、及び、[0058]が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Step of reducing visible light reflectance>
The method of the present invention may include a step of performing a process for reducing the visible light reflectance of part or all of the conductor pattern of the laminate.
The treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance includes, for example, oxidation treatment. When the laminate has a conductor pattern containing copper, the visible light reflectance of the laminate can be reduced by oxidizing the copper to form copper oxide and blackening the conductor pattern.
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include paragraphs [0017] to [0025] of JP-A-2014-150118, and paragraphs [0041], [0042], and [0042] of JP-A-2013-206315 [0048], and [0058], the contents of which are incorporated herein.
<絶縁膜を形成する工程、絶縁膜の表面に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 本発明の方法は、導体パターンを有する積層体の表面に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜の表面に新たな導電層(導体パターン等)を形成する工程とを有していてもよい。
 上記工程により、第1の電極パターンと、絶縁した第2の電極パターンとを形成できる。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程としては、例えば、公知の永久膜を形成する方法が挙げられる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性組成物を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜の表面に新たな導電層を形成する工程としては、例えば、導電性を有する感光性組成物を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Step of Forming an Insulating Film, Step of Forming a New Conductive Layer on the Surface of the Insulating Film>
The method of the present invention may include a step of forming an insulating film on the surface of the laminate having the conductor pattern, and a step of forming a new conductive layer (such as a conductor pattern) on the surface of the insulating film.
Through the above steps, a first electrode pattern and an insulated second electrode pattern can be formed.
Examples of the process of forming the insulating film include a method of forming a known permanent film. Alternatively, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using an insulating photosensitive composition.
As the step of forming a new conductive layer on the surface of the insulating film, for example, a conductive photosensitive composition may be used to form a new conductive layer in a desired pattern by photolithography.
 本発明の方法は、積層体の両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層(金属層等)を有する基板を用いて、基材の両方の表面に形成された導電層を用いて逐次又は同時に導体パターンを形成することも好ましい。
 上記構成により、一方の基板表面に第1の導電パターンを形成し、他方の基板表面に第2の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成できる。また、上記構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、ロールツーロールで基板の両面から形成することも好ましい。
The method of the present invention uses a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers (such as metal layers) on both surfaces of the laminate, and sequentially or simultaneously using the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the substrate. It is also preferred to form
With the above configuration, it is possible to form a touch panel circuit wiring in which the first conductive pattern is formed on one substrate surface and the second conductive pattern is formed on the other substrate surface. It is also preferable to form the touch panel circuit wiring having the above configuration from both sides of the substrate by roll-to-roll.
〔導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法の用途〕
 本発明に係る積層体の製造方法は、タッチパネル、透明ヒーター、透明アンテナ、電磁波シールド材、及び、調光フィルム等の導電膜の製造;プリント配線板及び半導体パッケージの製造;半導体チップやパッケージ間のインターコネクト用のピラー及びピンの製造;メタルマスクの製造;COF(Chip on Film)及びTAB(Tape Automated Bonding)等のテープ基板の製造;等に適用できる。
 また、上記タッチパネルとしては、静電容量型タッチパネルが挙げられる。本発明に係る積層体の製造方法は、タッチパネル中の導電膜や周辺回路配線の形成に使用できる。上記タッチパネルは、例えば、有機EL(electro-luminescence)表示装置及び液晶表示装置等の表示装置に適用できる。
[Use of method for producing laminate having conductor pattern]
The method for producing a laminate according to the present invention includes the production of conductive films such as touch panels, transparent heaters, transparent antennas, electromagnetic shielding materials, and light control films; the production of printed wiring boards and semiconductor packages; Manufacture of interconnect pillars and pins; Manufacture of metal masks; Manufacture of tape substrates such as COF (Chip on Film) and TAB (Tape Automated Bonding);
Moreover, as said touch panel, a capacitive touch panel is mentioned. The method for manufacturing a laminate according to the present invention can be used for forming a conductive film and peripheral circuit wiring in a touch panel. The touch panel can be applied to, for example, display devices such as organic EL (electro-luminescence) display devices and liquid crystal display devices.
 本発明の方法で製造される導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法の一態様として、例えば、第2の実施形態において、露光工程の際に、メッシュ状に配置された遮光部を含むフォトマスクを使用する態様が挙げられる。上記製造方法は、メッシュ状の金属配線パターンの製造方法として好適である。上記製造方法により得られる導電パターンを有する積層体は、例えば、透明導電膜として使用できる。具体的には、タッチパネル電極、透明ヒーター、透明アンテナ、電磁波シールド材、及び、調光フィルム等に使用できる。その場合、メッシュパターン領域のシート抵抗値は、低いほど好ましいが、100Ω/□以下が好ましく、20Ω/□以下がより好ましく、5Ω/□以下が特に好ましい。 As one aspect of the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern manufactured by the method of the present invention, for example, in the second embodiment, a photomask including a light shielding portion arranged in a mesh pattern is used during the exposure step. The mode of using is mentioned. The manufacturing method described above is suitable as a method for manufacturing a mesh-like metal wiring pattern. A laminate having a conductive pattern obtained by the above manufacturing method can be used, for example, as a transparent conductive film. Specifically, it can be used for touch panel electrodes, transparent heaters, transparent antennas, electromagnetic wave shield materials, light control films, and the like. In this case, the sheet resistance value of the mesh pattern region is preferably as low as possible, preferably 100 Ω/□ or less, more preferably 20 Ω/□ or less, and particularly preferably 5 Ω/□ or less.
 また、本発明の方法で製造される導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法の他の態様として、例えば、第2の実施形態において、露光工程の際に、円形ドット状に配置された遮光部を含むフォトマスクを使用する態様が挙げられる。上記製造方法は、ビアの製造方法、並びに、半導体チップやパッケージ間のインターコネクト用のピラー及びピンの製造方法として好適に使用され得る。ピラー及びピンの直径としては、1~20μmが好ましく、2~10μmがより好ましく、3~8μmが更に好ましい。また、ピラー及びピンの長さとしては、1~20μmが好ましく、3~10μmがより好ましい。また他の一例として、第2の実施形態において、露光工程の際に、円形ドット状に配置された開口部を含むフォトマスクを使用する態様が挙げられる。上記製造方法は、スルーホール等の製造方法として好適である。スルーホールの直径としては、1~20μmが好ましく、2~10μmがより好ましく、3~8μmが更に好ましい。また、スルーホールの深さとしては、1~20μmが好ましく、3~10μmがより好ましい。 Further, as another aspect of the method of manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern manufactured by the method of the present invention, for example, in the second embodiment, light shielding portions arranged in circular dots are formed during the exposure step. An embodiment using a photomask containing The manufacturing method described above can be suitably used as a method for manufacturing vias and a method for manufacturing pillars and pins for interconnects between semiconductor chips and packages. The diameter of the pillars and pins is preferably 1-20 μm, more preferably 2-10 μm, even more preferably 3-8 μm. Also, the length of the pillars and pins is preferably 1 to 20 μm, more preferably 3 to 10 μm. As another example, in the second embodiment, a photomask including openings arranged in the form of circular dots is used in the exposure step. The manufacturing method described above is suitable for manufacturing through holes and the like. The diameter of the through-hole is preferably 1-20 μm, more preferably 2-10 μm, and even more preferably 3-8 μm. Also, the depth of the through-hole is preferably 1 to 20 μm, more preferably 3 to 10 μm.
 また、本発明の方法で製造される導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法の他の態様として、例えば、第1の実施形態において、露光工程の際に、円形ドット状に配置された遮光部を含むフォトマスクを使用する態様が挙げられる。上記製造方法は、スルーホール等の製造方法として好適である。スルーホールの直径としては、1~20μmが好ましく、2~10μmがより好ましく、3~8μmが更に好ましい。また、スルーホールの深さとしては、1~20μmが好ましく、3~10μm以下がより好ましい。 Further, as another aspect of the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern manufactured by the method of the present invention, for example, in the first embodiment, light shielding portions arranged in circular dots are formed during the exposure step. An embodiment using a photomask containing The manufacturing method described above is suitable for manufacturing through holes and the like. The diameter of the through-hole is preferably 1-20 μm, more preferably 2-10 μm, and even more preferably 3-8 μm. Also, the depth of the through-hole is preferably 1 to 20 μm, more preferably 3 to 10 μm or less.
 上述の「円形」とは、真円及び略円のいずれであってもよい。また、「円形ドット状に配置された遮光部を含むフォトマスク」とは、円形ドット状の遮光部が1個配置されたフォトマスクであってもよいし、円形ドット状の遮光部が2個以上配置されたフォトマスクであってもよい。また、「円形ドット状に配置された開口部を含むフォトマスク」とは、円形ドット状の開口部が1個配置されたフォトマスクであってもよいし、円形ドット状の開口部が2個以上配置されたフォトマスクであってもよい。 The "circular" mentioned above may be either a perfect circle or an approximately circle. Further, "a photomask including a light shielding portion arranged in a circular dot shape" may be a photomask in which one circular dot light shielding portion is arranged, or a photomask having two circular dot light shielding portions. A photomask arranged as described above may be used. Further, the “photomask including openings arranged in circular dot shape” may be a photomask in which one circular dot-shaped opening is arranged, or a photomask in which two circular dot-shaped openings are arranged. A photomask arranged as described above may be used.
[転写フィルム]
 本発明の方法で使用される転写フィルムは、仮支持体と、感光性層とを有する。
 転写フィルムにおける感光性層は、上述の測定Xで求められる長さXが、所定の範囲内となる。
 また、本発明の第1実施形態で用いられる感光性層は、式Yで求められる架橋反応量が所定の範囲内となることが好ましい。
[Transfer film]
The transfer film used in the method of the invention has a temporary support and a photosensitive layer.
In the photosensitive layer of the transfer film, the length X determined by the measurement X described above is within a predetermined range.
Moreover, the photosensitive layer used in the first embodiment of the present invention preferably has a cross-linking reaction amount determined by the formula Y within a predetermined range.
 転写フィルムは、後述する感光性層以外に、その他層を有していてもよい。
 その他層としては、例えば、後述する中間層が挙げられる。また、転写フィルムは、後述するその他部材(例えば、保護フィルム)を有していてもよい。
The transfer film may have other layers in addition to the photosensitive layer described below.
Other layers include, for example, an intermediate layer to be described later. Moreover, the transfer film may have other members (for example, a protective film) which will be described later.
 転写フィルムの実施態様としては、例えば、以下の構成(1)~(2)が挙げられる。
 なかでも、転写フィルムは中間層を有することが好ましく、以下の構成(2)がより好ましい。
(1)「仮支持体/感光性層/保護フィルム」
(2)「仮支持体/中間層/感光性層/保護フィルム」
 上記各構成における感光性層としては、後述するネガ型感光性層が好ましい。
Embodiments of the transfer film include, for example, the following configurations (1) to (2).
Among them, the transfer film preferably has an intermediate layer, and the following configuration (2) is more preferable.
(1) "Temporary support/photosensitive layer/protective film"
(2) "Temporary support/intermediate layer/photosensitive layer/protective film"
As the photosensitive layer in each of the above configurations, a negative photosensitive layer described later is preferable.
 上記貼合工程における気泡発生抑止の点から、転写フィルムのうねりの最大幅は、300μm以下が好ましく、200μm以下がより好ましく、60μm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、0μm以上が好ましく、0.1μm以上がより好ましく、1μm以上が更に好ましい。
 転写フィルムのうねりの最大幅は、以下の手順により測定される値である。
 転写フィルムを縦20cm×横20cmのサイズとなるように主面に垂直な方向に裁断し、試験サンプルを作製する。なお、転写フィルムが保護フィルムを有する場合、転写フィルムから保護フィルムを剥離する。次いで、表面が平滑かつ水平なステージ上に、上記試験サンプルを仮支持体の表面がステージに対向するように静置する。静置後、試験サンプルの中心10cm角の範囲について、試料サンプルの表面をレーザー顕微鏡(例えば、キーエンス社製 VK-9700SP)で走査して3次元表面画像を取得し、得られた3次元表面画像で観察される最大凸高さから最低凹高さを引き算する。上記操作を10個の試験サンプルについて行い、その算術平均値を転写フィルムのうねり最大幅とする。
From the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of air bubbles in the bonding step, the maximum width of the undulation of the transfer film is preferably 300 μm or less, more preferably 200 μm or less, and even more preferably 60 μm or less. The lower limit is preferably 0 µm or more, more preferably 0.1 µm or more, and even more preferably 1 µm or more.
The maximum width of waviness of the transfer film is a value measured by the following procedure.
A test sample is prepared by cutting the transfer film in a direction perpendicular to the main surface so as to have a size of 20 cm long by 20 cm wide. In addition, when a transfer film has a protective film, a protective film is peeled from a transfer film. Next, the test sample is placed on a flat and horizontal stage so that the surface of the temporary support faces the stage. After standing still, the surface of the sample sample is scanned with a laser microscope (for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by Keyence Corporation) for the center 10 cm square range of the test sample to obtain a three-dimensional surface image. The obtained three-dimensional surface image. Subtract the minimum concave height from the maximum convex height observed in . The above operation is performed for 10 test samples, and the arithmetic average value is taken as the maximum waviness width of the transfer film.
 転写フィルムの感光性層において、感光性層の仮支持体側とは反対側に、更に他の組成物層(例えば、感光性層、及び/又は、中間層等)を有する場合、他の組成物層の合計厚みとしては、感光性層の厚みに対して、0.1~30%が好ましく、0.1~20%がより好ましい。 In the photosensitive layer of the transfer film, when it has another composition layer (for example, a photosensitive layer and / or an intermediate layer, etc.) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the photosensitive layer, another composition The total thickness of the layers is preferably 0.1 to 30%, more preferably 0.1 to 20%, of the thickness of the photosensitive layer.
 密着性により優れる点から、感光性層の波長365nmの光の透過率は、10%以上が好ましく、30%以上がより好ましく、50%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、99.9%以下が好ましく、99.0%以下がより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of better adhesion, the transmittance of the photosensitive layer for light with a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 30% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more. The upper limit is preferably 99.9% or less, more preferably 99.0% or less.
 転写フィルムの実施形態の例について説明する。
 図2に示す転写フィルム10は、仮支持体11と、中間層13及び感光性層15を含む組成物層17と、保護フィルム19とを、この順に有する。
 図2で示す転写フィルム10は、中間層13及び保護フィルム19を有する形態であるが、中間層13及び保護フィルム19を有していなくてもよい。
 図2においては、仮支持体11上に配置され得る保護フィルム19を除く各層(例えば、感光性層、及び、中間層)を、「組成物層」ともいう。
Example embodiments of transfer films are described.
The transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 2 has a temporary support 11, a composition layer 17 including an intermediate layer 13 and a photosensitive layer 15, and a protective film 19 in this order.
Although the transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 2 has the intermediate layer 13 and the protective film 19, the intermediate layer 13 and the protective film 19 may be omitted.
In FIG. 2, each layer (for example, a photosensitive layer and an intermediate layer) other than the protective film 19 that can be placed on the temporary support 11 is also referred to as a "composition layer".
 以下、転写フィルムについて、各部材及び各成分を詳細に説明する。
 なお、以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。
Each member and each component of the transfer film will be described in detail below.
In addition, although description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on a representative embodiment of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
〔仮支持体〕
 転写フィルムは、仮支持体を有する。
 仮支持体は、感光性層を支持する部材であり、最終的には仮支持体剥離工程により除去される。
[Temporary support]
The transfer film has a temporary support.
The temporary support is a member that supports the photosensitive layer, and is finally removed by the temporary support peeling process.
 仮支持体は、単層構造及び多層構造のいずれであってもよい。
 仮支持体としては、フィルムが好ましく、樹脂フィルムがより好ましい。また、仮支持体としては、可撓性を有し、かつ、加圧下又は加圧下及び加熱下において、著しい変形、収縮又は伸びを生じないフィルムも好ましく、シワ等の変形及び傷がないフィルムも好ましい。
 フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(例えば、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム)、ポリメチルメタクリレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリイミドフィルム、及び、ポリカーボネートフィルムが挙げられ、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。
The temporary support may have either a single layer structure or a multilayer structure.
The temporary support is preferably a film, more preferably a resin film. In addition, as the temporary support, a film that has flexibility and does not undergo significant deformation, shrinkage, or elongation under pressure or under pressure and heat is also preferable, and a film that is free from deformation such as wrinkles and scratches is also preferable. preferable.
Examples of films include polyethylene terephthalate film (e.g., biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film), polymethyl methacrylate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polyimide film, and polycarbonate film, and polyethylene terephthalate film is preferred.
 仮支持体は、仮支持体を介してパターン露光できる点から、透明性が高いことが好ましい。具体的には、波長365nmにおける仮支持体の透過率は、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。上限は、100%未満が好ましい。
 仮支持体を介するパターン露光時のパターン形成性及び仮支持体の透明性の点から、仮支持体のヘイズは小さい方が好ましい。具体的には、仮支持体のヘイズは、2%以下が好ましく、0.5%以下がより好ましく、0.1%以下が更に好ましい。下限は、0%以上が好ましい。
The temporary support preferably has high transparency from the viewpoint that pattern exposure can be performed through the temporary support. Specifically, the transmittance of the temporary support at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more. The upper limit is preferably less than 100%.
From the viewpoint of pattern formability during pattern exposure through the temporary support and transparency of the temporary support, the haze of the temporary support is preferably as small as possible. Specifically, the haze of the temporary support is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 0.5% or less, and even more preferably 0.1% or less. The lower limit is preferably 0% or more.
 仮支持体を介するパターン露光時のパターン形成性及び仮支持体の透明性の点から、仮支持体中の微粒子、異物及び欠陥の数は、少ない方が好ましい。具体的には、仮支持体中の微粒子(例えば、直径1μmの微粒子)、異物及び欠陥の数は、50個/10mm以下が好ましく、10個/10mm以下がより好ましく、3個/10mm以下が更に好ましく、1個/10mm未満が特に好ましい。下限は、0個/10mm以上が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of pattern formability during pattern exposure through the temporary support and transparency of the temporary support, the number of fine particles, foreign matter and defects in the temporary support is preferably as small as possible. Specifically, the number of fine particles (for example, fine particles with a diameter of 1 μm), foreign matter and defects in the temporary support is preferably 50/10 mm 2 or less, more preferably 10/10 mm 2 or less, and 3/10 mm. 2 or less is more preferable, and less than 1/10 mm 2 is particularly preferable. The lower limit is preferably 0 pieces/10 mm 2 or more.
 仮支持体の厚みは、5~200μmが好ましく、取り扱いやすさ及び汎用性の点から、5~150μmがより好ましく、5~50μmが更に好ましく、5~25μmが特に好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、SEM(走査型電子顕微鏡:Scanning Electron Microscope)による断面観察により測定した任意の5点の平均値として算出される。
The thickness of the temporary support is preferably 5 to 200 μm, more preferably 5 to 150 μm, even more preferably 5 to 50 μm, particularly preferably 5 to 25 μm, from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support is calculated as an average value of arbitrary five points measured by cross-sectional observation with a SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope).
 仮支持体は、ハンドリング性の点から、仮支持体の片面又は両面に、微粒子を含む層(滑剤層)を有していてもよい。
 滑剤層に含まれる微粒子の直径は、0.05~0.8μmが好ましい。
 滑剤層の厚みは、0.05~1.0μmが好ましい。
The temporary support may have a layer containing fine particles (lubricant layer) on one side or both sides of the temporary support from the viewpoint of handling.
The fine particles contained in the lubricant layer preferably have a diameter of 0.05 to 0.8 μm.
The thickness of the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 1.0 μm.
 仮支持体と感光性層との密着性を向上させる点から、仮支持体の感光性層と接する面は、表面改質処理されていてもよい。
 表面改質処理としては、例えば、UV照射、コロナ放電、及び、プラズマ等を用いる処理が挙げられる。
 UV照射における露光量は、10~2000mJ/cmが好ましく、50~1000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
 露光量が上記範囲であれば、ランプ出力及び照度は特に制限されない。
 UV照射における光源としては、例えば、150~450nm波長帯域の光を発する低圧水銀ランプ、高圧水銀ランプ、超高圧水銀灯、カーボンアーク灯、メタルハライドランプ、キセノンランプ、ケミカルランプ、無電極放電ランプ、及び、発光ダイオード(LED)が挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer, the surface of the temporary support in contact with the photosensitive layer may be subjected to a surface modification treatment.
Surface modification treatment includes, for example, treatment using UV irradiation, corona discharge, plasma, and the like.
The exposure amount in UV irradiation is preferably 10-2000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 50-1000 mJ/cm 2 .
As long as the exposure amount is within the above range, the lamp output and illuminance are not particularly limited.
Light sources for UV irradiation include, for example, low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, ultra-high-pressure mercury lamps, carbon arc lamps, metal halide lamps, xenon lamps, chemical lamps, electrodeless discharge lamps, and, Light emitting diodes (LEDs) may be mentioned.
 仮支持体としては、例えば、厚み16μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、厚み12μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、及び、厚み9μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが挙げられる。
 また、仮支持体としては、例えば、特開2014-085643号公報の段落[0017]~[0018]、特開2016-027363号公報の段落[0019]~[0026]、国際公開第2012/081680号の段落[0041]~[0057]、及び、国際公開第2018/179370号の段落[0029]~[0040]も挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 仮支持体の市販品としては、例えば、ルミラー16KS40、及び、ルミラー16FB40(以上、東レ社製);コスモシャインA4100、コスモシャインA4300、及び、コスモシャインA8300(以上、東洋紡社製)が挙げられる。
Examples of the temporary support include a 16 μm thick biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film, a 12 μm thick biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film, and a 9 μm thick biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film.
Further, as the temporary support, for example, paragraphs [0017] to [0018] of JP-A-2014-085643, paragraphs [0019] to [0026] of JP-A-2016-027363, International Publication No. 2012/081680 and paragraphs [0029] to [0040] of WO2018/179370, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Examples of commercially available temporary supports include Lumirror 16KS40 and Lumirror 16FB40 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.); Cosmoshine A4100, Cosmoshine A4300, and Cosmoshine A8300 (manufactured by Toyobo).
〔感光性層〕
 転写フィルムは、感光性層を有する。
 感光性層としては、ネガ型感光性層が好ましい。感光性層がネガ型感光性層である場合、形成されるパターンは硬化膜に該当する。
[Photosensitive layer]
The transfer film has a photosensitive layer.
As the photosensitive layer, a negative photosensitive layer is preferred. When the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer, the pattern formed corresponds to a cured film.
 感光性層は、後述する樹脂及び後述する重合性化合物を含むこと、又は、後述する重合性化合物及び後述する重合性開始剤を含むことが好ましく、後述する樹脂、後述する重合性化合物、及び、後述する重合性開始剤を含むことがより好ましい。また、感光性層は、後述する樹脂がアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含むことも好ましい。つまり、感光性層は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含む樹脂及び重合性化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 感光性層は、感光性層の全質量に対して、樹脂を10.0~90.0質量%、重合性化合物を5.0~70.0質量%、及び、重合開始剤を0.01~20.0質量%含むことが好ましい。
 以下、感光性層が含み得る各成分について説明する。
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a resin to be described later and a polymerizable compound to be described later, or preferably contains a polymerizable compound to be described later and a polymerization initiator to be described later. It is more preferable to contain a polymerizable initiator, which will be described later. In the photosensitive layer, it is also preferable that the resin described later contains an alkali-soluble resin. That is, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a resin containing an alkali-soluble resin and a polymerizable compound.
The photosensitive layer contains 10.0 to 90.0% by weight of a resin, 5.0 to 70.0% by weight of a polymerizable compound, and 0.01 of a polymerization initiator, based on the total weight of the photosensitive layer. It is preferable to contain up to 20.0% by mass.
Each component that the photosensitive layer may contain will be described below.
<樹脂>
 感光性層は、樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 樹脂としては、アルカリ可溶性樹脂が好ましい。
<Resin>
The photosensitive layer may contain a resin.
As the resin, an alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
 露光時の焦点位置にずれが生じたときの線幅太り及び解像度の悪化を抑制する点から、樹脂は、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位を含むことが好ましい。
 上記芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基及び置換基を有していてもよいアラルキル基が挙げられる。
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、10.0質量%以上が好ましく、20.0質量%以上がより好ましく、30.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、樹脂の全質量に対して、80.0質量%以下が好ましく、60.0質量%以下がより好ましく、55.0質量%以下が更に好ましい。感光性層が複数の樹脂を含む場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位の含有量の質量平均値が、上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
The resin preferably contains a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group from the viewpoint of suppressing thickening of the line width and deterioration of resolution when the focus position shifts during exposure.
Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include an optionally substituted phenyl group and an optionally substituted aralkyl group.
The content of structural units derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 10.0% by mass or more, more preferably 20.0% by mass or more, more preferably 30.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin. % or more by mass is more preferable. The upper limit is preferably 80.0% by mass or less, more preferably 60.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 55.0% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the resin. When the photosensitive layer contains a plurality of resins, the weight average content of structural units derived from monomers having aromatic hydrocarbon groups is preferably within the above range.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体としては、例えば、アラルキル基を有する単量体、スチレン、及び、重合可能なスチレン誘導体(例えば、メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、4-ビニル安息香酸、スチレンダイマー、及び、スチレントリマー等)が挙げられ、アラルキル基を有する単量体又はスチレンが好ましく、スチレンがより好ましい。
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体がスチレンである場合、スチレンに由来する構成単位の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、10.0~80.0質量%が好ましく、20.0~60.0質量%がより好ましく、30.0~55.0質量%が更に好ましい。感光性層が複数の樹脂を含む場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位の含有量の質量平均値が、上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
Examples of monomers having an aromatic hydrocarbon group include monomers having an aralkyl group, styrene, and polymerizable styrene derivatives (e.g., methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxystyrene, 4 - vinyl benzoic acid, styrene dimer, styrene trimer, etc.), preferably a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene, more preferably styrene.
When the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is styrene, the content of structural units derived from styrene is preferably 10.0 to 80.0% by mass, preferably 20.0%, based on the total mass of the resin. ~60.0% by mass is more preferable, and 30.0 to 55.0% by mass is even more preferable. When the photosensitive layer contains a plurality of resins, it is preferable that the weight average value of the content of structural units having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is within the above range.
 アラルキル基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよいフェニルアルキル基(ただし、ベンジル基を除く)、及び、置換基を有していてもよいベンジル基が挙げられ、置換基を有していてもよいベンジル基が好ましい。 The aralkyl group includes, for example, a phenylalkyl group optionally having a substituent (excluding a benzyl group) and a benzyl group optionally having a substituent. An optional benzyl group is preferred.
 フェニルアルキル基を有する単量体としては、例えば、フェニルエチル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。 Examples of monomers having a phenylalkyl group include phenylethyl (meth)acrylate.
 ベンジル基を有する単量体としては、例えば、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート及びクロロベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等のベンジル基を有する(メタ)アクリレート;ビニルベンジルクロライド及びビニルベンジルアルコール等のベンジル基を有するビニルモノマーが挙げられ、ベンジル基を有する(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートがより好ましい。
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体がベンジル(メタ)アクリレートである場合、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートに由来する構成単位の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、10.0~90.0質量%が好ましく、20.0~80.0質量%がより好ましく、30.0~70.0質量%が更に好ましい。
Examples of monomers having a benzyl group include (meth)acrylates having a benzyl group such as benzyl (meth)acrylate and chlorobenzyl (meth)acrylate; vinyl monomers having a benzyl group such as vinylbenzyl chloride and vinylbenzyl alcohol. and preferably a (meth)acrylate having a benzyl group, more preferably a benzyl (meth)acrylate.
When the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is benzyl (meth)acrylate, the content of structural units derived from benzyl (meth)acrylate is 10.0 to 90.0 with respect to the total mass of the resin. % by mass is preferable, 20.0 to 80.0% by mass is more preferable, and 30.0 to 70.0% by mass is even more preferable.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位を含む樹脂は、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体と、後述する第1の単量体を少なくとも1つ、及び/又は、後述する第2の単量体を少なくとも1つと、を重合することにより得られることが好ましい。 The resin containing a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group includes a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and at least one first monomer described later, and/or It is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the second monomers.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位を含まない樹脂は、後述する第1の単量体の少なくとも1つを重合することにより得られることが好ましく、第1の単量体の少なくとも1つと後述する第2の単量体の少なくとも1つとを重合することにより得られることがより好ましい。 The resin that does not contain a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the first monomers described later, and the first monomer and at least one of the second monomers to be described later are more preferably obtained by polymerizing.
 第1の単量体は、分子中にカルボキシ基を有する単量体である。
 第1の単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、フマル酸、ケイ皮酸、クロトン酸、イタコン酸、4-ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸無水物、及び、マレイン酸半エステルが挙げられ、(メタ)アクリル酸が好ましい。
 第1の単量体に由来する構成単位の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、5.0~50.0質量%が好ましく、10.0~40.0質量%がより好ましく、10.0~30.0質量%が更に好ましい。
 上記含有量が5.0質量%以上である場合、優れる現像性及びエッジフューズ性の制御等を実現できる。上記含有量が50.0質量%以下である場合、レジストパターンの高解像性、スソ形状の制御及びレジストパターンの高耐薬品性を実現できる。
 また、後述の通り、樹脂中の第1の単量体に由来する構成単位は第3の構成単位と反応している場合がある。この場合、樹脂中における、第1の単量体に由来する構成単位であって、第3の単量体とは反応していない構成単位の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、0~50.0質量%が好ましく、0.0~20.0質量%がより好ましく、0.0~10.0質量%が更に好ましい。
A 1st monomer is a monomer which has a carboxy group in a molecule|numerator.
Examples of the first monomer include (meth)acrylic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, maleic anhydride, and maleic acid half ester. , (meth)acrylic acid is preferred.
The content of the structural unit derived from the first monomer is preferably 5.0 to 50.0% by mass, more preferably 10.0 to 40.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin. 0 to 30.0% by mass is more preferable.
When the content is 5.0% by mass or more, excellent developability and control of edge fuse properties can be achieved. When the content is 50.0% by mass or less, high resolution of the resist pattern, control of the groove shape, and high chemical resistance of the resist pattern can be achieved.
Further, as will be described later, the structural unit derived from the first monomer in the resin may react with the third structural unit. In this case, the content of structural units derived from the first monomer and not reacted with the third monomer in the resin is 0 with respect to the total mass of the resin. ~50.0% by mass is preferable, 0.0 to 20.0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.0 to 10.0% by mass is even more preferable.
 第2の単量体は、非酸性であり、かつ、分子中に重合性基を有する単量体である。
 重合性基は、後述する重合性化合物が有する重合性基と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 第2の単量体としては、例えば、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、tert-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリレート類;酢酸ビニル等のビニルアルコールのエステル類;(メタ)アクリロニトリルが挙げられる。
 なかでも、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、又は、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく、メチル(メタ)アクリレート又はエチル(メタ)アクリレートがより好ましい。
 第2の単量体に由来する構成単位の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、1.0~80.0質量%が好ましく、1.0~60.0質量%がより好ましく、1.0~50.0質量%が更に好ましい。
The second monomer is a monomer that is non-acidic and has a polymerizable group in its molecule.
The polymerizable group has the same meaning as the polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound described below, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
Examples of the second monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth) acrylate. , tert-butyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylates such as 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate; esters of vinyl alcohol such as vinyl acetate; and (meth)acrylonitrile.
Among them, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, or n-butyl (meth)acrylate is preferable, and methyl (meth)acrylate or ethyl (meth)acrylate is more preferable.
The content of the structural unit derived from the second monomer is preferably 1.0 to 80.0% by mass, more preferably 1.0 to 60.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin. 0 to 50.0% by mass is more preferable.
 樹脂は、側鎖に、直鎖構造、分岐構造、及び、脂環構造のいずれかを有していてもよい。
 側鎖に分岐構造を有する基を含む単量体又は側鎖に脂環構造を有する基を含む単量体を使用することによって、樹脂の側鎖に分岐構造又は脂環構造を導入できる。脂環構造を有する基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい。
 「側鎖」とは、主鎖から枝分かれした原子団を意味する。「主鎖」とは、樹脂を構成する高分子化合物の分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖を意味する。
 側鎖に分岐構造を有する基を含む単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸sec-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸tert-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソアミル、(メタ)アクリル酸tert-アミル、(メタ)アクリル酸sec-アミル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-オクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-オクチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸tert-オクチルが挙げられる。
 なかでも、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソブチル、又は、メタクリル酸tert-ブチルが好ましく、メタクリル酸イソプロピル、又は、メタクリル酸tert-ブチルがより好ましい。
 側鎖に脂環構造を有する基を含む単量体としては、例えば、単環の脂肪族炭化水素基を有する単量体及び多環の脂肪族炭化水素基を有する単量体が挙げられる。また、炭素数5~20の脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸(ビシクロ〔2.2.1〕ヘプチル-2)、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-メチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5-ジメチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-エチルアダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-メチル-5-エチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5,8-トリエチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5-ジメチル-8-エチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-メチル-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチル-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-ヒドロキシ-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクタヒドロ-4,7-メンタノインデン-5-イル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクタヒドロ-4,7-メンタノインデン-1-イルメチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-メンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカン、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-ヒドロキシ-2,6,6-トリメチル-ビシクロ〔3.1.1〕ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,7,7-トリメチル-4-ヒドロキシ-ビシクロ〔4.1.0〕ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2,2,5-トリメチルシクロヘキシル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシルが挙げられる。
 なかでも、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸1-メンチル、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカンが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカンがより好ましい。
The resin may have any one of a linear structure, a branched structure and an alicyclic structure in the side chain.
By using a monomer containing a group having a branched structure in its side chain or a monomer containing a group having an alicyclic structure in its side chain, a branched structure or alicyclic structure can be introduced into the side chain of the resin. A group having an alicyclic structure may be either monocyclic or polycyclic.
"Side chain" means an atomic group branched off from the main chain. The “main chain” means the relatively longest linking chain in the molecule of the polymer compound that constitutes the resin.
Examples of the monomer containing a group having a branched structure in the side chain include isopropyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, sec-butyl (meth)acrylate, tert-butyl (meth)acrylate, Isoamyl (meth)acrylate, tert-amyl (meth)acrylate, sec-amyl (meth)acrylate, 2-octyl (meth)acrylate, 3-octyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid and tert-octyl.
Among them, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, or tert-butyl methacrylate is preferable, and isopropyl methacrylate or tert-butyl methacrylate is more preferable.
The monomer containing a group having an alicyclic structure in its side chain includes, for example, a monomer having a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and a monomer having a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group. (Meth)acrylates having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group with 5 to 20 carbon atoms are also included.
Specifically, (meth) acrylic acid (bicyclo[2.2.1] heptyl-2), (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-2-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid- 3-methyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3,5-dimethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3-ethyladamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3-methyl-5-ethyl-1 -adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3,5,8-triethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate-3,5-dimethyl-8-ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth)acrylate 2-methyl- 2-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, octahydro-4,7-menthanoinden-5-yl (meth) acrylate, ( Octahydro-4,7-menthanoinden-1-ylmethyl meth)acrylate, 1-menthyl (meth)acrylate, tricyclodecane (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxy-2,6 (meth)acrylate ,6-trimethyl-bicyclo[3.1.1]heptyl, (meth)acrylic acid-3,7,7-trimethyl-4-hydroxy-bicyclo[4.1.0]heptyl, (meth)acrylic acid (nor ) bornyl, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, fenchyl (meth)acrylate, 2,2,5-trimethylcyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.
Among them, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, (nor)bornyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, 1-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, 2-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate Fentyl acrylate, 1-menthyl (meth)acrylate, or tricyclodecane (meth)acrylate is preferred, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, (nor)bornyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, More preferred is 2-adamantyl (meth)acrylate or tricyclodecane (meth)acrylate.
 樹脂は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、重合性基を有することが好ましく、重合性基を有する構成単位を含むことがより好ましく、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する構成単位を含むことが更に好ましい。
 上記重合性基としては、後述する重合性化合物が有する重合性基が挙げられ、エチレン性不飽和基が好ましく、アクリロイル基又はメタアクリロイル基がより好ましい。
 また、上記重合性基は、重合性化合物の重合性基と重合反応し得る重合性基も好ましい。
 重合性基を有する樹脂は、更に、上述又は後述の通りの好適な要件を満たすことも好ましい。
The resin preferably has a polymerizable group, more preferably contains a structural unit having a polymerizable group, and contains a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. is more preferred.
Examples of the polymerizable group include a polymerizable group possessed by a polymerizable compound to be described later, preferably an ethylenically unsaturated group, and more preferably an acryloyl group or a methacryloyl group.
Further, the polymerizable group is preferably a polymerizable group capable of undergoing a polymerization reaction with the polymerizable group of the polymerizable compound.
It is also preferred that the resin having polymerizable groups also meet the preferred requirements as described above or below.
 重合性基を有する構成単位を含む樹脂は、第1の単量体に由来する構成単位を含む樹脂と、第3の単量体とを反応することにより得られることが好ましい。 The resin containing a structural unit having a polymerizable group is preferably obtained by reacting a resin containing a structural unit derived from the first monomer with the third monomer.
 第3の単量体は、分子中に2つ以上の重合性基を有する単量体であり、分子中に2つの重合性基を有する単量体であることが好ましい。
 上記重合性基としては、例えば、後述する重合性化合物が有する重合性基が挙げられる。なかでも、第3の単量体は、2種の重合性基を有することが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和基とカチオン性重合性基とを有することがより好ましく、アクリロイル基又はメタアクリロイル基とエポキシ基とを有することが更に好ましい。
The third monomer is a monomer having two or more polymerizable groups in its molecule, preferably a monomer having two polymerizable groups in its molecule.
Examples of the polymerizable group include a polymerizable group possessed by a polymerizable compound to be described later. Among them, the third monomer preferably has two kinds of polymerizable groups, more preferably has an ethylenically unsaturated group and a cationic polymerizable group, an acryloyl group or a methacryloyl group and an epoxy It is more preferred to have a group.
 第3の単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリル、等が挙げられる。 Examples of the third monomer include glycidyl (meth)acrylate, allyl (meth)acrylate, and the like.
 重合性基を有する構成単位としては、式(P)で表される構成単位が好ましい。 As the structural unit having a polymerizable group, a structural unit represented by formula (P) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(P)中、Rは、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。Lは、2価の連結基を表す。Pは、重合性基を表す。 In formula (P), R P represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. LP represents a divalent linking group. P represents a polymerizable group.
 Rは、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。
 Rとしては、水素原子が好ましい。
R P represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
R 2 P is preferably a hydrogen atom.
 Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、-NR-、炭化水素基、及び、それらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。Rは、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 上記炭化水素基としては、例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、及び、アリーレン基が挙げられる。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。上記アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、2~8がより好ましく、3~5が更に好ましい。上記アルキレン基は、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよく、上記アルキレン基中のメチレン基がヘテロ原子に置き換わってもよい。上記ヘテロ原子としては、酸素原子、硫黄原子、又は、窒素原子が好ましく、酸素原子がより好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい。上記シクロアルキレン基の炭素数は、3~20が好ましく、5~10がより好ましく、6~8が更に好ましい。
 上記アリーレン基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい。上記アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。上記アリーレン基としては、フェニレン基が好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基及び上記アリーレン基は、環員原子としてヘテロ原子を有していてもよい。上記ヘテロ原子としては、酸素原子、硫黄原子、又は、窒素原子が好ましく、酸素原子がより好ましい。
 上記炭化水素基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子等)、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、及び、アルケニル基が挙げられ、ヒドロキシ基が好ましい。
 Lとしては、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基が好ましい。
LP represents a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -NR N -, hydrocarbon groups, and groups in which these are combined. be done. RN represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, and an arylene group.
The alkylene group may be linear or branched. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 3 to 5 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may have a heteroatom, and the methylene group in the alkylene group may be replaced with a heteroatom. The heteroatom is preferably an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, more preferably an oxygen atom.
The cycloalkylene group may be either monocyclic or polycyclic. The cycloalkylene group preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 8 carbon atoms.
The arylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. A phenylene group is preferable as the arylene group.
The cycloalkylene group and the arylene group may have a heteroatom as a ring member atom. The heteroatom is preferably an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, more preferably an oxygen atom.
The hydrocarbon group may further have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include halogen atoms (eg, fluorine atoms), hydroxy groups, nitro groups, cyano groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, and alkenyl groups, with hydroxy groups being preferred.
As L P , an alkylene group optionally having a heteroatom is preferable.
 Pは、重合性基を表す。
 上記重合性基は、上述したとおりである。
P represents a polymerizable group.
The polymerizable group is as described above.
 重合性基を有する構成単位としては、例えば、以下の構成単位が挙げられる。 Examples of structural units having a polymerizable group include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 樹脂が重合性基を有する構成単位を含む場合、重合性基を有する構成単位の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、5.0~70.0質量%が好ましく、10.0~50.0質量%がより好ましく、15.0~40.0質量%が更に好ましい。 When the resin contains a structural unit having a polymerizable group, the content of the structural unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 5.0 to 70.0% by mass, preferably 10.0 to 50%, based on the total mass of the resin. 0% by mass is more preferred, and 15.0 to 40.0% by mass is even more preferred.
 重合性基を樹脂に導入する方法としては、例えば、樹脂が有する、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、第1級アミノ基、第2級アミノ基、アセトアセチル基、及び、スルホ基等の基に、エポキシ化合物、ブロックイソシアネート化合物、イソシアネート化合物、ビニルスルホン化合物、アルデヒド化合物、メチロール化合物、及び、カルボン酸無水物を反応させる方法が挙げられる。
 重合性基を樹脂に導入する方法の好適態様としては、例えば、第1の単量体を重合反応により合成した後、得られた樹脂の第1の単量体に由来する構成単位のカルボキシ基の一部に第3の単量体(好ましくは、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート)を高分子反応させて、樹脂に重合性基(好ましくは、(メタ)アクリロキシ基)を導入する方法が挙げられる。上記高分子反応の反応温度は、80~110℃が好ましい。上記高分子反応は、触媒を用いることが好ましく、アンモニウム塩(テトラエチルアンモニウムブロミド)を用いることがより好ましい。
 上記重合反応の反応温度は、70~100℃が好ましく、80~90℃がより好ましい。上記重合反応は、重合開始剤を用いることが好ましく、重合開始剤としてアゾ系開始剤を用いることがより好ましく、重合開始剤としてV-601(富士フイルム和光純薬社製)、又は、V-65(富士フイルム和光純薬社製)が更に好ましい。
As a method for introducing a polymerizable group into a resin, for example, epoxy compounds, blocked isocyanate compounds, isocyanate compounds, vinyl sulfone compounds, aldehyde compounds, methylol compounds, and carboxylic acid anhydrides.
As a preferred embodiment of the method for introducing a polymerizable group into a resin, for example, after synthesizing a first monomer by a polymerization reaction, a carboxy group of a structural unit derived from the first monomer of the obtained resin is introduced. A third monomer (preferably glycidyl (meth)acrylate) is allowed to polymerize with a part of to introduce a polymerizable group (preferably (meth)acryloxy group) into the resin. The reaction temperature for the polymer reaction is preferably 80 to 110.degree. The polymer reaction preferably uses a catalyst, more preferably an ammonium salt (tetraethylammonium bromide).
The reaction temperature of the polymerization reaction is preferably 70 to 100°C, more preferably 80 to 90°C. The polymerization reaction preferably uses a polymerization initiator, more preferably an azo initiator as a polymerization initiator, V-601 (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) as a polymerization initiator, or V- 65 (manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) is more preferable.
 樹脂としては、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位とメチルメタクリレートに由来する構成単位とスチレンに由来する構成単位若しくはベンジルメタクリレートに由来する構成単位とを含む樹脂、又は、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位とスチレンに由来する構成単位とを含む樹脂が好ましく、更に重合性基を有する構成単位を含む樹脂がより好ましい。
 上記において、各構成単位の含有量を、上述したそれぞれの好適態様にすることも好ましい。
The resin includes a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylate, a structural unit derived from styrene, or a structural unit derived from benzyl methacrylate, or a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and styrene. A resin containing a structural unit derived from is preferable, and a resin containing a structural unit having a polymerizable group is more preferable.
In the above, it is also preferable to set the content of each structural unit to the above-mentioned suitable aspect.
 樹脂のTgは、30~180℃が好ましく、40~150℃がより好ましく、50~120℃が更に好ましい。 The Tg of the resin is preferably 30 to 180°C, more preferably 40 to 150°C, even more preferably 50 to 120°C.
 樹脂の酸価は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、220mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、190mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましく、170mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましい。下限は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、10mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、80mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましく、90mgKOH/g以上が特に好ましい。
 「酸価(mgKOH/g)」とは、試料1gを中和するのに必要な水酸化カリウムの質量(mg)を意味する。酸価は、例えば、JIS K0070:1992に準拠して求めることができる。
 樹脂の酸価は、樹脂が有する構成単位の種類及び/又は酸基を含む構成単位の含有量によって調整できる。
 上記酸価の範囲を満たす樹脂は、更に、上述又は後述の通りの好適な要件を満たすことも好ましい。
 感光性層が2種以上の樹脂を含む場合、上記酸価の範囲を満たす樹脂の含有量は、全樹脂に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The acid value of the resin is preferably 220 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 190 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 170 mgKOH/g or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. The lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, still more preferably 80 mgKOH/g or more, and particularly preferably 90 mgKOH/g or more, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
"Acid number (mg KOH/g)" means the mass (mg) of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize 1 g of sample. The acid value can be determined according to JIS K0070:1992, for example.
The acid value of the resin can be adjusted by the type of structural unit contained in the resin and/or the content of the structural unit containing an acid group.
Resins satisfying the above acid value range preferably also satisfy the preferred requirements as described above or below.
When the photosensitive layer contains two or more resins, the content of the resin satisfying the acid value range is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, more preferably 90% by mass, based on the total resin. ~100% by mass is more preferred.
 樹脂のI/O値は、0.90以下が好ましく、0.70未満がより好ましい。
 樹脂のI/O値は、0.10以上が好ましく、0.30以上がより好ましく、0.50以上が更に好ましい。
 I/O値とは、樹脂の親水性/親油性の尺度を表すパラメーターである。I/O値については、「有機概念図」(甲田善生著、三共出版、1984年)を参照できる。
 樹脂のI/O値が0(ゼロ)に近いほど、樹脂の極性が小さいこと(樹脂の親油性)を
意味し、樹脂のI/O値が大きいほど、樹脂の極性が大きいこと(樹脂の親水性が大きい
こと)を意味する。
 本明細書において、上記I/O値は、樹脂の化学構造に基づき、I(親水性)及びO(親油性)をそれぞれ算出し、求められるI/O値である。
 上記I/O値の範囲を満たす樹脂は、更に、上述又は後述の通りの好適な要件を満たすことも好ましい。
 感光性層が2種以上の樹脂を含む場合、上記I/O値の範囲を満たす樹脂の含有量は、全樹脂に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The I/O value of the resin is preferably 0.90 or less, more preferably less than 0.70.
The I/O value of the resin is preferably 0.10 or more, more preferably 0.30 or more, and even more preferably 0.50 or more.
The I/O value is a parameter that represents a measure of the hydrophilicity/lipophilicity of a resin. For the I/O value, refer to "Organic Conceptual Diagram" (Yoshio Koda, Sankyo Publishing, 1984).
The closer the I/O value of the resin is to 0 (zero), the lower the polarity of the resin (lipophilicity of the resin). high hydrophilicity).
In this specification, the I/O value is an I/O value obtained by calculating I (hydrophilicity) and O (lipophilicity) based on the chemical structure of the resin.
Resins satisfying the above I/O value ranges also preferably satisfy the preferred requirements as described above or below.
When the photosensitive layer contains two or more resins, the content of the resin satisfying the I/O value range is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total resin. , more preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
 樹脂の重量平均分子量としては、500,000以下が好ましく、100,000以下がより好ましく、30,000以下が更に好ましく、25,000以下が特に好ましい。樹脂の重量平均分子量としては、3,000以上が好ましく、4,000以上がより好ましく、5,000以上が更に好ましく、10,000以上が特に好ましい。
 重量平均分子量が500,000以下である場合、解像性及び現像性を向上できる。また。重量平均分子量が3,000以上である場合、現像凝集物の性状、並びに、転写フィルムのエッジフューズ性及びカットチップ性等の未露光膜の性状を制御できる。「エッジフューズ性」とは、転写フィルムをロール状に巻き取った場合に、ロールの端面からの、感光性層のはみ出し易さの程度を意味する。「カットチップ性」とは、未露光膜をカッターで切断した場合に、チップの飛び易さの程度を意味する。このチップが転写フィルムの上面等に付着すると、後の露光工程等でマスクに転写して不良品の原因となる。
 樹脂の分散度は、1.0~6.0が好ましく、1.0~5.0がより好ましく、1.0~4.0が更に好ましく、1.0~3.0が特に好ましい。
 上記重量平均分子量及び/又は分散度の範囲を満たす樹脂は、更に、上述又は後述の通りの好適な要件を満たすことも好ましい。
 感光性層が2種以上の樹脂を含む場合、上記重量平均分子量及び/又は分散度の範囲を満たす樹脂の含有量は、全樹脂に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 500,000 or less, more preferably 100,000 or less, even more preferably 30,000 or less, and particularly preferably 25,000 or less. The weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 3,000 or more, more preferably 4,000 or more, still more preferably 5,000 or more, and particularly preferably 10,000 or more.
When the weight average molecular weight is 500,000 or less, resolution and developability can be improved. Also. When the weight-average molecular weight is 3,000 or more, properties of development aggregates and properties of unexposed films such as edge-fuse properties and cut-chip properties of transfer films can be controlled. The “edge fuse property” means the degree of easiness of protrusion of the photosensitive layer from the end face of the roll when the transfer film is wound into a roll. The term "cut chip resistance" means the degree of easiness of chip flying when an unexposed film is cut with a cutter. If this chip adheres to the upper surface of the transfer film or the like, it will be transferred to the mask in the subsequent exposure process or the like, resulting in defective products.
The dispersity of the resin is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, still more preferably 1.0 to 4.0, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 3.0.
Resins satisfying the above weight average molecular weight and/or dispersity ranges preferably also satisfy the preferred requirements as described above or below.
When the photosensitive layer contains two or more resins, the content of the resin that satisfies the above weight average molecular weight and/or dispersity range is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total resin. % is more preferred, and 90 to 100% by mass is even more preferred.
 樹脂は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 2種以上の樹脂を使用する場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位を含む樹脂を2種類混合使用すること又は芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位を含む樹脂と芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位を含まない樹脂とを混合使用することが好ましい。後者である場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に由来する構成単位を含む樹脂の含有量は、樹脂の全質量に対して、50.0質量%以上が好ましく、70.0質量%以上がより好ましく、80.0質量%以上が更に好ましく、90.0質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、樹脂の全質量に対して、100.0質量%以下が好ましい。
One type of resin may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
When two or more resins are used, a mixture of two types of resins containing structural units derived from monomers having aromatic hydrocarbon groups or a structure derived from monomers having aromatic hydrocarbon groups It is preferable to use a mixture of a resin containing the unit and a resin not containing a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group. In the latter case, the content of the resin containing a structural unit derived from a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 50.0% by mass or more, preferably 70.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin. The above is more preferable, 80.0% by mass or more is still more preferable, and 90.0% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the resin.
 樹脂の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、10.0~90.0質量%が好ましく、20.0~80.0質量%がより好ましく、30.0~70.0質量%が更に好ましく、40.0~60.0質量%が特に好ましい。樹脂の含有量が、感光性層の全質量に対して、90.0質量%以下である場合、現像時間を制御できる。また、樹脂の含有量が、感光性層の全質量に対して、10.0質量%以上である場合、耐エッジフューズ性を向上できる。 The resin content is preferably 10.0 to 90.0% by mass, more preferably 20.0 to 80.0% by mass, and 30.0 to 70.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. is more preferred, and 40.0 to 60.0% by mass is particularly preferred. When the resin content is 90.0% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, the development time can be controlled. Moreover, when the content of the resin is 10.0% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, the edge fuse resistance can be improved.
 樹脂の合成方法としては、例えば、上述した単量体を、溶剤で希釈した溶液に、ラジカル重合開始剤を適量添加し、加熱撹拌する方法が挙げられる。混合物の一部を反応液に滴下しながら合成してもよい。また、反応終了後、更に溶剤を加えて、所望の濃度に調整してもよい。
 樹脂の合成方法としては、上記以外に、例えば、塊状重合、懸濁重合、及び、乳化重合が挙げられる。
As a method for synthesizing the resin, for example, a method of adding an appropriate amount of a radical polymerization initiator to a solution obtained by diluting the above-described monomer with a solvent and heating and stirring the solution can be mentioned. You may synthesize|combine, dripping a part of mixture to a reaction liquid. Further, after the completion of the reaction, a solvent may be further added to adjust the desired concentration.
In addition to the methods described above, for example, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and emulsion polymerization can be used as methods for synthesizing the resin.
 感光性層は、上述の樹脂以外に、その他の樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 その他の樹脂としては、例えば、アクリル樹脂、スチレン-アクリル系共重合体、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン、及び、ポリアルキレングリコールが挙げられる。
The photosensitive layer may contain other resins in addition to the above resins.
Other resins include, for example, acrylic resins, styrene-acrylic copolymers, polyurethane resins, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resins, polyester resins, polyamide resins, epoxy resins, polyacetal resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polyimide resins. , polybenzoxazole resins, polysiloxane resins, polyethyleneimines, polyallylamines, and polyalkylene glycols.
<重合性化合物>
 感光性層は、重合性基を有する重合性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 「重合性化合物」とは、後述する重合開始剤の作用で重合する化合物であって、上記樹脂とは異なる化合物を意味する。
<Polymerizable compound>
The photosensitive layer may contain a polymerizable compound having a polymerizable group.
"Polymerizable compound" means a compound that polymerizes under the action of a polymerization initiator described later and that is different from the above resin.
 重合性化合物が有する重合性基としては、重合反応に関与する基であればよく、例えば、ビニル基、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基、スチリル基、及び、マレイミド基等のエチレン性不飽和基を有する基;エポキシ基、及び、オキセタン基等のカチオン性重合性基を有する基が挙げられる。
 なかでも、重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和基を有する基が好ましく、アクリロイル基又はメタアクリロイル基がより好ましい。
The polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound may be any group that participates in the polymerization reaction. a group having a cationic polymerizable group such as an epoxy group and an oxetane group;
Among them, as the polymerizable group, a group having an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, and an acryloyl group or a methacryloyl group is more preferable.
 重合性化合物としては、感光性層の感光性がより優れる点から、1つ以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(以下、「エチレン性不飽和化合物」ともいう。)が好ましく、分子中に2つ以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(以下、「多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物」ともいう。)がより好ましい。
 また、解像性及び剥離性がより優れる点で、エチレン性不飽和化合物が分子中に有するエチレン性不飽和基の数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、2~3が更に好ましく、3が特に好ましい。
As the polymerizable compound, a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups (hereinafter, also referred to as "ethylenically unsaturated compound") is preferable from the viewpoint of better photosensitivity of the photosensitive layer. Compounds having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups (hereinafter also referred to as "polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds") are more preferred.
Further, from the viewpoint of better resolution and peelability, the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups that the ethylenically unsaturated compound has in the molecule is preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and 2 to 3. More preferred, 3 being particularly preferred.
 重合性化合物は、アルキレンオキシ基を有していてもよい。
 上記アルキレン基としては、エチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基が好ましく、エチレンオキシ基がより好ましい。重合性化合物に付加するアルキレンオキシ基の付加数は、1分子当たり、2~60が好ましく、2~30がより好ましく、2~20が更に好ましい。
 アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基)を有する重合性化合物の含有量は、感光性層における全重合性化合物に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The polymerizable compound may have an alkyleneoxy group.
The alkylene group is preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group, more preferably an ethyleneoxy group. The number of alkyleneoxy groups added to the polymerizable compound is preferably 2 to 60, more preferably 2 to 30, and even more preferably 2 to 20 per molecule.
The content of the polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an ethyleneoxy group) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer, and 90 ~100% by mass is more preferred.
 重合性化合物は、2官能以上の重合性化合物を含むことが好ましく、3官能以上の重合性化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 なお、重合性化合物がN官能(Nは1以上の整数)と表現する場合、Nの値は、その重合性化合物が有する重合性基(好ましくはエチレン性不飽和基)の数を意味する。
 感光性層の感光性と解像性及び剥離性とのバランスがより優れる点から、重合性化合物は、分子中に2又は3つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する2官能又は3官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、1分子中に3つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する3官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、重合性化合物は、2官能の重合性化合物(好ましくは、2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)と、3官能以上の重合性化合物(好ましくは、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物)との両方を含むことも好ましい。
The polymerizable compound preferably contains a bifunctional or higher polymerizable compound, more preferably a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
When the polymerizable compound is expressed as N-functional (N is an integer of 1 or more), the value of N means the number of polymerizable groups (preferably ethylenically unsaturated groups) possessed by the polymerizable compound.
The polymerizable compound is a bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated group having 2 or 3 ethylenically unsaturated groups in the molecule from the viewpoint of better balance between photosensitivity, resolution and peelability of the photosensitive layer. It preferably contains a compound, and more preferably contains a trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having three ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
Further, the polymerizable compound is a bifunctional polymerizable compound (preferably a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) and a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound (preferably a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound). It is also preferred to include both.
 2官能の重合性化合物(好ましくは、2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)の含有量は、重合性化合物の全質量に対して、剥離性に優れる点から、20.0質量%以上が好ましく、40.0質量%超がより好ましく、55.0質量%以上が更に好ましく、90.0質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、100.0質量%以下が好ましく、80.0質量%以下がより好ましい。つまり、感光性層に含まれる全ての重合性化合物が2官能の重合性化合物であってもよい。
 3官能以上の重合性化合物(好ましくは、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物、より好ましくは3官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)の含有量は、重合性化合物の全質量に対して、10.0質量%以上が好ましく、20.0質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、100.0質量%以下が好ましく、80.0質量%以下がより好ましく、50.0質量%以下が更に好ましい。つまり、感光性層に含まれる全ての重合性化合物が3官能以上の重合性化合物であってもよい。
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、重合性基として(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
The content of the bifunctional polymerizable compound (preferably, the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) is preferably 20.0% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of excellent peelability, and 40% by mass. More than 0.0% by mass is more preferable, 55.0% by mass or more is still more preferable, and 90.0% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less, more preferably 80.0% by mass or less. That is, all polymerizable compounds contained in the photosensitive layer may be bifunctional polymerizable compounds.
The content of the trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound (preferably a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound, more preferably a trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) is 10.0 with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound. % by mass or more is preferable, and 20.0% by mass or more is more preferable. The upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less, more preferably 80.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50.0% by mass or less. That is, all polymerizable compounds contained in the photosensitive layer may be trifunctional or higher polymerizable compounds.
Moreover, as the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth)acrylate compound having a (meth)acryloyl group as a polymerizable group is preferable.
(重合性化合物B1)
 感光性層は、芳香環及び2つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物B1を含むことも好ましい。
 重合性化合物B1は、上記重合性化合物のうち、分子中に1つ以上の芳香環を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物である。
(Polymerizable compound B1)
The photosensitive layer also preferably contains a polymerizable compound B1 having an aromatic ring and two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
The polymerizable compound B1 is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having one or more aromatic rings in the molecule among the above polymerizable compounds.
 重合性化合物B1が有する芳香環としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、及び、アントラセン環等の芳香族炭化水素環;チオフェン環、フラン環、ピロール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、及び、ピリジン環等の芳香族複素環;これらの縮合環が挙げられ、芳香族炭化水素環が好ましく、ベンゼン環がより好ましい。上記芳香環は、置換基を有してもよい。
 重合性化合物B1は、1又は2つ以上の芳香環を有していてもよい。
Examples of the aromatic ring of the polymerizable compound B1 include aromatic hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring, and anthracene ring; thiophene ring, furan ring, pyrrole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, and pyridine ring. Aromatic heterocycles such as; The aromatic ring may have a substituent.
Polymerizable compound B1 may have one or more aromatic rings.
 重合性化合物B1は、現像液による感光性層の膨潤を抑制することにより、解像性が向上する点から、ビスフェノール構造を有することが好ましい。
 ビスフェノール構造としては、例えば、ビスフェノールA(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン)に由来するビスフェノールA構造、ビスフェノールF(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタン)に由来するビスフェノールF構造、及び、ビスフェノールB(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ブタン)に由来するビスフェノールB構造が挙げられ、ビスフェノールA構造が好ましい。
The polymerizable compound B1 preferably has a bisphenol structure from the viewpoint of improving the resolution by suppressing swelling of the photosensitive layer due to the developer.
The bisphenol structure includes, for example, a bisphenol A structure derived from bisphenol A (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane) and a bisphenol derived from bisphenol F (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)methane). The F structure and the bisphenol B structure derived from bisphenol B (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)butane) can be mentioned, with the bisphenol A structure being preferred.
 ビスフェノール構造を有する重合性化合物B1としては、例えば、ビスフェノール構造と、そのビスフェノール構造の両端に結合した2つの重合性基(好ましくは(メタ)アクリロイル基)とを有する化合物が挙げられる。
 ビスフェノール構造の両端と2つの重合性基とは、直接結合してもいてもよく、1つ以上のアルキレンオキシ基を介して結合してもよい。ビスフェノール構造の両端に付加するアルキレンオキシ基としては、エチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基が好ましく、エチレンオキシ基がより好ましい。ビスフェノール構造に付加するアルキレンオキシ基(好ましくは、エチレンオキシ基)の付加数は、1分子当たり2~60が好ましく、2~30がより好ましく、2~20が更に好ましい。
 ビスフェノール構造を有する重合性化合物B1としては、例えば、特開2016-224162号公報の段落[0072]~[0080]が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure include compounds having a bisphenol structure and two polymerizable groups (preferably (meth)acryloyl groups) bonded to both ends of the bisphenol structure.
Both ends of the bisphenol structure and the two polymerizable groups may be directly bonded or bonded via one or more alkyleneoxy groups. The alkyleneoxy group added to both ends of the bisphenol structure is preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group, more preferably an ethyleneoxy group. The number of alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups) added to the bisphenol structure is preferably 2 to 60, more preferably 2 to 30, even more preferably 2 to 20 per molecule.
Examples of the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure include paragraphs [0072] to [0080] of JP-A-2016-224162, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 重合性化合物B1としては、ビスフェノールA構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましく、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリアルコキシ)フェニル)プロパンがより好ましい。
 2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリアルコキシ)フェニル)プロパンとしては、例えば、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシジエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(FA-324M、日立化成社製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシエトキシプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン、及び、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシペンタエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン等のエトキシ化ビスフェノールAジメタクリレート(BPEシリーズ、新中村化学工業社製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシドデカエトキシテトラプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン(FA-3200MY、日立化成社製)、並びに、エトキシ化(10)ビスフェノールAジアクリレート(NKエステルA-BPE-10、新中村化学工業社製)が挙げられる。
As the polymerizable compound B1, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol A structure is preferable, and 2,2-bis(4-((meth)acryloxypolyalkoxy)phenyl)propane is more preferable.
2,2-bis(4-((meth)acryloxypolyalkoxy)phenyl)propane includes, for example, 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxydiethoxy)phenyl)propane (FA-324M, Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) ), 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxyethoxypropoxy)phenyl)propane, and ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate (BPE) such as 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxypentaethoxy)phenyl)propane series, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis(4-(methacryloxidedodecaethoxytetrapropoxy)phenyl)propane (FA-3200MY, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), and ethoxylated (10) bisphenol A di Acrylate (NK Ester A-BPE-10, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 重合性化合物B1としては、式(B1)で表される化合物も好ましい。 A compound represented by the formula (B1) is also preferable as the polymerizable compound B1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(B1)中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。Aはエチレン基を表す。Bはプロピレン基を表す。n1及びn3は、それぞれ独立に、1~39の整数を表す。n1+n3は、2~40の整数を表す。n2及びn4は、それぞれ独立に、0~29の整数を表す。n2+n4は、0~30の整数を表す。
 -(A-O)-及び-(B-O)-の構成単位の配列は、ランダム及びブロックのいずれであってもよい。ブロックである場合、-(A-O)-及び-(B-O)-のいずれがビスフェニル基側であってもよい。
 n1+n2+n3+n4としては、2~20が好ましく、2~16がより好ましく、4~12が更に好ましい。また、n2+n4は、0~10が好ましく、0~4がより好ましく、0~2が更に好ましく、0が特に好ましい。
In formula (B1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. A represents an ethylene group. B represents a propylene group. n1 and n3 each independently represent an integer of 1 to 39; n1+n3 represents an integer of 2-40. n2 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 29; n2+n4 represents an integer of 0-30.
The arrangement of -(AO)- and -(B-O)- constitutional units may be either random or block. In the case of a block, either -(AO)- or -(B-O)- may be on the side of the biphenyl group.
n1+n2+n3+n4 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 4 to 12. Further, n2+n4 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4, still more preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0.
 重合性化合物B1の含有量は、解像性がより優れる点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、10.0質量%以上が好ましく、20.0質量%以上がより好ましく、25.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、転写性及びエッジフュージョン(転写部材の端部から感光性組成物が滲み出す現象)の点から、70.0質量%以下が好ましく、60.0質量%以下がより好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 10.0% by mass or more, more preferably 20.0% by mass or more, more preferably 25.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of better resolution. % or more by mass is more preferable. The upper limit is preferably 70.0% by mass or less, more preferably 60.0% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of transferability and edge fusion (phenomenon in which the photosensitive composition exudes from the edge of the transfer member).
 重合性化合物B1の含有量は、重合性化合物の全質量に対して、解像性がより優れる点から、40.0質量%以上が好ましく、50.0質量%以上がより好ましく、55.0質量%以上が更に好ましく、60.0質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、重合性化合物の全質量に対して、剥離性の点から、100.0質量%以下が好ましく、99.0質量%以下がより好ましく、95.0質量%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 40.0% by mass or more, more preferably 50.0% by mass or more, more preferably 55.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of better resolution. % by mass or more is more preferable, and 60.0% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is preferably 100.0% by mass or less, more preferably 99.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 95.0% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of releasability.
(その他重合性化合物)
 感光性層は、上記以外に、その他重合性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 その他重合性化合物としては、例えば、公知の重合性化合物が挙げられる。
 具体的には、分子中に1つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)、芳香環を有さない2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物及び3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
(Other polymerizable compounds)
The photosensitive layer may contain other polymerizable compounds in addition to the above.
Other polymerizable compounds include, for example, known polymerizable compounds.
Specifically, a compound having one ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule (monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound), a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring, and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound compound.
 単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチルサクシネート、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。 Examples of monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include ethyl (meth)acrylate, ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-(meth)acryloyloxyethyl succinate, polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate. , and phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate.
 芳香環を有さない2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、アルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリアルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、トリメチロールプロパンジアクリレートが挙げられる。
 アルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(A-DCP、新中村化学工業社製)、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジメタクリレート(DCP、新中村化学工業社製)、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(A-NOD-N、新中村化学工業社製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(A-HD-N、新中村化学工業社製)、エチレングリコールジメタクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジアクリレート、及び、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 ポリアルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート(NKエステル4G等、新中村化学工業社製)、ジプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、トリプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、及び、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート(アロニックスM-270等、東亞合成社製)が挙げられる。
 ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、プロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、エチレンオキサイド、及び、プロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。また、ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートの市販品としては、例えば、8UX-015A(大成ファインケミカル社製)、UA-32P(新中村化学工業社製)、及び、UA-1100H(新中村化学工業社製)が挙げられる。
Examples of bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having no aromatic ring include alkylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polyalkylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, urethane di(meth)acrylate, and trimethylolpropane diacrylate. be done.
Alkylene glycol di(meth)acrylates include, for example, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate (DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), ethylene glycol dimethacrylate , 1,10-decanediol diacrylate, and neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate.
Examples of polyalkylene glycol di(meth)acrylate include polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate (NK Ester 4G, etc., manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, and polypropylene glycol. di(meth)acrylates (Aronix M-270, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
Urethane di(meth)acrylates include, for example, propylene oxide-modified urethane di(meth)acrylates, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di(meth)acrylates. In addition, commercial products of urethane di(meth)acrylate include, for example, 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.). is mentioned.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、ジペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸トリ(メタ)アクリレート、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、これらのアルキレンオキサイド変性物が挙げられる。
 「(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート」とは、トリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念である。また、「(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート」とは、トリ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、テトラ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念である。
Examples of trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol (tri/tetra/penta/hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri/tetra) (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth) Acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth)acrylate, isocyanurate tri(meth)acrylate, glycerin tri(meth)acrylate, and alkylene oxide modified products thereof.
"(Tri/tetra/penta/hexa)(meth)acrylate" is a concept including tri(meth)acrylate, tetra(meth)acrylate, penta(meth)acrylate, and hexa(meth)acrylate. Moreover, "(tri/tetra)(meth)acrylate" is a concept including tri(meth)acrylate and tetra(meth)acrylate.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性物としては、例えば、カプロラクトン変性(メタ)アクリレート化合物(日本化薬社製KAYARAD(登録商標)DPCA-20、及び、新中村化学工業社製A-9300-1CL等)、アルキレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレート化合物(日本化薬社製KAYARAD RP-1040、新中村化学工業社製ATM-35E、及び、A-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社製EBECRYL(登録商標) 135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製A-GLY-9E等)、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成社製)、アロニックスM-520(東亞合成社製)、アロニックスM-510(東亞合成社製)、及び、SR454(巴化学協業社製)が挙げられる。 Examples of alkylene oxide-modified trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds include, for example, caprolactone-modified (meth)acrylate compounds (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., and Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. A -9300-1CL, etc.), alkylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate compounds (KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku, ATM-35E and A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Allnex (registered Trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) ), Aronix M-510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and SR454 (manufactured by Tomoe Kagaku Kyogyo Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物は、酸基(例えば、カルボキシ基等)を有する重合性化合物であってもよい。上記酸基は酸無水物基を形成していてもよい。
 酸基を有する重合性化合物としては、例えば、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成社製)、アロニックス(登録商標)M-520(東亞合成社製)、及び、アロニックス(登録商標)M-510(東亞合成社製)が挙げられる。
 酸基を有する重合性化合物として、例えば、特開2004-239942号公報の段落[0025]~[0030]に記載の酸基を有する重合性化合物が挙げられる。
The polymerizable compound may be a polymerizable compound having an acid group (for example, a carboxyl group, etc.). The acid group may form an acid anhydride group.
The polymerizable compound having an acid group, for example, Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Aronix (registered trademark) M -510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
Examples of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include polymerizable compounds having an acid group described in paragraphs [0025] to [0030] of JP-A-2004-239942.
 重合性化合物の分子量としては、200~3,000が好ましく、280~2,200がより好ましく、300~2,200が更に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably from 200 to 3,000, more preferably from 280 to 2,200, even more preferably from 300 to 2,200.
 重合性化合物は、粘度10~30000mPa・sの重合性化合物を含むことが好ましく、粘度300~5000mPa・s以上の重合性化合物を含むことがより好ましく、粘度500~3000mPa・s以上の重合性化合物を含むことが更に好ましい。
 上記粘度の範囲を満たす重合性化合物は、更に、上述又は後述の通りの好適な要件を満たすことも好ましい。
 感光性層が2種以上の重合性化合物を含む場合、粘度が上記範囲(例えば300~5000mPa・sの範囲)を満たす重合性化合物の含有量は、全重合性化合物に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、40~100質量%がより好ましく、90~99質量%が更に好ましい。また、例えば、clogPが500以上の重合性化合物の含有量は、全重合性化合物に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、20~99質量%がより好ましく、35~65質量%が更に好ましい。
 本明細書において、重合性化合物の粘度は、ブルックフィールド型粘度計(東機産業社製TVB-15等)を用いて25℃の温度で測定した粘度である。
The polymerizable compound preferably contains a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 10 to 30000 mPa s, more preferably a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 300 to 5000 mPa s or more, and a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 500 to 3000 mPa s or more. It is further preferred to contain
The polymerizable compound satisfying the above viscosity range also preferably satisfies the preferred requirements as described above or below.
When the photosensitive layer contains two or more polymerizable compounds, the content of the polymerizable compounds satisfying the above range of viscosity (for example, the range of 300 to 5000 mPa s) is 10 to 100 with respect to all polymerizable compounds. % by mass is preferable, 40 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 90 to 99% by mass is even more preferable. Further, for example, the content of the polymerizable compound having a clogP of 500 or more is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 99% by mass, more preferably 35 to 65% by mass, based on the total polymerizable compound. .
As used herein, the viscosity of a polymerizable compound is the viscosity measured at a temperature of 25° C. using a Brookfield viscometer (TVB-15 manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物が有する重合性基の含有量は、1.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、2.0mmol/g以上がより好ましく、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、3.0mmol/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、10.0mmol/g以下が好ましい。また、上記重合性の含有量を二重結合の含有量に置き換えて解釈してもよい。
 「重合性基の含有量」とは、重合性化合物1g当たりに含まれる重合性基の当量(mol)を意味する。
The content of the polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound is preferably 1.0 mmol/g or more, more preferably 2.0 mmol/g or more, and further preferably 3.0 mmol/g or more from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. preferable. The upper limit is preferably 10.0 mmol/g or less. Moreover, you may interpret by replacing the said polymerizable content with the content of a double bond.
"Polymerizable group content" means the equivalent amount (mol) of polymerizable groups contained per 1 g of the polymerizable compound.
 重合性化合物は、clogPが、1.0以上であることが好ましく、3.0以上であることがより好ましく、5.0以上であることが更に好ましく、5.5超であることが特に好ましい。重合性化合物のclogPは、10.0以下が好ましく、7.0以下がより好ましい。
 本明細書において、clogPとは、1-オクタノール及び水への分配係数Pの常用対数logPを計算によって求めた値である。
 上記clogPの計算に用いる方法及びソフトウェアについては公知のものを使用できるが、特に断らない限り、本明細書では、Cambridge soft社のChemBioDraw Ultra 12.0に組み込まれたclogPプログラムを用いることとする。
 上記clogPの範囲を満たす重合性化合物は、更に、上述又は後述の通りの好適な要件を満たすことも好ましい。
 感光性層が2種以上の重合性化合物を含む場合、clogPが上記範囲(例えば5.0以上の範囲)を満たす重合性化合物の含有量は、全重合性化合物に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、40~100質量%がより好ましく、90~99質量%が更に好ましい。また、例えば、clogPが5.5超の重合性化合物の含有量は、全重合性化合物に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、20~99質量%がより好ましく、35~65質量%が更に好ましい。
The polymerizable compound preferably has a clogP of 1.0 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, still more preferably 5.0 or more, and particularly preferably more than 5.5. . The clogP of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10.0 or less, more preferably 7.0 or less.
As used herein, clogP is a value obtained by calculating the common logarithm logP of the partition coefficient P to 1-octanol and water.
Although known methods and software can be used for the calculation of clogP, the clogP program incorporated in ChemBioDraw Ultra 12.0 of Cambridge soft will be used in this specification unless otherwise specified.
The polymerizable compound satisfying the above clogP range preferably also satisfies the preferred requirements as described above or below.
When the photosensitive layer contains two or more polymerizable compounds, the content of the polymerizable compound clogP satisfies the above range (for example, the range of 5.0 or more), relative to the total polymerizable compound, 10 to 100 mass %, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, even more preferably 90 to 99% by mass. Further, for example, the content of the polymerizable compound having a clogP of more than 5.5 is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 99% by mass, and 35 to 65% by mass with respect to the total polymerizable compound. More preferred.
 重合性化合物は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 なかでも、重合性化合物は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、3種以上で用いるこも好ましい。
 3種の重合性化合物を用いる場合、3種のうち少なくとも1つは重合性化合物B1であることが好ましく、3種のうち少なくとも2つは重合性化合物B1であることがより好ましい。
 重合性化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、10.0~70.0質量%が好ましく、15.0~70.0質量%がより好ましく、20.0~70.0質量%が更に好ましい。
The polymerizable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Among them, it is also preferable to use three or more kinds of polymerizable compounds from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
When three types of polymerizable compounds are used, at least one of the three types is preferably polymerizable compound B1, and at least two of the three types are more preferably polymerizable compound B1.
The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10.0 to 70.0% by mass, more preferably 15.0 to 70.0% by mass, and 20.0 to 70.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % by mass is more preferred.
 樹脂の含有量に対する重合性化合物の含有量の質量比(重合性化合物の含有量/樹脂の含有量)が、0.10~2.00が好ましく、0.50~1.50がより好ましく、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、0.70~1.10が更に好ましい。 The mass ratio of the polymerizable compound content to the resin content (polymerizable compound content/resin content) is preferably 0.10 to 2.00, more preferably 0.50 to 1.50, 0.70 to 1.10 is more preferable because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
 感光性層は、上記重合性化合物B1及び3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことも好ましい。
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量に対する重合性化合物B1の含有量の質量比(重合性化合物B1の含有量/3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.2~4.0がより好ましく、1.5~3.0が更に好ましい。
The photosensitive layer preferably contains the polymerizable compound B1 and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound.
The mass ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound B1 to the content of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound (content of the polymerizable compound B1/content of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound) is 1.0. ~5.0 is preferred, 1.2 to 4.0 is more preferred, and 1.5 to 3.0 is even more preferred.
<重合開始剤>
 感光性層は、重合開始剤を含んでいてもよい。
 重合開始剤としては、例えば、重合反応の形式に応じて公知の重合開始剤が挙げられる。具体的には、熱重合開始剤及び光重合開始剤が挙げられる。
 重合開始剤は、ラジカル重合開始剤及びカチオン重合開始剤のいずれであってもよい。
<Polymerization initiator>
The photosensitive layer may contain a polymerization initiator.
Examples of the polymerization initiator include known polymerization initiators depending on the type of polymerization reaction. Specific examples include thermal polymerization initiators and photopolymerization initiators.
The polymerization initiator may be either a radical polymerization initiator or a cationic polymerization initiator.
 感光性層は、光重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
 光重合開始剤は、紫外線、可視光線、及び、X線等の活性光線を受けて、重合性化合物の重合を開始する化合物である。光重合開始剤としては、例えば、公知の光重合開始剤が挙げられる。
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、光ラジカル重合開始剤及び光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられ、光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
A photopolymerization initiator is a compound that initiates polymerization of a polymerizable compound upon receiving actinic rays such as ultraviolet rays, visible rays, and X-rays. Examples of photopolymerization initiators include known photopolymerization initiators.
Examples of photopolymerization initiators include radical photopolymerization initiators and cationic photopolymerization initiators, and radical photopolymerization initiators are preferred.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、オキシムエステル構造を有する光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド構造を有する光重合開始剤、及び、N-フェニルグリシン構造を有する光重合開始剤が挙げられる。 Examples of photoradical polymerization initiators include photopolymerization initiators having an oxime ester structure, photopolymerization initiators having an α-aminoalkylphenone structure, photopolymerization initiators having an α-hydroxyalkylphenone structure, and acylphosphine oxide. structure and a photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤は、感光性、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、及び、解像性の点から、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを含むことが好ましい。なお、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体における2つの2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール構造は、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体の誘導体としては、例えば、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジ(メトキシフェニル)イミダゾール二量体、2-(o-フルオロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、及び、2-(p-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体が挙げられる。
The photoradical polymerization initiator is selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimers and derivatives thereof from the viewpoints of photosensitivity, visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and resolution. preferably includes at least one The two 2,4,5-triarylimidazole structures in the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivative may be the same or different.
Derivatives of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include, for example, 2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-di (Methoxyphenyl)imidazole dimer, 2-(o-fluorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2-(o-methoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, and 2 -(p-methoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、特開2011-095716号公報の段落[0031]~[0042]、及び、特開2015-014783号公報の段落[0064]~[0081]に記載される光ラジカル重合開始剤が挙げられる。 Examples of photoradical polymerization initiators include, for example, paragraphs [0031] to [0042] of JP-A-2011-095716, and paragraphs [0064] to [0081] of JP-A-2015-014783. A radical polymerization initiator is mentioned.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチル(DBE)、ベンゾインメチルエーテル、アニシル(p,p’-ジメトキシベンジル)、TAZ-110(みどり化学社製)、ベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、TAZ-111(みどり化学社製)、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)]-1,2-オクタンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(IRGACURE(登録商標) OXE-01、BASF社製)、1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタノン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(IRGACURE OXE-02、BASF社製)、IRGACURE OXE-03(BASF社製)、IRGACURE OXE-04(BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルフォリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン(Omnirad 379EG、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(Omnirad 907、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-1-{4-[4-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロピオニル)ベンジル]フェニル}-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン(Omnirad 127、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)ブタノン-1(Omnirad 369、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン(Omnirad 1173、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン(Omnirad 184、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン(Omnirad 651、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾリル-ジフェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(Omnirad TPO H、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾリル)フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(Omnirad 819、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、オキシムエステル系の光重合開始剤(Lunar 6、DKSHジャパン社製)、2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニルビスイミダゾール(2-(2-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体)(B-CIM、Hampford社製)、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体(BCTB、東京化成工業社製)、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロペンチルプロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(TR-PBG-305、常州強力電子新材料社製)、1,2-プロパンジオン,3-シクロヘキシル-1-[9-エチル-6-(2-フラニルカルボニル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,2-(O-アセチルオキシム)(TR-PBG-326、常州強力電子新材料社製)、及び、3-シクロヘキシル-1-(6-(2-(ベンゾイルオキシイミノ)ヘキサノイル)-9-エチル-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル)-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(TR-PBG-391、常州強力電子新材料社製)が挙げられる。 Examples of photoradical polymerization initiators include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p,p'-dimethoxybenzyl), TAZ-110 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.), benzophenone, 4,4'. -Bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, TAZ-111 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1-[4-(phenylthio)]-1,2-octanedione-2-(O-benzoyloxime) (IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE- 01, manufactured by BASF), 1-[9-ethyl-6-(2-methylbenzoyl)-9H-carbazol-3-yl]ethanone-1-(O-acetyloxime) (IRGACURE OXE-02, manufactured by BASF) ), IRGACURE OXE-03 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE OXE-04 (manufactured by BASF), 2-(dimethylamino)-2-[(4-methylphenyl)methyl]-1-[4-(4-morpholinyl ) Phenyl]-1-butanone (Omnirad 379EG, IGM Resins B.V.), 2-methyl-1-(4-methylthiophenyl)-2-morpholinopropan-1-one (Omnirad 907, IGM Resins B V. Co.), 2-hydroxy-1-{4-[4-(2-hydroxy-2-methylpropionyl)benzyl]phenyl}-2-methylpropan-1-one (Omnirad 127, IGM Resins B.I. V.), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinophenyl)butanone-1 (Omnirad 369, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1 -Phenylpropan-1-one (Omnirad 1173, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone (Omnirad 184, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2 -diphenylethan-1-one (Omnirad 651, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenylphosphine oxide (Omnirad TPO H, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenylphosphine oxide (Omnirad 819, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), oxime ester photopolymerization initiator (Lu nar 6, manufactured by DKSH Japan), 2,2'-bis(2-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbisimidazole (2-(2-chlorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer) (B-CIM, manufactured by Hampford), 2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer (BCTB, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl ]-3-Cyclopentylpropane-1,2-dione-2-(O-benzoyloxime) (TR-PBG-305, manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), 1,2-propanedione, 3-cyclohexyl-1- [9-ethyl-6-(2-furanylcarbonyl)-9H-carbazol-3-yl]-,2-(O-acetyloxime) (TR-PBG-326, manufactured by Changzhou Tenryu Electric New Materials Co., Ltd.), and , 3-cyclohexyl-1-(6-(2-(benzoyloxyimino)hexanoyl)-9-ethyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-benzoyloxime) (TR-PBG-391, manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.).
 光カチオン重合開始剤(光酸発生剤)は、活性光線を受けて酸を発生する化合物である。光カチオン重合開始剤としては、波長300nm以上(好ましくは波長300~450nm)の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましい。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光カチオン重合開始剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく使用できる。
 光カチオン重合開始剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤が更に好ましい。下限は、-10.0以上が好ましい。
A photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator) is a compound that generates an acid upon receiving an actinic ray. The photocationic polymerization initiator is preferably a compound that responds to an actinic ray with a wavelength of 300 nm or more (preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm) and generates an acid. In addition, even for photocationic polymerization initiators that do not directly react to actinic rays with a wavelength of 300 nm or more, if they are compounds that react to actinic rays with a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generate an acid by using them in combination with a sensitizer, the sensitizer can be used. It can be preferably used in combination with
The photocationic polymerization initiator is preferably a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid with a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid with a pKa of 3 or less, and an acid with a pKa of 2 or less. Photocationic polymerization initiators that generate are more preferred. The lower limit is preferably -10.0 or more.
 光カチオン重合開始剤としては、例えば、イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤及び非イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられる。
 イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤として、例えば、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、並びに、第4級アンモニウム塩類が挙げられる。
 イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤としては、例えば、特開2014-085643号公報の段落[0114]~[0133]に記載のイオン性光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられる。
Examples of photocationic polymerization initiators include ionic photocationic polymerization initiators and nonionic photocationic polymerization initiators.
Ionic photocationic polymerization initiators include, for example, onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts.
Examples of the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator include ionic photocationic polymerization initiators described in paragraphs [0114] to [0133] of JP-A-2014-085643.
 非イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤としては、例えば、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物が挙げられる。
 トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、及び、イミドスルホネート化合物としては、例えば、特開2011-221494号公報の段落[0083]~[0088]に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
 オキシムスルホネート化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落[0084]~[0088]に記載された化合物が挙げられる。
Nonionic photocationic polymerization initiators include, for example, trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oximesulfonate compounds.
Examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, and imidosulfonate compounds include compounds described in paragraphs [0083] to [0088] of JP-A-2011-221494.
Oxime sulfonate compounds include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs [0084] to [0088] of WO2018/179640.
 重合開始剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 重合開始剤(好ましくは光重合開始剤)の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.5質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、感光性層の全質量に対して、20質量%以下が好ましく、15質量%以下がより好ましく、10質量%以下が更に好ましい。
A polymerization initiator may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in 2 or more types.
The content of the polymerization initiator (preferably photopolymerization initiator) is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and even more preferably 10% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
<色素(発色剤)>
 感光性層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、並びに、現像後のパターン視認性及び解像性の点から、発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける最大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、かつ、酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素(発色剤)を含んでもよい。以下、色素(発色剤)のことを「色素N」ともいう。
 色素Nを含む場合、詳細なメカニズムは不明であるが、隣接する層(例えば、中間層)との密着性が向上して解像性により優れる。
<Dye (color former)>
The photosensitive layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm during color development from the viewpoint of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and pattern visibility and resolution after development, and , acids, bases, or radicals to change the maximum absorption wavelength dye (color coupler). Hereinafter, the dye (color former) is also referred to as "dye N".
When the dye N is contained, although the detailed mechanism is unknown, the adhesion to the adjacent layer (for example, the intermediate layer) is improved and the resolution is improved.
 色素が「酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する」とは、発色状態にある色素が酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルにより消色する態様、消色状態にある色素が酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルにより発色する態様及び発色状態にある色素が他の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を意味してもよい。
 具体的には、色素Nは、露光により消色状態から変化して発色する化合物及び露光により発色状態から変化して消色する化合物のいずれであってもよい。上記である場合、露光により酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルが感光性層内において発生し作用することにより、発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素であってもよく、酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルにより感光性層内の状態(例えば、pH)が変化することで発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素であってもよい。また、露光を介さずに、酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルを刺激として直接受けて発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素であってもよい。
The dye "changes the maximum absorption wavelength due to acid, base, or radical" means that the dye in the colored state is decolored by acid, base, or radical, and the dye in the decolored state is acid or base. Alternatively, it may mean any one of a mode in which a color is developed by a radical and a mode in which a dye in a coloring state changes to a coloring state of another hue.
Specifically, the dye N may be either a compound that changes from a decolored state to develop color upon exposure or a compound that changes from a colored state to decolor upon exposure. In the above case, it may be a dye that changes the state of color development or decoloration due to the action of an acid, a base, or a radical generated in the photosensitive layer by exposure, and an acid, a base, or a radical It may be a dye that changes the state of coloring or decoloring by changing the state (for example, pH) in the photosensitive layer due to the presence of the dye. Further, it may be a dye that changes its coloring or decoloring state by being directly stimulated by an acid, a base, or a radical without being exposed to light.
 なかでも、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、及び、解像性の点から、色素Nは、酸又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素が好ましく、ラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素がより好ましい。
 感光性層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、及び、解像性の点から、色素Nとしてラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素及び光ラジカル重合開始剤の両者を含むことが好ましい。また、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の点から、色素Nは、酸、塩基、又は、ラジカルにより発色する色素であることが好ましい。
Among them, the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by acid or radicals, and a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas and resolution. more preferred.
From the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas and resolution, the photosensitive layer preferably contains both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals and a photoradical polymerization initiator as the dye N. From the viewpoint of the visibility of the exposed and unexposed areas, the dye N is preferably a dye that develops color with an acid, a base, or a radical.
 色素Nの発色機構としては、例えば、感光性層に光ラジカル重合開始剤、光カチオン重合開始剤(光酸発生剤)、又は、光塩基発生剤を添加して、露光後に光ラジカル重合開始剤、光カチオン重合開始剤、又は、光塩基発生剤から発生するラジカル、酸又は塩基によって、ラジカル反応性色素、酸反応性色素、又は、塩基反応性色素(例えば、ロイコ色素)が発色する態様が挙げられる。 As the coloring mechanism of the dye N, for example, a photoradical polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator), or a photobase generator is added to the photosensitive layer, and the photoradical polymerization initiator is added after exposure. , a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye, or a base-reactive dye (e.g., a leuco dye) develops color by radicals, acids, or bases generated from a photocationic polymerization initiator or a photobase generator. mentioned.
 露光部及び非露光部の視認性の点から、色素Nの発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける極大吸収波長としては、550nm以上が好ましく、550~700nmがより好ましく、550~650nmが更に好ましい。
 また、色素Nは、発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける極大吸収波長を1つ又は2つ以上有していてもよい。色素Nが発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける極大吸収波長を2つ以上有する場合、2つ以上の極大吸収波長のうち吸光度が最も高い極大吸収波長が450nm以上であればよい。
From the viewpoint of the visibility of the exposed and unexposed areas, the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm during coloring of the dye N is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 to 700 nm, and even more preferably 550 to 650 nm.
In addition, the dye N may have one or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm during color development. When the dye N has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm during color development, the maximum absorption wavelength with the highest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths should be 450 nm or more.
 色素Nの極大吸収波長は、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計:UV3100(島津製作所社製)を用いて、400~780nmの範囲で色素Nを含む溶液(液温25℃)の透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を検出することによって測定できる。 The maximum absorption wavelength of Dye N is determined by measuring the transmission spectrum of a solution containing Dye N in the range of 400 to 780 nm (liquid temperature 25°C) using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an air atmosphere. can be measured by detecting the wavelength (maximum absorption wavelength) at which the light intensity becomes minimum.
 露光により発色又は消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 露光により消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物、ジアリールメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素、及び、アントラキノン系色素が挙げられる。
 色素Nとしては、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
Examples of dyes that develop or decolorize upon exposure include leuco compounds.
Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diarylmethane-based dyes, oxazine-based dyes, xanthene-based dyes, iminonaphthoquinone-based dyes, azomethine-based dyes, and anthraquinone-based dyes.
As the dye N, a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the visibility of the exposed area and the non-exposed area.
 ロイコ化合物としては、例えば、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリアリールメタン系色素)、スピロピラン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(スピロピラン系色素)、フルオラン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(フルオラン系色素)、ジアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ジアリールメタン系色素)、ローダミンラクタム骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ローダミンラクタム系色素)、インドリルフタリド骨格を有するロイコ化合物(インドリルフタリド系色素)、及び、ロイコオーラミン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ロイコオーラミン系色素)が挙げられる。
 なかでも、トリアリールメタン系色素又はフルオラン系色素が好ましく、トリフェニルメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリフェニルメタン系色素)又はフルオラン系色素がより好ましい。
Examples of leuco compounds include leuco compounds having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dyes), leuco compounds having a spiropyran skeleton (spiropyran dyes), leuco compounds having a fluorane skeleton (fluoran dyes), and diarylmethane skeletons. a leuco compound (diarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a rhodamine lactam skeleton (rhodamine lactam dye), a leuco compound having an indolylphthalide skeleton (indolylphthalide dye), and a leuco auramine skeleton leuco compounds (leuco auramine dyes) having
Among them, triarylmethane-based dyes or fluoran-based dyes are preferable, and leuco compounds having a triphenylmethane skeleton (triphenylmethane-based dyes) or fluoran-based dyes are more preferable.
 ロイコ化合物は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環を有することが好ましい。これにより、ロイコ化合物が有するラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環を、光ラジカル重合開始剤から発生するラジカル又は光カチオン重合開始剤から発生する酸と反応させて、ロイコ化合物を閉環状態に変化させて消色させるか又はロイコ化合物を開環状態に変化させて発色させることができる。ロイコ化合物としては、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環を有し、ラジカル又は酸により、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環が開環して発色する化合物が好ましく、ラクトン環を有し、ラジカル又は酸によりラクトン環が開環して発色する化合物がより好ましい。 The leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultine ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility in exposed and unexposed areas. As a result, the lactone ring, sultine ring, or sultone ring of the leuco compound is reacted with a radical generated from a photoradical polymerization initiator or an acid generated from a photocationic polymerization initiator to change the leuco compound into a ring-closed state. Alternatively, the color can be developed by changing the leuco compound into a ring-opened state. The leuco compound is preferably a compound that has a lactone ring, a sultine ring, or a sultone ring, and develops a color when the lactone ring, sultine ring, or sultone ring is opened by a radical or an acid, and has a lactone ring. , a radical or an acid to open the lactone ring to develop a color.
 色素Nとしては、例えば、染料及びロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 染料としては、例えば、ブリリアントグリーン、エチルバイオレット、メチルグリーン、クリスタルバイオレット、ベイシックフクシン、メチルバイオレット2B、キナルジンレッド、ローズベンガル、メタニルイエロー、チモールスルホフタレイン、キシレノールブルー、メチルオレンジ、パラメチルレッド、コンゴーフレッド、ベンゾプルプリン4B、α-ナフチルレッド、ナイルブルー2B、ナイルブルーA、メチルバイオレット、マラカイトグリーン、パラフクシン、ビクトリアピュアブルー-ナフタレンスルホン酸塩、ビクトリアピュアブルーBOH(保土谷化学工業社製)、オイルブルー#603(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルピンク#312(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルレッド5B(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルスカーレット#308(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルレッドOG(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルレッドRR(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルグリーン#502(オリヱント化学工業社製)、スピロンレッドBEHスペシャル(保土谷化学工業社製)、m-クレゾールパープル、クレゾールレッド、ローダミンB、ローダミン6G、スルホローダミンB、オーラミン、4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノナフトキノン、2-カルボキシアニリノ-4-p-ジエチアミノフェニルイミノナフトキノン、2-カルボキシステアリルアミノ-4-p-N,N-ビス(ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ-フェニルイミノナフトキノン、1-フェニル-3-メチル-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノ-5-ピラゾロン、及び、1-β-ナフチル-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノ-5-ピラゾロンが挙げられる。
Dyes N include, for example, dyes and leuco compounds.
Examples of dyes include brilliant green, ethyl violet, methyl green, crystal violet, basic fuchsine, methyl violet 2B, quinaldine red, rose bengal, methanil yellow, thymolsulfophthalein, xylenol blue, methyl orange, and paramethyl red. , Congo Fred, Benzopurpurin 4B, α-Naphthyl Red, Nile Blue 2B, Nile Blue A, Methyl Violet, Malachite Green, Parafuchsin, Victoria Pure Blue-Naphthalene Sulfonate, Victoria Pure Blue BOH (manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. ), oil blue #603 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil pink #312 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil red 5B (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil scarlet #308 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), oil Red OG (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red RR (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Green #502 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Spiron Red BEH Special (manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), m-cresol purple, cresol red, rhodamine B, rhodamine 6G, sulforhodamine B, auramine, 4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxanilino-4-p-diethyaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxystearylamino-4-p -N,N-bis(hydroxyethyl)amino-phenyliminonaphthoquinone, 1-phenyl-3-methyl-4-p-diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone, and 1-β-naphthyl-4-p-diethylaminophenyl and imino-5-pyrazolones.
 ロイコ化合物としては、例えば、p,p’,p’’-ヘキサメチルトリアミノトリフェニルメタン(ロイコクリスタルバイオレット)、Pergascript Blue SRB(チバガイギー社製)、クリスタルバイオレットラクトン、マラカイトグリーンラクトン、ベンゾイルロイコメチレンブルー、2-(N-フェニル-N-メチルアミノ)-6-(N-p-トリル-N-エチル)アミノフルオラン、2-アニリノ-3-メチル-6-(N-エチル-p-トルイジノ)フルオラン、3,6-ジメトキシフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-5-メチル-7-(N,N-ジベンジルアミノ)フルオラン、3-(N-シクロヘキシル-N-メチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-キシリジノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-クロロフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メトキシ-7-アミノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-(4-クロロアニリノ)フルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-クロロフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-ベンジルアミノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7,8-ベンゾフロオラン、3-(N,N-ジブチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジブチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-キシリジノフルオラン、3-ピペリジノ-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-ピロリジノ-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3,3-ビス(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、3,3-ビス(1-n-ブチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、3,3-ビス(p-ジメチルアミノフェニル)-6-ジメチルアミノフタリド、3-(4-ジエチルアミノ-2-エトキシフェニル)-3-(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)-4-ザフタリド、3-(4-ジエチルアミノフェニル)-3-(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、及び、3’,6’-ビス(ジフェニルアミノ)スピロイソベンゾフラン-1(3H),9’-[9H]キサンテン-3-オンが挙げられる。 Leuco compounds include, for example, p,p',p''-hexamethyltriaminotriphenylmethane (leuco crystal violet), Pergascript Blue SRB (manufactured by Ciba-Geigy), crystal violet lactone, malachite green lactone, benzoyl leuco methylene blue, 2-(N-phenyl-N-methylamino)-6-(Np-tolyl-N-ethyl)aminofluorane, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6-(N-ethyl-p-toluidino)fluorane , 3,6-dimethoxyfluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-5-methyl-7-(N,N-dibenzylamino)fluorane, 3-(N-cyclohexyl-N-methylamino)-6 -methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-xylidinofluor Olan, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-chlorofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methoxy-7-aminofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino )-7-(4-chloroanilino)fluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7-chlorofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7-benzylaminofluorane, 3-(N,N -diethylamino)-7,8-benzofluorane, 3-(N,N-dibutylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-(N,N-dibutylamino)-6-methyl-7 -xyridinofluorane, 3-piperidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-pyrrolidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3,3-bis(1-ethyl-2-methylindole -3-yl)phthalide, 3,3-bis(1-n-butyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide, 3,3-bis(p-dimethylaminophenyl)-6-dimethylaminophthalide, 3-(4-diethylamino-2-ethoxyphenyl)-3-(1-ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)-4-zaphthalide, 3-(4-diethylaminophenyl)-3-(1-ethyl- 2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide and 3′,6′-bis(diphenylamino)spiroisobenzofuran-1(3H),9′-[9H]xanthen-3-one.
 色素Nとしては、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、現像後のパターン視認性及び解像性が優れる点から、ラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素が好ましく、ラジカルにより発色する色素がより好ましい。
 色素Nとしては、ロイコクリスタルバイオレット、クリスタルバイオレットラクトン、ブリリアントグリーン、又は、ビクトリアピュアブルー-ナフタレンスルホン酸塩が好ましい。
As the dye N, a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals is preferable, and a dye that develops color by radicals is more preferable, from the viewpoint of excellent visibility in exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility and resolution after development. .
Preferred dyes N are leuco crystal violet, crystal violet lactone, brilliant green, or victoria pure blue-naphthalene sulfonate.
 色素Nは、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 色素Nの含有量は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、並びに、現像後のパターン視認性及び解像性が優れる点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.1~10質量%がより好ましく、0.1~5質量%が更に好ましく、0.1~1質量%が特に好ましい。
The dye N may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of dye N is 0.1% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of excellent visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and pattern visibility and resolution after development. is preferred, 0.1 to 10% by mass is more preferred, 0.1 to 5% by mass is even more preferred, and 0.1 to 1% by mass is particularly preferred.
 色素Nの含有量は、感光性層の全質量中に含まれる色素Nの全てを発色状態にした場合の色素の含有量を意味する。以下、ラジカルにより発色する色素を例に、色素Nの含有量の定量方法を説明する。
 メチルエチルケトン100mLに、色素N(0.001g)を溶かした溶液及び色素N(0.01g)を溶かした溶液を調製する。得られた各溶液に、光ラジカル重合開始剤(Irgacure OXE01、BASFジャパン社製)を加え、365nmの光を照射することによりラジカルを発生させ、全ての色素Nを発色状態にする。その後、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計(UV3100、島津製作所社製)を用いて、液温が25℃である各溶液の吸光度を測定し、検量線を作成する。
 次に、色素Nに代えて感光性層(3g)をメチルエチルケトンに溶かすこと以外は上記と同様の方法で、色素を全て発色させた溶液の吸光度を測定する。得られた感光性層を含む溶液の吸光度から、検量線に基づいて感光性層に含まれる色素Nの含有量を算出する。「感光性層(3g)」とは、感光性組成物中の全固形分3gと同義である。
The content of the dye N means the content of the dye when all the dyes N contained in the total weight of the photosensitive layer are in a colored state. Hereinafter, a method for quantifying the content of the dye N will be described using a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
A solution of dye N (0.001 g) and a solution of dye N (0.01 g) in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone are prepared. A photoradical polymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE01, manufactured by BASF Japan) is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiation with light of 365 nm, and all dyes N are brought into a colored state. After that, the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an air atmosphere to create a calibration curve.
Next, the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are developed is measured in the same manner as described above, except that instead of the dye N, the photosensitive layer (3 g) is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the photosensitive layer, the content of dye N contained in the photosensitive layer is calculated based on the calibration curve. "Photosensitive layer (3 g)" is synonymous with 3 g of total solid content in the photosensitive composition.
<熱架橋性化合物>
 感光性層は、得られる硬化膜の強度及び得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の点から、熱架橋性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 後述するエチレン性不飽和基を有する熱架橋性化合物は、重合性化合物としては扱わず、熱架橋性化合物として扱うものとする。
 熱架橋性化合物としては、例えば、メチロール化合物及びブロックイソシアネート化合物が挙げられ、得られる硬化膜の強度及び得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の点から、ブロックイソシアネート化合物が好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基と反応するため、例えば、樹脂及び/又は重合性化合物がヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基の少なくとも一方を有する場合、形成される膜の親水性が下がり、感光性層を硬化した膜を保護膜として使用する場合の機能が強化される傾向がある。
 「ブロックイソシアネート化合物」とは、イソシアネートのイソシアネート基をブロック剤で保護した構造を有する化合物を意味する。
<Thermal crosslinkable compound>
The photosensitive layer may contain a thermally crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the resulting cured film and the tackiness of the resulting uncured film.
A thermally crosslinkable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, which will be described later, is not treated as a polymerizable compound, but as a thermally crosslinkable compound.
Examples of the thermally crosslinkable compound include methylol compounds and blocked isocyanate compounds, and blocked isocyanate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the strength of the resulting cured film and the adhesiveness of the resulting uncured film.
Since the blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when the resin and/or the polymerizable compound has at least one of a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, the hydrophilicity of the formed film is lowered and the photosensitive layer When the cured film is used as a protective film, the function tends to be enhanced.
A "blocked isocyanate compound" means a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected with a blocking agent.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の解離温度としては、100~160℃が好ましく、130~150℃がより好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の解離温度の測定方法としては、例えば、示差走査熱量計(例えば、DSC6200、セイコーインスツルメンツ社製)を用いてDSC(Differential scanning calorimetry)分析にて、ブロックイソシアネート化合物の脱保護反応に伴う吸熱ピークの温度を解離度とする測定する方法が挙げられる。
The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is preferably 100 to 160°C, more preferably 130 to 150°C.
As a method for measuring the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound, for example, DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter (e.g., DSC6200, manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc.) is performed to determine the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate compound. A method of measuring the temperature of the endothermic peak as the degree of dissociation can be mentioned.
 解離温度が100~160℃であるブロック剤としては、例えば、マロン酸ジエステル等の活性メチレン化合物、及び、オキシム化合物が挙げられる。
 マロン酸ジエステルとしては、例えば、マロン酸ジメチル、マロン酸ジエチル、マロン酸ジn-ブチル、及び、マロン酸ジ2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。
 オキシム化合物としては、例えば、ホルムアルドオキシム、アセトアルドオキシム、アセトオキシム、メチルエチルケトオキシム、及び、シクロヘキサノンオキシム等の分子中に-C(=N-OH)-で表される構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。
 なかでも、解離温度が100~160℃であるブロック剤としては、保存安定性の点から、オキシム化合物が好ましい。
Examples of blocking agents having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160° C. include active methylene compounds such as malonic acid diesters, and oxime compounds.
Malonic acid diesters include, for example, dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, di-n-butyl malonate, and di-2-ethylhexyl malonate.
Examples of the oxime compound include compounds having a structure represented by -C(=N-OH)- in the molecule such as formaldoxime, acetaldoxime, acetoxime, methylethylketoxime, and cyclohexanone oxime. .
Among them, oxime compounds are preferable as blocking agents having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160° C. from the viewpoint of storage stability.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、膜の脆性改良及び被転写体との密着力向上の点から、イソシアヌレート構造を有することが好ましい。
 イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物は、例えば、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートをイソシアヌレート化して保護することにより得られる。
 なかでも、オキシム構造を有さない化合物よりも解離温度を好ましい範囲に調整しやすく、かつ、現像残渣を低減できる点から、イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物としては、オキシム化合物をブロック剤として用いたオキシム構造を有する化合物が好ましい。
The blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the film and improving the adhesion to the transferred material.
A blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure is obtained, for example, by isocyanurating hexamethylene diisocyanate and protecting it.
Among them, as a blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure, an oxime compound is used as a blocking agent because it is easier to adjust the dissociation temperature to a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure and can reduce development residue. Compounds having an oxime structure are preferred.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、重合性基を有していてもよい。
 重合性基としては、例えば、上記重合性化合物が有する重合性基と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
The blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
The polymerizable group has, for example, the same definition as the polymerizable group possessed by the polymerizable compound, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物としては、例えば、AOI-BM、MOI-BM、及び、MOI-BP等カレンズシリーズ(登録商標)(昭和電工社製);TPA-B80E、及び、WT32-B75P等ブロック型のデュラネートシリーズ(登録商標)(旭化成ケミカルズ社製)が挙げられる。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物として、下記の化合物が好ましい。
Block isocyanate compounds include, for example, AOI-BM, MOI-BM, and MOI-BP, etc. Karenz series (registered trademark) (manufactured by Showa Denko KK); series (registered trademark) (manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation).
As the blocked isocyanate compound, the following compounds are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 熱架橋性化合物は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 熱架橋性化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、1~50質量%が好ましく、5~30質量%がより好ましい。
The thermally crosslinkable compound may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
The content of the thermally crosslinkable compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
<その他添加剤>
 感光性層は、上記成分以外に、必要に応じてその他添加剤を含んでいてもよい。
 その他添加剤としては、例えば、ラジカル重合禁止剤、ベンゾトリアゾール類、カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類、増感剤、界面活性剤、可塑剤、ヘテロ環状化合物(例えば、トリアゾール等)、ピリジン類(例えば、イソニコチンアミド等)、及び、プリン塩基(例えば、アデニン等)が挙げられる。
 また、その他添加剤としては、例えば、金属酸化物粒子、連鎖移動剤、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、有機、又は、無機の沈殿防止剤、及び、特開2014-085643号公報の段落[0165]~[0184]が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 その他添加剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
<Other additives>
The photosensitive layer may contain other additives, if necessary, in addition to the above components.
Other additives include, for example, radical polymerization inhibitors, benzotriazoles, carboxybenzotriazoles, sensitizers, surfactants, plasticizers, heterocyclic compounds (e.g., triazole, etc.), pyridines (e.g., isonicotine amide, etc.), and purine bases (eg, adenine, etc.).
Other additives include, for example, metal oxide particles, chain transfer agents, antioxidants, dispersants, acid multipliers, development accelerators, conductive fibers, ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, cross-linking agents, organic , or an inorganic suspending agent, and paragraphs [0165] to [0184] of JP-A-2014-085643, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Other additives may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
(ラジカル重合禁止剤)
 ラジカル重合禁止剤(重合禁止剤)としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落[0018]に記載された熱重合防止剤が挙げられ、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、又は、4-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。
 ラジカル重合禁止剤としては、例えば、ナフチルアミン、塩化第一銅、ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミンアルミニウム塩、及び、ジフェニルニトロソアミンが挙げられ、感光性層の感度を損なわない点から、ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミンアルミニウム塩が好ましい。
 ラジカル重合禁止剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.001~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.01~3.0質量%がより好ましく、0.02~2.0質量%が更に好ましい。
 ラジカル重合禁止剤の含有量は、重合性化合物の全質量に対して、0.005~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.01~3.0質量%がより好ましく、0.01~1.0質量%が更に好ましい。
(Radical polymerization inhibitor)
Examples of radical polymerization inhibitors (polymerization inhibitors) include thermal polymerization inhibitors described in paragraph [0018] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784, and phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or 4-methoxyphenol is preferred.
Examples of the radical polymerization inhibitor include naphthylamine, cuprous chloride, nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, and diphenylnitrosamine. Nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt is preferred from the viewpoint of not impairing the sensitivity of the photosensitive layer. .
The content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.001 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, and 0.02 to 2.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 0% by mass is more preferred.
The content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound. 0% by mass is more preferred.
(ベンゾトリアゾール類)
 ベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-クロロ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、ビス(N-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、ビス(N-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-トリルトリアゾール、及び、ビス(N-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾールが挙げられる。
(Benzotriazoles)
Examples of benzotriazoles include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1-chloro-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis(N-2-ethylhexyl)aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis(N-2-ethylhexyl)aminomethylene-1,2,3-tolyltriazole and bis(N-2-hydroxyethyl)aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole.
(カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類)
 カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類は、例えば、防錆剤として機能する。
 カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール(4-カルボキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、及び、5-カルボキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール)等、N-(N,N-ジ-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、N-(N,N-ジ-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノメチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、及び、N-(N,N-ジ-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノエチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾールが挙げられる。
 カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類としては、具体的に、CBT-1(城北化学工業社製)が挙げられる。
(Carboxybenzotriazoles)
Carboxybenzotriazoles, for example, function as rust inhibitors.
Carboxybenzotriazoles include, for example, carboxybenzotriazole (4-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole and 5-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole), N-(N,N- di-2-ethylhexyl)aminomethylenecarboxybenzotriazole, N-(N,N-di-2-hydroxyethyl)aminomethylenecarboxybenzotriazole, and N-(N,N-di-2-ethylhexyl)aminoethylenecarboxy Benzotriazoles are included.
Specific examples of carboxybenzotriazoles include CBT-1 (manufactured by Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 ラジカル重合禁止剤、ベンゾトリアゾール類、及び、カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類の合計含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01~3質量%が好ましく、0.05~1質量%がより好ましい。上記含有量が0.01質量%以上である場合、感光性層の保存安定性がより優れる。一方、上記含有量が3質量%以下である場合、感度の維持及び染料の脱色を抑制がより優れる。 The total content of radical polymerization inhibitors, benzotriazoles, and carboxybenzotriazoles is preferably 0.01 to 3% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. preferable. When the content is 0.01% by mass or more, the storage stability of the photosensitive layer is more excellent. On the other hand, when the content is 3% by mass or less, the maintenance of sensitivity and suppression of decolorization of the dye are more excellent.
(増感剤)
 増感剤としては、例えば、公知の増感剤、染料及び顔料が挙げられる。
 増感剤としては、例えば、ジアルキルアミノベンゾフェノン化合物、ピラゾリン化合物、アントラセン化合物、クマリン化合物、キサントン化合物、チオキサントン化合物、アクリドン化合物、オキサゾール化合物、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、トリアゾール化合物(例えば、1,2,4-トリアゾール)、スチルベン化合物、トリアジン化合物、チオフェン化合物、ナフタルイミド化合物、トリアリールアミン化合物、及び、アミノアクリジン化合物が挙げられる。
(sensitizer)
Sensitizers include, for example, known sensitizers, dyes and pigments.
Sensitizers include, for example, dialkylaminobenzophenone compounds, pyrazoline compounds, anthracene compounds, coumarin compounds, xanthone compounds, thioxanthone compounds, acridone compounds, oxazole compounds, benzoxazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, triazole compounds (e.g., 1,2,4-triazole), stilbene compounds, triazine compounds, thiophene compounds, naphthalimide compounds, triarylamine compounds, and aminoacridine compounds.
 増感剤の含有量は、光源に対する感度の向上及び重合速度と連鎖移動のバランスによる硬化速度の向上の点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましく、0.05~1質量%がより好ましい。 The content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to light sources and improving the curing speed due to the balance between polymerization speed and chain transfer. 0.05 to 1% by mass is more preferable.
(界面活性剤)
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落[0017]、及び、特開2009-237362号公報の段落[0060]~[0071]に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられる。
(Surfactant)
Examples of surfactants include those described in paragraph [0017] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs [0060] to [0071] of JP-A-2009-237362.
 界面活性剤としては、ノニオン系界面活性剤、フッ素系界面活性剤、又は、シリコーン系界面活性剤が好ましい。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファック F-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-551-A、F-552、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-565、F-563、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP.MFS-330、EXP.MFS-578、EXP.MFS-579、EXP.MFS-586、EXP.MFS-587、EXP.MFS-628、EXP.MFS-631、EXP.MFS-603、R-41、R-41-LM、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、RS-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、及び、DS-21(以上、DIC社製);フロラード FC430、FC431、及び、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム社製);サーフロンS-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、及び、KH-40(以上、AGC社製);PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、及び、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製);フタージェント 710FL、710FM、610FM、601AD、601ADH2、602A、215M、245F、251、212M、250、209F、222F、208G、710LA、710FS、730LM、650AC、681、及び、683(以上、NEOS社製);U-120E(ユニケム株式会社)が挙げられる。
As the surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a fluorosurfactant, or a silicone surfactant is preferred.
Examples of fluorosurfactants include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144, F- 437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-551-A, F-552, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560, F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP.MFS-330, EXP. MFS-578, EXP. MFS-579, EXP. MFS-586, EXP. MFS-587, EXP. MFS-628, EXP. MFS-631, EXP. MFS-603, R-41, R-41-LM, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, RS-43, TF-1956, RS-90, R-94, and DS-21 ( Above, manufactured by DIC); Florard FC430, FC431, and FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M); Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC -381, SC-383, S-393, and KH-40 (manufactured by AGC); PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, and PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA); 610FM, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 215M, 245F, 251, 212M, 250, 209F, 222F, 208G, 710LA, 710FS, 730LM, 650AC, 681 and 683 (manufactured by NEOS); U-120E (Unichem Co., Ltd.).
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を含む官能基を持つ分子構造を有し、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含む官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好ましい。
 このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、DIC社製のメガファック DSシリーズ(化学工業日報(2016年2月22日)、及び、日経産業新聞(2016年2月23日))が挙げられる。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素化アルキル基、又は、フッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との共重合体を用いることも好ましい。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、ブロックポリマーも使用できる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する構成単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する構成単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましい。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する含フッ素重合体も挙げられ、メガファック RS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、及び、RS-72-K(以上、DIC社製)が挙げられる。
Further, as the fluorosurfactant, an acrylic compound having a molecular structure with a functional group containing a fluorine atom is also preferable, in which the portion of the functional group containing the fluorine atom is cleaved when heat is applied to volatilize the fluorine atom. .
Examples of such fluorine-based surfactants include DIC's Megafac DS series (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016) and Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)). be done.
As the fluorosurfactant, it is also preferable to use a copolymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
A block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
The fluorosurfactant has 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) structural units derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group) (preferably 5 or more). ) and a structural unit derived from an acrylate compound.
Further, examples of the fluorosurfactant include fluoropolymers having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain, such as MEGAFACE RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, and RS-72- K (manufactured by DIC Corporation).
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、環境適性向上の点から、パーフルオロオクタン酸(PFOA)及びパーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸(PFOS)等の炭素数が7以上の直鎖状パーフルオロアルキル基を有する化合物の代替材料に由来する界面活性剤が好ましい。 As fluorine-based surfactants, from the viewpoint of improving environmental suitability, compounds having linear perfluoroalkyl groups having 7 or more carbon atoms, such as perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA) and perfluorooctane sulfonic acid (PFOS), are used. Surfactants derived from alternative materials are preferred.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン、それらのエトキシレート、及び、プロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート及びグリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、並びに、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル;具体例としては、プルロニック(登録商標)L10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、及び、25R2(以上、BASF社製);テトロニック 304、701、704、901、904、及び、150R1、HYDROPALAT WE 3323(以上、BASF社製);ソルスパース 20000(以上、日本ルーブリゾール社製);NCW-101、NCW-1001、及び、NCW-1002(以上、富士フイルム和光純薬社製);パイオニン D-1105、D-6112、D-6112-W、及び、D-6315(以上、竹本油脂社製);オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、及び、440(以上、日信化学工業社製)が挙げられる。 Examples of nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, their ethoxylates and propoxylates (e.g., glycerol propoxylate and glycerol ethoxylate), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxy Ethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, and sorbitan fatty acid ester; specific examples include Pluronic (registered trademark) L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, and 25R2 (manufactured by BASF); Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, and 150R1, HYDROPALAT WE 3323 (manufactured by BASF); Solsperse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol); NCW-101, NCW-1001, and NCW-1002 (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries); Pionin D-1105, D-6112, D-6112- W and D-6315 (manufactured by Takemoto Oil & Fat Co., Ltd.); Olfine E1010, Surfynol 104, 400 and 440 (manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、シロキサン結合からなる直鎖状ポリマー、並びに、側鎖及び/又は末端に有機基を導入した変性シロキサンポリマーが挙げられる。 Examples of silicone-based surfactants include linear polymers composed of siloxane bonds, and modified siloxane polymers in which organic groups are introduced into side chains and/or terminals.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、具体的には、EXP.S-309-2、EXP.S-315、EXP.S-503-2、EXP.S-505-2(以上、DIC株式会社製);DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、及び、トーレシリコーンSH8400(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング社製);X-22-4952、X-22-4272、X-22-6266、KF-351A、K354L、KF-355A、KF-945、KF-640、KF-642、KF-643、X-22-6191、X-22-4515、KF-6004、KP-341、KF-6001、KF-6002、KP-101、KP-103、KP-104、KP-105、KP-106、KP-109、KP-112、KP-120、KP-121、KP-124、KP-125、KP-301、KP-306、KP-310、KP-322、KP-323、KP-327、KP-341、KP-368、KP-369、KP-611、KP-620、KP-621、KP-626、及びKP-652(以上、信越シリコーン社製);F-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、及び、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製);BYK300、BYK306、BYK307、BYK310、BYK320、BYK323、BYK325、BYK330、BYK313、BYK315N、BYK331、BYK333、BYK345、BYK347、BYK348、BYK349、BYK370、BYK377、BYK378、及びBYK323(以上、ビックケミー社製)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of silicone-based surfactants include EXP. S-309-2, EXP. S-315, EXP. S-503-2, EXP. S-505-2 (manufactured by DIC Corporation); DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE, Toray Silicone DC3PA, Toray Silicone SH7PA, Toray Silicone DC11PA, Toray Silicone SH21PA, Toray Silicone SH28PA, Toray Silicone SH29PA, Toray Silicone SH30PA, and Toray Silicone SH8400 (manufactured by Dow Corning Toray); X-22-4952, X-22-4272, X-22-6266, KF-351A, K354L, KF-355A, KF-945, KF-640, KF- 642, KF-643, X-22-6191, X-22-4515, KF-6004, KP-341, KF-6001, KF-6002, KP-101, KP-103, KP-104, KP-105, KP-106, KP-109, KP-112, KP-120, KP-121, KP-124, KP-125, KP-301, KP-306, KP-310, KP-322, KP-323, KP- 327, KP-341, KP-368, KP-369, KP-611, KP-620, KP-621, KP-626, and KP-652 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.); F-4440, TSF-4300 , TSF-4445, TSF-4460, and TSF-4452 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials); , BYK345, BYK347, BYK348, BYK349, BYK370, BYK377, BYK378, and BYK323 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie).
 界面活性剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01~3.0質量%が好ましく、0.01~1.0質量%がより好ましく、0.05~0.8質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, and 0.05 to 0.8% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % by mass is more preferred.
 可塑剤及びヘテロ環状化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落[0097]~[0103]、及び、段落[0111]~[0118]に記載された化合物が挙げられる。 Plasticizers and heterocyclic compounds include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs [0097] to [0103] and paragraphs [0111] to [0118] of WO2018/179640.
<不純物>
 感光性層は、不純物を含んでいてもよい。
 不純物としては、例えば、金属不純物又はそのイオン、ハロゲン化物イオン、残存有機溶剤、残存モノマー、及び、水が挙げられる。
<Impurities>
The photosensitive layer may contain impurities.
Impurities include, for example, metal impurities or their ions, halide ions, residual organic solvents, residual monomers, and water.
(金属不純物及びハロゲン化物イオン)
 金属不純物としては、例えば、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、マンガン、銅、アルミニウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、ニッケル、亜鉛、スズ、及び、これらのイオン、並びに、ハロゲン化物イオンが挙げられる。
 なかでも、ナトリウムイオン、カリウムイオン、及び、ハロゲン化物イオンは、混入し易い点から、下記の含有量にすることが好ましい。
 金属不純物は、転写フィルムに含まれ得る上記粒子(例えば、金属酸化物粒子)とは異なる化合物である。
(metallic impurities and halide ions)
Metal impurities include, for example, sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, and ions thereof and halide ions.
Among them, sodium ions, potassium ions, and halide ions are preferably contained in the following amounts because they are easily mixed.
Metal impurities are compounds different from the particles (eg, metal oxide particles) that may be included in the transfer film.
 金属不純物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、80質量ppm以下が好ましく、10質量ppm以下がより好ましく、2質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、感光性層の全質量に対して、1質量ppb以上が好ましく、0.1質量ppm以上がより好ましい。 The content of metal impurities is preferably 80 mass ppm or less, more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and even more preferably 2 mass ppm or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The lower limit is preferably 1 mass ppb or more, more preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
 不純物の含有量を調整する方法としては、例えば、感光性層の原料として不純物の含有量が少ないものを選択する方法、並びに、感光性層の形成時に不純物の混入を防ぐ方法、及び、洗浄して除去する方法が挙げられる。
 不純物の含有量は、例えば、ICP発光分光分析法、原子吸光分光法、及び、イオンクロマトグラフィー法等の公知の方法により定量できる。
Methods for adjusting the content of impurities include, for example, a method of selecting a material with a low impurity content as a raw material for the photosensitive layer, a method of preventing contamination of impurities during the formation of the photosensitive layer, and a method of washing. a method of removing by
The content of impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
(残存有機溶剤)
 残存有機溶剤としては、例えば、ベンゼン、ホルムアルデヒド、トリクロロエチレン、1,3-ブタジエン、四塩化炭素、クロロホルム、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、及び、ヘキサンが挙げられる。
 残存有機溶剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、100質量ppm以下が好ましく、20質量ppm以下がより好ましく、4質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、感光性層の全質量に対して、10質量ppb以上が好ましく、100質量ppb以上がより好ましい。
 残存有機溶剤の含有量を調整する方法としては、後述する転写フィルムの製造方法における乾燥処理条件を調整する方法が挙げられる。また、残存有機溶剤の含有量は、例えば、ガスクロマトグラフィー分析等の公知の方法により定量できる。
(residual organic solvent)
Examples of residual organic solvents include benzene, formaldehyde, trichlorethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, and hexane.
The content of the residual organic solvent is preferably 100 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 20 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 4 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The lower limit is preferably 10 mass ppb or more, more preferably 100 mass ppb or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
As a method for adjusting the content of the residual organic solvent, there is a method for adjusting the drying treatment conditions in the transfer film manufacturing method described below. Also, the content of the residual organic solvent can be quantified by a known method such as gas chromatography analysis.
(残存する単量体)
 感光性層は、上記樹脂の各構成単位の残存する単量体を含む場合がある。
 残存する単量体の含有量は、パターニング性及び信頼性の点から、樹脂の全質量に対して、5000質量ppm以下が好ましく、2000質量ppm以下がより好ましく、500質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、樹脂の全質量に対して、1質量ppm以上が好ましく、10質量ppm以上がより好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の各構成単位の残存する単量体は、パターニング性及び信頼性の点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、3000質量ppm以下が好ましく、600質量ppm以下がより好ましく、100質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.1質量ppm以上が好ましく、1質量ppm以上がより好ましい。
(remaining monomer)
The photosensitive layer may contain residual monomers of the constituent units of the resin.
The content of the remaining monomer is preferably 5000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 2000 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 500 ppm by mass or less relative to the total mass of the resin, from the viewpoint of patterning properties and reliability. The lower limit is preferably 1 mass ppm or more, more preferably 10 mass ppm or more, relative to the total mass of the resin.
From the viewpoint of patterning properties and reliability, the residual monomer of each structural unit of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 3000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 600 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 100 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Mass ppm or less is more preferable. The lower limit is preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, more preferably 1 mass ppm or more, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
 高分子反応でアルカリ可溶性樹脂を合成する際の単量体の残存量も、上記範囲とすることが好ましい。例えば、カルボン酸側鎖にアクリル酸グリシジルを反応させてアルカリ可溶性樹脂を合成する場合、アクリル酸グリシジルの含有量を上記範囲にすることが好ましい。
 残存する単量体の含有量を調整する方法としては、例えば、上記不純物の含有量を調整する方法が挙げられる。
 残存する単量体の量は、液体クロマトグラフィー及びガスクロマトグラフィー等の公知の方法で測定できる。
It is preferable that the residual amount of the monomer when synthesizing the alkali-soluble resin by polymer reaction is also within the above range. For example, when synthesizing an alkali-soluble resin by reacting a carboxylic acid side chain with glycidyl acrylate, the content of glycidyl acrylate is preferably within the above range.
Examples of the method for adjusting the content of the remaining monomers include a method for adjusting the content of the impurities.
The amount of residual monomers can be measured by known methods such as liquid chromatography and gas chromatography.
 感光性層における水の含有量は、信頼性及びラミネート性を向上させる点から、0.01~1.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~0.5質量%がより好ましい。 The water content in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and lamination properties.
 測定Xで求められる長さXを好適な範囲内に調整する点から、感光性層は、下記要件1~4から選択される少なくとも1つ以上(例えば1~4つ)の要件を満たすことが好ましい。
・要件1:感光性層が、重量平均分子量が30,000以下であり、かつ、重合性基を有する樹脂を含む。
・要件2:感光性層が、重量平均分子量が30,000以下の樹脂を含み、かつ、clogPが5.0以上(好ましくは5.5超)の重合性化合物を含む。
・要件3:感光性層が、重量平均分子量が30,000以下の樹脂を含み、かつ、粘度が300~5000mPa・sの重合性化合物を含む。
・要件4:感光性層が、重量平均分子量が30,000以下の樹脂を含み、かつ、3官能以上の重合性化合物を含む。
 要件1においては、重量平均分子量が30,000以下である樹脂を含むことで感光性層における反応率が向上し、更に、上記樹脂が架橋性基を有していることで、密な架橋構造を構築でき、露光後の感光性層に対する現像液の染み込みが抑制されると考えられている。
 要件2においては、重量平均分子量が30,000以下である樹脂を含むことで感光性層における反応率が向上し、更に、clogPが所定値以上で疎水的な重合性化合物を含むことで感光性層が疎水的になり、露光後の感光性層に対する現像液の染み込みが抑制されると考えられている。
 要件3においては、重量平均分子量が30,000以下である樹脂を含むことで感光性層における反応率が向上し、更に、粘度が所定値以上の重合性化合物を含むことで感光性層が吸湿しにくくなり、露光後の感光性層に対する現像液の染み込みが抑制されると考えられている。
 要件4においては、重量平均分子量が30,000以下である樹脂を含むことで感光性層における反応率が向上し、更に、3官能以上の重合性化合物を含むことで密な架橋構造を形成できるようになり、露光後の感光性層に対する現像液の染み込みが抑制されると考えられている。
From the point of adjusting the length X obtained by the measurement X within a suitable range, the photosensitive layer satisfies at least one or more (eg, 1 to 4) requirements selected from the following requirements 1 to 4. preferable.
• Requirement 1: The photosensitive layer has a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less and contains a resin having a polymerizable group.
Requirement 2: The photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less and a polymerizable compound having a clogP of 5.0 or more (preferably more than 5.5).
Requirement 3: The photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less and a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of 300 to 5000 mPa·s.
• Requirement 4: The photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and contains a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
In requirement 1, the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and the resin has a crosslinkable group, thereby forming a dense crosslinked structure. can be constructed, and penetration of the developer into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
In requirement 2, the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and clogP is a predetermined value or more and contains a hydrophobic polymerizable compound to improve the photosensitive It is believed that the layer becomes hydrophobic and the penetration of the developer into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
In requirement 3, the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and the photosensitive layer absorbs moisture by containing a polymerizable compound having a viscosity of a predetermined value or more. It is thought that the penetration of the developing solution into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
In requirement 4, the reaction rate in the photosensitive layer is improved by containing a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or less, and a dense crosslinked structure can be formed by containing a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound. It is thought that the penetration of the developing solution into the photosensitive layer after exposure is suppressed.
〔感光性層の特性〕
 感光性層の厚み(膜厚)としては、0.1μm以上の場合が多く、0.2μm以上が好ましく、0.5μm以上がより好ましく、1.0以上μmが特に好ましい。上記膜厚の上限は、300μm以下の場合が多く、100μm以下が好ましく、50μm以下がより好ましく、20μm以下が更に好ましく、5μm以下が特に好ましい。感光性層の膜厚を上記範囲内とすることで、感光性層の現像性が向上し、解像性を向上できる。
[Characteristics of photosensitive layer]
The thickness (film thickness) of the photosensitive layer is often 0.1 μm or more, preferably 0.2 μm or more, more preferably 0.5 μm or more, and particularly preferably 1.0 μm or more. The upper limit of the film thickness is often 300 μm or less, preferably 100 μm or less, more preferably 50 μm or less, even more preferably 20 μm or less, and particularly preferably 5 μm or less. By setting the film thickness of the photosensitive layer within the above range, the developability of the photosensitive layer can be improved, and the resolution can be improved.
 感光性層が有する重合性基の含有量は、1.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、2.0mmol/g以上がより好ましく、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、3.0mmol/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、10.0mmol/g以下が好ましい。また、上記重合性の含有量を二重結合の含有量に置き換えて解釈してもよい。 The content of the polymerizable group in the photosensitive layer is preferably 1.0 mmol/g or more, more preferably 2.0 mmol/g or more, and further preferably 3.0 mmol/g or more from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. preferable. The upper limit is preferably 10.0 mmol/g or less. Moreover, you may interpret by replacing the said polymerizable content with content of a double bond.
 感光性層の酸価は、10~150mgKOH/gが好ましく、40~100mgKOH/gがより好ましく、50~100mgKOH/gが更に好ましく、50~90mgKOH/gが特に好ましく、60~80mgKOH/gが最も好ましい。
 上記酸価の測定方法としては、例えば、上記樹脂における酸価の測定方法及び酸価が既知の樹脂の含有量から算出する方法が挙げられる。
The acid value of the photosensitive layer is preferably 10 to 150 mgKOH/g, more preferably 40 to 100 mgKOH/g, still more preferably 50 to 100 mgKOH/g, particularly preferably 50 to 90 mgKOH/g, most preferably 60 to 80 mgKOH/g. preferable.
Examples of the method for measuring the acid value include a method for measuring the acid value in the resin and a method for calculating the acid value from the content of a resin whose acid value is known.
〔中間層〕
 転写フィルムは、仮支持体と感光性層との間に中間層を有していてもよい。
 例えば、中間層は、仮支持体と感光性層との間に配置されることが好ましい。
 中間層としては、例えば、水溶性樹脂層、及び、特開平5-072724号公報に「分離層」として記載される酸素遮断機能のある酸素遮断層が挙げられる。
 中間層としては、露光時の感度が向上して露光機の時間負荷が低減して生産性が向上する点から、酸素遮断層も好ましい。酸素遮断層は、低い酸素透過性を示し、水又はアルカリ水溶液(22℃の炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液)に分散又は溶解する酸素遮断層がより好ましい。
 以下、中間層が含み得る各成分について説明する。
[Intermediate layer]
The transfer film may have an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer.
For example, the intermediate layer is preferably arranged between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer.
Examples of the intermediate layer include a water-soluble resin layer and an oxygen blocking layer having an oxygen blocking function described as a "separation layer" in JP-A-5-072724.
As the intermediate layer, an oxygen-blocking layer is also preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of exposure is improved, the time load of the exposure machine is reduced, and the productivity is improved. More preferably, the oxygen barrier layer exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an alkaline aqueous solution (1% by weight aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22°C).
Each component that the intermediate layer may contain will be described below.
<水溶性樹脂>
 中間層は、水溶性樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂としては、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリビニルピロリドン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、ポリエーテル系樹脂、ゼラチン、及び、ポリアミド樹脂が挙げられる。
<Water-soluble resin>
The intermediate layer may contain a water-soluble resin.
Examples of water-soluble resins include polyvinyl alcohol-based resins, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based resins, cellulose-based resins, polyether-based resins, gelatin, and polyamide resins.
 セルロース系樹脂としては、例えば、水溶性セルロース誘導体が挙げられる。
 水溶性セルロース誘導体としては、例えば、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロース、メチルセルロース、及び、エチルセルロースが挙げられる。
Cellulose-based resins include, for example, water-soluble cellulose derivatives.
Water-soluble cellulose derivatives include, for example, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, and ethylcellulose.
 ポリエーテル系樹脂としては、例えば、ポリエチレングリコール、ポリプロピレングリコール、及び、これらのアルキレンオキシサイド付加物、並びに、ビニルエーテル系樹脂が挙げられる。
 ポリアミド樹脂としては、例えば、アクリルアミド系樹脂、ビニルアミド系樹脂、及び、アリルアミド系樹脂が挙げられる。
Polyether-based resins include, for example, polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, their alkylene oxide side adducts, and vinyl ether-based resins.
Polyamide resins include, for example, acrylamide-based resins, vinylamide-based resins, and allylamide-based resins.
 水溶性樹脂としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸/ビニル化合物の共重合体も挙げられ、(メタ)アクリル酸と(メタ)アクリル酸アリルとの共重合体が好ましく、メタクリル酸とメタクリル酸アリルと共重合体がより好ましい。
 水溶性樹脂が(メタ)アクリル酸とビニル化合物との共重合体である場合、各組成比((メタ)アクリル酸のmol%/ビニル化合物のmol%)としては、90/10~20/80が好ましく、80/20~30/70がより好ましい。
Examples of water-soluble resins include copolymers of (meth)acrylic acid/vinyl compounds, preferably copolymers of (meth)acrylic acid and allyl (meth)acrylate, and methacrylic acid and allyl methacrylate. and copolymers are more preferred.
When the water-soluble resin is a copolymer of (meth)acrylic acid and a vinyl compound, each composition ratio (mol% of (meth)acrylic acid/mol% of vinyl compound) is 90/10 to 20/80. is preferred, and 80/20 to 30/70 is more preferred.
 水溶性樹脂の重量平均分子量としては、5,000以上が好ましく、7,000以上がより好ましく、10,000以上が更に好ましい。上限は、200,000以下が好ましく、100,000以下がより好ましく、50,000以下が更に好ましい。
 水溶性樹脂の分散度は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight of the water-soluble resin is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 7,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 200,000 or less, more preferably 100,000 or less, even more preferably 50,000 or less.
The dispersity of the water-soluble resin is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3.
 水溶性樹脂は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂の含有量は、中間層の全質量に対して、50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、中間層の全質量に対して、100質量%以下が好ましく、99.99質量%以下がより好ましく、99.9質量%以下が更に好ましい。
One type of water-soluble resin may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
The content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer. The upper limit is preferably 100% by mass or less, more preferably 99.99% by mass or less, and even more preferably 99.9% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer.
<その他成分>
 中間層は、上記樹脂以外に、その他成分を含んでいてもよい。
<Other ingredients>
The intermediate layer may contain other components in addition to the above resins.
 その他成分としては、多価アルコール類、多価アルコール類のアルキレンオキサイド付加物、フェノール誘導体、又は、アミド化合物が好ましく、多価アルコール類、フェノール誘導体、又は、アミド化合物がより好ましい。 As other components, polyhydric alcohols, alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols, phenol derivatives, or amide compounds are preferable, and polyhydric alcohols, phenol derivatives, or amide compounds are more preferable.
 多価アルコール類としては、例えば、グリセリン、ジグリセリン、及び、ジエチレングリコールが挙げられる。
 多価アルコール類が有するヒドロキシ基の数としては、2~10が好ましい。
 多価アルコール類のアルキレンオキサイド付加物としては、例えば、上記多価アルコール類にエチレンオキシ基、及び、プロピレンオキシ基等を付加した化合物が挙げられる。
 アルキレンオキシ基の平均付加数は、1~100が好ましく、2~50が好ましく、2~20がより好ましい。
 フェノール誘導体としては、例えば、ビスフェノールA、及び、ビスフェノールSが挙げられる。
 アミド化合物としては、例えば、N-メチルピロリドンが挙げられる。
Polyhydric alcohols include, for example, glycerin, diglycerin, and diethylene glycol.
The number of hydroxy groups possessed by the polyhydric alcohol is preferably 2-10.
Examples of alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols include compounds obtained by adding ethyleneoxy groups, propyleneoxy groups, and the like to the above polyhydric alcohols.
The average number of alkyleneoxy groups to be added is preferably 1-100, preferably 2-50, more preferably 2-20.
Examples of phenol derivatives include bisphenol A and bisphenol S.
Amide compounds include, for example, N-methylpyrrolidone.
 中間層は、水溶性セルロース誘導体、多価アルコール類、多価アルコール類のアルキレンオキサイド付加物、ポリエーテル系樹脂、フェノール誘導体、及び、アミド化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを含むことが好ましい。 The intermediate layer may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of water-soluble cellulose derivatives, polyhydric alcohols, alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols, polyether resins, phenol derivatives, and amide compounds. preferable.
 その他成分の分子量は、5,000未満が好ましく、4,000以下がより好ましく、3,000以下が更に好ましく、2,000以下が特に好ましく、1,500以下が最も好ましい。下限は、60以上が好ましい。 The molecular weight of other components is preferably less than 5,000, more preferably 4,000 or less, even more preferably 3,000 or less, particularly preferably 2,000 or less, and most preferably 1,500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 60 or more.
 その他成分は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 その他成分の含有量は、中間層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、30質量%未満が好ましく、10質量%以下がより好ましく、5質量%以下が更に好ましい。
Other components may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
The content of other components is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer. The upper limit is preferably less than 30% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass or less, and even more preferably 5% by mass or less.
<不純物>
 中間層は、不純物を含んでいてもよい。
 不純物としては、例えば、上記感光性層に含まれる不純物が挙げられる。
<Impurities>
The intermediate layer may contain impurities.
Impurities include, for example, impurities contained in the photosensitive layer.
 中間層の厚みとしては、3.0μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましい。下限は、0.3μm以上が好ましく、1.0μm以上がより好ましい。 The thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 3.0 µm or less, more preferably 2.0 µm or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.3 μm or more, more preferably 1.0 μm or more.
〔その他部材〕
 転写フィルムは、上記部材以外に、その他部材を有していてもよい。
 その他部材としては、例えば、保護フィルムが挙げられる。
[Other parts]
The transfer film may have other members in addition to the above members.
Other members include, for example, a protective film.
 保護フィルムとしては、例えば、耐熱性及び耐溶剤性を有する樹脂フィルムが挙げられる。具体的には、ポリプロピレンフィルム及びポリエチレンフィルム等のポリオレフィンフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム等のポリエステルフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム、並びに、ポリスチレンフィルムが挙げられる。また、保護フィルムとしては、上記仮支持体と同じ材料で構成された樹脂フィルムを用いてもよい。
 なかでも、保護フィルムとしては、ポリオレフィンフィルムが好ましく、ポリプロピレンフィルム、又は、ポリエチレンフィルムがより好ましい。
Protective films include, for example, resin films having heat resistance and solvent resistance. Specific examples include polyolefin films such as polypropylene films and polyethylene films, polyester films such as polyethylene terephthalate films, polycarbonate films, and polystyrene films. As the protective film, a resin film made of the same material as the temporary support may be used.
Especially, as a protective film, a polyolefin film is preferable, and a polypropylene film or a polyethylene film is more preferable.
 保護フィルムの厚みとしては、1~100μmが好ましく、5~50μmがより好ましく、5~40μmが更に好ましく、15~30μmが特に好ましい。
 保護フィルムの厚みは、機械的強度に優れる点から、1μm以上が好ましく、比較的安価である点から、100μm以下が好ましい。
The thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 5 to 50 μm, even more preferably 5 to 40 μm, particularly preferably 15 to 30 μm.
The thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 μm or more from the viewpoint of excellent mechanical strength, and preferably 100 μm or less from the viewpoint of being relatively inexpensive.
 保護フィルムに含まれる直径80μm以上のフィッシュアイ数としては、5個/m以下が好ましい。下限は、0個/m以上が好ましい。
 「フィッシュアイ」とは、材料を熱溶融し、混練、押し出し、2軸延伸及びキャスティング法等の方法によりフィルムを製造する際に、材料の異物、未溶解物及び酸化劣化物等がフィルム中に取り込まれたものを意味する。
The number of fisheyes with a diameter of 80 μm or more contained in the protective film is preferably 5/m 2 or less. The lower limit is preferably 0/m 2 or more.
"Fish eye" means that when a film is produced by methods such as heat melting, kneading, extrusion, biaxial stretching, casting, etc., foreign substances, undissolved substances, and oxidation-degraded substances of the material are found in the film. It means what is taken.
 保護フィルムに含まれる直径3μm以上の粒子の数は、30個/mm以下が好ましく、10個/mm以下がより好ましく、5個/mm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、0個/mm以上が好ましい。上記範囲である場合、保護フィルムに含まれる粒子に起因する凹凸が感光性層又は導電層に転写されることにより生じる欠陥を抑制できる。 The number of particles having a diameter of 3 μm or more contained in the protective film is preferably 30 particles/mm 2 or less, more preferably 10 particles/mm 2 or less, and even more preferably 5 particles/mm 2 or less. The lower limit is preferably 0/mm 2 or more. When it is within the above range, it is possible to suppress defects caused by transferring irregularities caused by particles contained in the protective film to the photosensitive layer or the conductive layer.
 巻き取り性を付与する点から、保護フィルムの感光性層と接する面とは反対側の表面又は接する面の算術平均粗さRaは、0.01μm以上が好ましく、0.02μm以上がより好ましく、0.03μm以上が更に好ましい。上限は、0.50μm未満が好ましく、0.40μm以下がより好ましく、0.30μm以下が更に好ましい。 From the viewpoint of imparting winding properties, the surface of the protective film opposite to the surface in contact with the photosensitive layer or the surface in contact thereof preferably has an arithmetic mean roughness Ra of 0.01 μm or more, more preferably 0.02 μm or more. 0.03 μm or more is more preferable. The upper limit is preferably less than 0.50 μm, more preferably 0.40 μm or less, even more preferably 0.30 μm or less.
[転写フィルムの製造方法]
 転写フィルムの製造方法としては、例えば、公知の方法が挙げられる。
 転写フィルム10の製造方法としては、例えば、仮支持体11の表面に中間層形成用組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥して中間層13を形成する工程と、中間層13の表面に感光性組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥して感光性層15を形成する工程と、を含む方法が挙げられる。
 転写フィルムを製造方法としては、仮支持体の表面に感光性組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥して感光性層を形成する工程と、を含む方法も挙げられる。この場合、転写フィルムは、中間層13を有さない。
[Manufacturing method of transfer film]
Examples of the method for producing the transfer film include known methods.
A method for producing the transfer film 10 includes, for example, a step of applying an intermediate layer forming composition to the surface of the temporary support 11 to form a coating film, and drying the coating film to form the intermediate layer 13. a) coating a photosensitive composition on the surface of the intermediate layer 13 to form a coating film, and drying the coating film to form the photosensitive layer 15;
As a method for producing a transfer film, a method including a step of applying a photosensitive composition to the surface of a temporary support to form a coating film, and further drying this coating film to form a photosensitive layer. be done. In this case the transfer film does not have an intermediate layer 13 .
 上記製造方法により製造された積層体の感光性層15上に、保護フィルム19を圧着させることにより、転写フィルム10が製造される。
 転写フィルムの製造方法としては、感光性層15の仮支持体11側とは反対側の面に接するように保護フィルム19を設ける工程を含むことにより、仮支持体11、中間層13、感光性層15、及び、保護フィルム19を備える転写フィルム10を製造することが好ましい。
 また、転写フィルムの製造方法としては、感光性層15の仮支持体11側とは反対側の面に接するように保護フィルム19を設ける工程を含むことにより、仮支持体11、中間層13、感光性層15、及び、保護フィルム19を備える転写フィルム10を製造することも好ましい。
 上記製造方法により製造された転写フィルム10を巻き取ることにより、ロール形態の転写フィルムを作製及び保管してもよい。ロール形態の転写フィルムは、後述するロールツーロール方式での基板(金属層付き基板)との貼合工程にそのままの形態で提供できる。
The transfer film 10 is manufactured by pressure-bonding the protective film 19 onto the photosensitive layer 15 of the laminate manufactured by the manufacturing method described above.
The transfer film manufacturing method includes a step of providing a protective film 19 so as to be in contact with the surface of the photosensitive layer 15 opposite to the temporary support 11 side, so that the temporary support 11, the intermediate layer 13, the photosensitive It is preferred to manufacture transfer film 10 with layer 15 and protective film 19 .
In addition, as a method for producing the transfer film, by including a step of providing a protective film 19 so as to be in contact with the surface of the photosensitive layer 15 opposite to the temporary support 11 side, the temporary support 11, the intermediate layer 13, It is also preferred to manufacture the transfer film 10 with a photosensitive layer 15 and a protective film 19 .
A roll-shaped transfer film may be produced and stored by winding the transfer film 10 produced by the above production method. The transfer film in roll form can be provided as it is in the step of bonding with a substrate (substrate with a metal layer) in a roll-to-roll method, which will be described later.
〔感光性組成物及び感光性層の形成方法〕
 感光性層の形成方法としては、感光性層に含まれる成分(例えば、樹脂、重合性化合物、重合開始剤等)、及び、溶剤を含む感光性組成物を用いて塗布する塗布方法が好ましい。
 感光性層の形成方法としては、例えば、中間層上に感光性組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、必要に応じて、この塗膜に所定温度にて乾燥処理を施して感光性層を形成する方法が好ましい。残存溶剤量は、塗膜の乾燥処理によって調整される。
[Photosensitive composition and method for forming photosensitive layer]
As a method for forming the photosensitive layer, a coating method in which a photosensitive composition containing components contained in the photosensitive layer (for example, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, etc.) and a solvent is used is preferred.
As a method for forming the photosensitive layer, for example, a photosensitive composition is applied on the intermediate layer to form a coating film, and if necessary, the coating film is dried at a predetermined temperature to form a photosensitive layer. is preferred. The amount of residual solvent is adjusted by the drying treatment of the coating film.
 感光性組成物としては、感光性層に含まれる成分と溶剤とを含むことが好ましい。感光性層に含まれる各成分の含有量は、上述したとおりである。
 溶剤としては、溶剤以外の感光性層に含まれる成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されない。
 溶剤としては、例えば、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤、アルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤、アルコール溶剤(例えば、メタノール及びエタノール等)、ケトン溶剤(例えば、アセトン及びメチルエチルケトン等)、芳香族炭化水素溶剤(例えば、トルエン等)、非プロトン性極性溶剤(例えば、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド等)、環状エーテル溶剤(例えば、テトラヒドロフラン等)、エステル溶剤(例えば、酢酸nプロピル等)、アミド溶剤、ラクトン溶剤、並びに、これらの組み合わせた混合溶剤が挙げられる。
The photosensitive composition preferably contains components contained in the photosensitive layer and a solvent. The content of each component contained in the photosensitive layer is as described above.
The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse components other than the solvent contained in the photosensitive layer.
Examples of solvents include alkylene glycol ether solvents, alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents, alcohol solvents (e.g., methanol and ethanol), ketone solvents (e.g., acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.), aromatic hydrocarbon solvents (e.g., toluene, etc.). , aprotic polar solvents (e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide, etc.), cyclic ether solvents (e.g., tetrahydrofuran, etc.), ester solvents (e.g., n-propyl acetate, etc.), amide solvents, lactone solvents, and combinations thereof and mixed solvents.
 溶剤は、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを含むことが好ましい。
 なかでも、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つと、ケトン溶剤及び環状エーテル溶剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つとを含む混合溶剤がより好ましく、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つ、ケトン溶剤、並びに、環状エーテル溶剤の3種を含む混合溶剤が更に好ましい。
The solvent preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of alkylene glycol ether solvents and alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents.
Among them, a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of alkylene glycol ether solvents and alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents and at least one selected from the group consisting of ketone solvents and cyclic ether solvents is more preferable. A mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, a ketone solvent, and a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable.
 アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤としては、例えば、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル(例えば、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート等)、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、及び、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテルが挙げられる。
 アルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤としては、例えば、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、及び、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテートが挙げられる。
 溶剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落[0092]~[0094]に記載された溶剤、及び、特開2018-177889号公報の段落[0014]に記載された溶剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Alkylene glycol ether solvents include, for example, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, ethylene glycol dialkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether (eg, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate), propylene glycol dialkyl ether, diethylene glycol dialkyl ether, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl. ethers and dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers.
Alkylene glycol ether acetate solvents include, for example, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, and dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate.
Examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs [0092] to [0094] of International Publication No. 2018/179640, and the solvents described in paragraph [0014] of JP-A-2018-177889. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 溶剤の含有量は、感光性組成物の全固形分100質量部に対して、50~1900質量部が好ましく、100~1200質量部がより好ましく、100~900質量部が更に好ましい。
A solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in 2 or more types.
The content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 1,200 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive composition.
 感光性組成物の塗布方法としては、例えば、公知の塗布方法が挙げられる。
 具体的には、印刷法、スプレー法、ロールコート法、バーコート法、カーテンコート法、スピンコート法、及び、ダイコート法(スリットコート法)が挙げられる。
Examples of the coating method of the photosensitive composition include known coating methods.
Specific examples include a printing method, a spray method, a roll coating method, a bar coating method, a curtain coating method, a spin coating method, and a die coating method (slit coating method).
 感光性組成物の塗膜の乾燥方法としては、加熱乾燥又は減圧乾燥が好ましい。
 乾燥温度としては、90℃以上が好ましく、100℃以上がより好ましく、110℃以上が更に好ましい。上限は、130℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましい。
 また、乾燥方法としては、乾燥温度を連続的に変化させる方法であってもよい。
 乾燥時間としては、20秒以上が好ましく、40秒以上がより好ましく、60秒以上が更に好ましい。上限は、600秒以下が好ましく、450秒以下がより好ましく、300秒以下が更に好ましい。
Heat drying or reduced pressure drying is preferable as a method for drying the coating film of the photosensitive composition.
The drying temperature is preferably 90° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher, and even more preferably 110° C. or higher. The upper limit is preferably 130°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower.
Moreover, as a drying method, a method of continuously changing the drying temperature may be used.
The drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer. The upper limit is preferably 600 seconds or less, more preferably 450 seconds or less, and even more preferably 300 seconds or less.
 更に、保護フィルムを感光性層に貼り合わせて転写フィルムを製造してもよい。
 保護フィルムを感光性層に貼り合わせる方法としては、例えば、公知の方法が挙げられる。保護フィルムを感光性層に貼り合わせる装置としては、例えば、真空ラミネーター及びオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターが挙げられる。
 ラミネーターとしては、ゴムローラー等の任意の加熱可能なローラーを備え、加圧及び加熱ができるものが好ましい。
Furthermore, a transfer film may be produced by laminating a protective film to the photosensitive layer.
Examples of methods for bonding the protective film to the photosensitive layer include known methods. Apparatuses for bonding the protective film to the photosensitive layer include, for example, known laminators such as a vacuum laminator and an autocut laminator.
As the laminator, it is preferable to have a heatable roller such as a rubber roller and to apply pressure and heat.
〔中間層形成用組成物及び中間層の形成方法〕
 中間層の形成方法としては、中間層に含まれる成分(例えば、水溶性樹脂等)及び溶剤を含む中間層形成用組成物を用いて塗布する塗布方法が好ましい。
 中間層の形成方法としては、例えば、仮支持体上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、必要に応じて、この塗膜に所定温度にて乾燥処理を施して中間層を形成する方法が好ましい。残存溶剤量は、塗膜の乾燥処理によって調整される。
[Composition for Intermediate Layer Formation and Method for Forming Intermediate Layer]
As a method for forming the intermediate layer, a coating method in which a composition for forming an intermediate layer containing components contained in the intermediate layer (for example, a water-soluble resin, etc.) and a solvent is used for coating is preferable.
As a method for forming the intermediate layer, for example, the composition for forming an intermediate layer is applied onto a temporary support to form a coating film, and if necessary, the coating film is dried at a predetermined temperature to form an intermediate layer. A method of forming layers is preferred. The amount of residual solvent is adjusted by the drying treatment of the coating film.
 中間層形成用組成物としては、中間層に含まれる成分と溶剤とを含むことが好ましい。
 中間層に含まれる成分の含有量は、上述したとおりである。
 溶剤としては、中間層に含まれる成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されない。
 溶剤としては、水及び水混和性の有機溶剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つが好ましく、水又は水と水混和性の有機溶剤との混合溶剤がより好ましい。
 水混和性の有機溶剤としては、例えば、炭素数1~3のアルコール、アセトン、エチレングリコール、グリセリン、及び、これらの組み合わせた混合溶剤が挙げられ、炭素数1~3のアルコールが好ましく、メタノール又はエタノールがより好ましい。
It is preferable that the composition for forming the intermediate layer contains the components contained in the intermediate layer and the solvent.
The contents of the components contained in the intermediate layer are as described above.
The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse the components contained in the intermediate layer.
The solvent is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of water and water-miscible organic solvents, more preferably water or a mixed solvent of water and water-miscible organic solvents.
Examples of water-miscible organic solvents include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, glycerin, and mixed solvents thereof, preferably alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, methanol or Ethanol is more preferred.
 溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上で用いてもよい。
 溶剤の含有量は、中間層形成用組成物の全固形分100質量部に対して、50~2500質量部が好ましく、50~1900質量部がより好ましく、100~900質量部が更に好ましい。
A solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in 2 or more types.
The content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the intermediate layer-forming composition.
 中間層の形成方法としては、例えば、公知の塗布方法が挙げられる。
 具体的には、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、及び、インクジェット塗布が挙げられる。
Examples of methods for forming the intermediate layer include known coating methods.
Specific examples include slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
 中間層形成用組成物の塗膜の乾燥方法としては、加熱乾燥又は減圧乾燥が好ましい。
 乾燥温度としては、90℃以上が好ましく、100℃以上がより好ましく、110℃以上が更に好ましい。上限は、130℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましい。
 また、乾燥方法としては、乾燥温度を連続的に変化させる方法であってもよい。
 乾燥時間としては、20秒以上が好ましく、40秒以上がより好ましく、60秒以上が更に好ましい。上限は、600秒以下が好ましく、450秒以下がより好ましく、300秒以下が更に好ましい。
Heat drying or reduced pressure drying is preferable as a method for drying the coating film of the intermediate layer forming composition.
The drying temperature is preferably 90° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher, and even more preferably 110° C. or higher. The upper limit is preferably 130°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower.
Moreover, as a drying method, a method of continuously changing the drying temperature may be used.
The drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer. The upper limit is preferably 600 seconds or less, more preferably 450 seconds or less, and even more preferably 300 seconds or less.
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更できる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。
 なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」及び、「%」は質量基準である。
 また、以下の実施例において、樹脂の重量平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)によるポリスチレン換算で求めた重量平均分子量である。また、酸価は、理論酸価を用いた。
The present invention will be described in more detail based on examples below. The materials, amounts used, proportions, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed to be limited by the examples shown below.
"Parts" and "%" are based on mass unless otherwise specified.
Further, in the following examples, the weight average molecular weight of the resin is the weight average molecular weight determined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) in terms of polystyrene. Moreover, the theoretical acid value was used for the acid value.
[転写フィルムの作製に使用した材料]
 実施例で使用した転写フィルムの作製に使用した材料(感光性組成物、及び、中間層形成用組成物)について説明する。
[Materials used to make the transfer film]
The materials (the photosensitive composition and the composition for forming the intermediate layer) used in the preparation of the transfer film used in the examples will be described.
〔感光性組成物の成分〕
 転写フィルムが有する感光性層は、感光性組成物を使用して形成した。
 感光性組成物の調製に使用した成分は以下の通りであり、以下に示す各成分を、後段に示す表の通りの配合で混合し、実施例又は比較例で使用する各感光性組成物を得た。
[Components of the photosensitive composition]
The photosensitive layer of the transfer film was formed using a photosensitive composition.
The components used for the preparation of the photosensitive composition are as follows, and each component shown below was mixed according to the formulation shown in the table shown later, and each photosensitive composition used in Examples or Comparative Examples was prepared. Obtained.
<樹脂>
・化合物1~4:それぞれ、以下に示す通りの特徴の樹脂(化合物)
 なお、化合物1~4は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂に該当する。
<Resin>
- Compounds 1 to 4: resins (compounds) each having the following characteristics
Compounds 1 to 4 correspond to alkali-soluble resins.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000005
 上記表中、「組成」欄には、各樹脂(化合物)について、樹脂が有する構成単位の種類を示し、カッコ内に各構成単位の含有量の質量比を示している。
 各構成単位の種類としては、各構成単位の由来となるモノマーの名称を示している。
 例えば、化合物1は、スチレンに基づく構成単位と、メタクリル酸メチルに基づく構成単位と、メタクリル酸に基づく構成単位と、を、それぞれ、52:19:29の質量比で有する樹脂である。
 なお、「メタクリル酸-メタクリル酸グリシジル」として表記される構成単位は、メタクリル酸に基づく構成単位のカルボキシ基に、メタクリル酸グリシジルを反応させてなる構成単位を意味する。
 また、「メタクリル酸」として表記される構成単位は、「メタクリル酸-メタクリル酸グリシジル」として表記される構成単位には該当しない構成単位である。
In the above table, the "composition" column shows the types of structural units possessed by each resin (compound), and the mass ratio of the content of each structural unit is shown in parentheses.
As the type of each structural unit, the name of the monomer from which each structural unit is derived is shown.
For example, compound 1 is a resin having structural units based on styrene, structural units based on methyl methacrylate, and structural units based on methacrylic acid in a mass ratio of 52:19:29, respectively.
The structural unit represented as "methacrylic acid-glycidyl methacrylate" means a structural unit obtained by reacting a carboxy group of a structural unit based on methacrylic acid with glycidyl methacrylate.
Further, the structural unit described as "methacrylic acid" is a structural unit that does not correspond to the structural unit described as "methacrylic acid-glycidyl methacrylate".
<重合性化合物>
・SR454:エトキシ化(3)トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート、巴工業社製
・BPE-500:エトキシ化ビスフェノールAジメタクリレート、新中村化学工業社製
・BPE-100エトキシ化ビスフェノールAジメタクリレート、新中村化学工業社製
・M-270:アロニックスM-270、ポリプロピレングリコールジアクリレート(n≒12)、東亞合成社製
・4G:NKエステル4G、ポリエチレングリコール#200ジメタクリレート、新中村化学工業社製
<Polymerizable compound>
・SR454: Ethoxylated (3) trimethylolpropane triacrylate, manufactured by Tomoe Kogyo Co., Ltd. ・BPE-500: Ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. ・BPE-100 ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Kogyo Co., Ltd. M-270: Aronix M-270, polypropylene glycol diacrylate (n ≈ 12), Toagosei Co., Ltd. 4G: NK Ester 4G, polyethylene glycol # 200 dimethacrylate, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
<光重合開始剤>
・2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体
<Photoinitiator>
2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer
<増感剤>
・4,4′-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン
<Sensitizer>
・4,4′-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone
<重合禁止剤>
・フェノチアジン
<Polymerization inhibitor>
・Phenothiazine
<酸化防止剤>
・フェニドン
<Antioxidant>
・Phenidone
<発色剤>
・ダイヤモンドグリーン:東京化成工業社製
・ロイコクリスタルバイオレット:東京化成工業製
<Color former>
・Diamond Green: manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. ・Leuco Crystal Violet: manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
<防錆剤>
・CBT-1:カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、城北化学社製
<Antirust agent>
・CBT-1: Carboxybenzotriazole, manufactured by Johoku Chemical Co., Ltd.
<界面活性剤>
・F552:メガファックF-552、DIC社製
<Surfactant>
・F552: Megafac F-552, manufactured by DIC
<溶剤>
・MMPGAc:1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート
・MEK:メチルエチルケトン
<Solvent>
・MMPGAc: 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate ・MEK: methyl ethyl ketone
〔中間層形成用組成物の成分〕
 転写フィルムが有する中間層は、中間層形成用組成物を使用して形成した。
 中間層形成用組成物の調製に使用した成分は以下の通りであり、以下に示す各成分を、後段に示す表の通りの配合で混合し、実施例又は比較例で使用する各中間層形成用組成物を得た。
[Ingredients of Intermediate Layer Forming Composition]
The intermediate layer of the transfer film was formed using the intermediate layer-forming composition.
The components used in the preparation of the composition for forming the intermediate layer are as follows. A composition for
<樹脂>
・PVA:ポリビニルアルコール、製品名「クラレポバールPVA-205」、クラレ社製
・PVP:ポリピロリドン、製品名「ポリビニルピロリドンK-30」、日本触媒社製
・HPMC:ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、製品名「メトローズ 60SH-03」、信越化学工業社製
<Resin>
・PVA: Polyvinyl alcohol, product name “Kuraray Poval PVA-205”, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd. ・PVP: Polypyrrolidone, product name “Polyvinylpyrrolidone K-30”, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd. ・HPMC: Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, product name “Metolose” 60SH-03", manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
<界面活性剤>
・F444:メガファックF444、フッ素系界面活性剤、DIC社製
<Surfactant>
・F444: Megafac F444, fluorosurfactant, manufactured by DIC
<溶剤>
・水
・メタノール
<Solvent>
・Water/methanol
[試験]
 上述の感光性組成物、及び、中間層形成用組成物を使用して、以下の手順で試験を行った。
[test]
Using the above-described photosensitive composition and intermediate layer-forming composition, tests were conducted according to the following procedures.
〔転写フィルムの作製〕
 仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光性層から構成される各転写フィルムを作製した。具体的には以下のとおりである。
 まず、仮支持体(厚み16μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(ルミラー16KS40、東レ社製))の上に、中間層形成用組成物を、バーコーターを用いて、乾燥後の厚みが1.0μmになるように塗布し、オーブンを用いて90℃で乾燥させ、中間層を形成した。
 更に、中間層の上に、感光性組成物を、バーコーターを用いて乾燥後の厚みが3.0μmになるように塗布し、オーブンを用いて80℃で乾燥させ、感光性層(ネガ型感光性層)を形成した。
 得られた感光性層上に、保護フィルムとして厚み16μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(16KS40、東レ社製)を圧着し、各実施例又は比較例で使用する転写フィルムを作製した。
[Preparation of transfer film]
Each transfer film composed of a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer was produced. Specifically, it is as follows.
First, on a temporary support (16 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.)), an intermediate layer forming composition was applied using a bar coater so that the thickness after drying was 1.0 μm. and dried in an oven at 90° C. to form an intermediate layer.
Furthermore, on the intermediate layer, a photosensitive composition is applied using a bar coater so that the thickness after drying becomes 3.0 μm, dried at 80° C. using an oven, and the photosensitive layer (negative type A photosensitive layer) was formed.
A 16 μm-thick polyethylene terephthalate (16KS40, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was pressure-bonded onto the obtained photosensitive layer as a protective film to prepare a transfer film used in each example or comparative example.
〔測定X〕
 厚さ188μmのPETフィルム(ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム)上にスパッタ法にて厚さ500nmの銅層を作製した銅層付きPET基板を使用した
 作製した転写フィルムを50cm角にカットし、保護フィルムを剥がして、感光性層がPET基板表面の銅層に接するように、ロール温度90℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.のラミネート条件で銅層付きPET基板にラミネートして、積層体を得た。
 この時点で、積層体は、「PETフィルム-銅層-感光性層-中間層-仮支持体」の構成を有する。
 ここまでを、積層体作製段階とする。
 次に、得られた積層体から仮支持体を剥離し、積層体の表面に中間層を露出させた。ライン(μm)/スペース(μm)が10/10のパターンを有するフォトマスクを、積層体における表面に露出した中間層と密着させた。高圧水銀灯露光機(MAP-1200L、大日本科研社製、主波長:365nm)を用いて光を照射した。露光量は、現像後に得られるレジストパターンが、フォトマスクのラインアンドスペース形状を再現する露光量とした。
 その後、28℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を現像液として使用して現像を行った。現像は、具体的には、シャワー処理を30秒間行い、AirKnife(エアナイフ)処理をして現像液を切った後、純水で30秒間シャワー処理をして、更にAirKnife処理を行った。
 これにより、平均ライン幅が10μm(ライン幅:スペース幅=1:1)の、ラインアンドスペース形状のレジストパターンを有する積層体を得た。
 ここまでを、第1パターン形成段階とする。
 この時点で、積層体は、「PETフィルム-銅層-レジストパターン」の構成を有する。
 得られた積層体を、ラインの長さ方向に対して垂直に切断し、その断面を観察して、現像液の染み込み長さX(単位:μm)を求めた。
 具体的には、明細書中に記載の方法で観察し、Xを求めた。
[Measurement X]
Using a PET substrate with a copper layer, a copper layer with a thickness of 500 nm was prepared by sputtering on a PET film (polyethylene terephthalate film) with a thickness of 188 μm. , a roll temperature of 90° C., a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, and a linear velocity of 3.0 m/min. was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the lamination conditions of , to obtain a laminate.
At this point, the laminate has a configuration of "PET film-copper layer-photosensitive layer-intermediate layer-temporary support".
The steps up to this point are referred to as a layered product manufacturing stage.
Next, the temporary support was peeled off from the obtained laminate to expose the intermediate layer on the surface of the laminate. A photomask having a pattern with a line (μm)/space (μm) ratio of 10/10 was brought into close contact with the intermediate layer exposed on the surface of the laminate. Light was irradiated using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine (MAP-1200L, manufactured by Dai Nippon Kaken Co., Ltd., dominant wavelength: 365 nm). The amount of exposure was such that the resist pattern obtained after development reproduces the line-and-space shape of the photomask.
After that, development was carried out using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 28° C. as a developer. Specifically, development was performed by performing shower processing for 30 seconds, performing AirKnife processing, draining the developer, performing shower processing with pure water for 30 seconds, and further performing AirKnife processing.
As a result, a laminate having a line-and-space resist pattern with an average line width of 10 μm (line width:space width=1:1) was obtained.
The steps up to this point are referred to as a first pattern formation step.
At this point, the laminate has a configuration of "PET film-copper layer-resist pattern".
The obtained laminate was cut perpendicularly to the length direction of the line, and the cross section was observed to determine the permeation length X (unit: μm) of the developing solution.
Specifically, X was obtained by observing by the method described in the specification.
〔測定Y〕
 各転写フィルムが有する感光性層について、FT-IR(Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy)を用いた測定をして、露光前の感光性層の二重結合当量(A mmol/g)を求めた。
 また、上述の〔測定X〕における積層体作製段階までを同様に実施し、「PETフィルム-銅層-感光性層-中間層-仮支持体」の構成を有する積層体を得た。
 上記積層体の仮支持体を剥離した後、フォトマスクを、積層体の表面に露出した中間層と密着させて、高圧水銀灯露光機(MAP-1200L、大日本科研社製、主波長:365nm)を用いて光を照射(露光)した。この際、波長365nmの光の露光量が20mJ/cmとなるように露光(全面露光)した。露光された後の感光性層をFT-IRで観測し、露光前の感光性層中の炭素-炭素二重結合の量を100%とした場合における、露光によって反応した上記炭素-炭素二重結合の割合を求め、二重結合反応率(B%)を算出した。
 得られたA及びBの値から、架橋反応量(=(A×B)÷100)(単位:mmol/g)を求めた。
[Measurement Y]
The photosensitive layer of each transfer film was measured using FT-IR (Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy) to determine the double bond equivalent (A mmol/g) of the photosensitive layer before exposure.
In addition, the above [Measurement X] was carried out in the same manner up to the step of producing a laminate, to obtain a laminate having a configuration of "PET film--copper layer--photosensitive layer--intermediate layer--temporary support".
After peeling off the temporary support of the laminate, a photomask is brought into close contact with the intermediate layer exposed on the surface of the laminate, and a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine (MAP-1200L, manufactured by Dainippon Kaken Co., Ltd., dominant wavelength: 365 nm). was used to irradiate (exposure) light. At this time, exposure (whole surface exposure) was performed so that the exposure amount of light with a wavelength of 365 nm was 20 mJ/cm 2 . The photosensitive layer after exposure is observed by FT-IR, and the amount of carbon-carbon double bonds in the photosensitive layer before exposure is assumed to be 100%, and the carbon-carbon double reacted by exposure The ratio of bonds was determined and the double bond reaction rate (B%) was calculated.
From the obtained values of A and B, the amount of cross-linking reaction (=(A×B)/100) (unit: mmol/g) was determined.
〔導体パターン直線性(LWR)の評価〕
 上述の〔測定X〕における第1パターン形成段階までを同様に実施し、レジストパターンが形成された基板(レジストパターンを有する積層体)を得た。
 レジストパターンが形成された基板(レジストパターンを有する積層体)を銅エッチング液(Cu-02:関東化学(株)製)により23℃で30秒エッチングし、更に、PGMEAを用いてレジストパターンを剥離することで、銅配線がパターンニングされた基板(導体パターンを有する積層体)を得た。
 ラインアンドスペース形状にパターニングされた銅配線からアトランダムに選んだ箇所の線幅を100箇所測定した。得られた線幅の標準偏差(単位:nm)を求め、標準偏差の値をLWR(Line Width Roughness)と定義した。
 得られたLWRの値を下記区分に基づき分類し、導体パターンの直線性を評価した。
 LWRが小さいほど、線幅変動が小さく、好ましい。
  A:LWRが、150nm未満
  B:LWRが、150nm以上、200nm未満
  C:LWRが、200nm以上、300nm未満
  D:LWRが、300nm以上
[Evaluation of conductor pattern linearity (LWR)]
The steps up to the first pattern formation step in [Measurement X] were performed in the same manner to obtain a substrate on which a resist pattern was formed (a laminate having a resist pattern).
The substrate on which a resist pattern is formed (laminate having a resist pattern) is etched with a copper etchant (Cu-02: manufactured by Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd.) at 23° C. for 30 seconds, and the resist pattern is stripped using PGMEA. Thus, a substrate (laminate having a conductor pattern) on which copper wiring was patterned was obtained.
100 line widths were measured at randomly selected points from the copper wiring patterned in a line-and-space shape. The standard deviation (unit: nm) of the obtained line width was determined, and the value of the standard deviation was defined as LWR (Line Width Roughness).
The obtained LWR values were classified based on the following categories, and the linearity of the conductor pattern was evaluated.
The smaller the LWR, the smaller the line width variation, which is preferable.
A: LWR is less than 150 nm B: LWR is 150 nm or more and less than 200 nm C: LWR is 200 nm or more and less than 300 nm D: LWR is 300 nm or more
〔導体パターン解像性(最小解像線幅)の評価〕
 露光時の露光量を変動させた以外は、上述の〔導体パターン直線性(LWR)の評価〕における手順と同様にして、各種線幅を有する銅配線(導体パターン)を、基板上に形成した。パターン倒れ等が生じることなく形成可能な銅配線(導体パターン)の最小の線幅(最小解像線幅)を求めて、導体パターンの解像性を評価した。
[Evaluation of conductor pattern resolution (minimum resolution line width)]
Copper wiring (conductor pattern) having various line widths was formed on the substrate in the same manner as in the above [Evaluation of conductor pattern linearity (LWR)] except that the exposure dose during exposure was varied. . The minimum line width (minimum resolution line width) of a copper wiring (conductor pattern) that can be formed without causing pattern collapse or the like was determined, and the resolution of the conductor pattern was evaluated.
[結果]
 下記表に、各実施例又は比較例の評価結果を示す。また、各実施例又は比較例で使用した転写フィルムの作製に用いた、感光性組成物及び中間層形成用組成物の配合をそれぞれ示す。
 なお、化合物1~4(樹脂)は、樹脂である化合物を含む溶液(樹脂溶液)の状態で感光性組成物の配合に供しており、表中には、樹脂溶液としての添加量(質量部)を示している。例えば、実施例1で用いた感光性組成物は、固形分(化合物1)の含有量が全質量に対して30質量%である樹脂溶液を、25.2質量部含んでいる。樹脂溶液における溶剤はPGMEA(プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート)である。
 また、重合性化合物の粘度は、ブルックフィールド型粘度計(東機産業社製TVB-15等)を用いて25℃の温度で測定した粘度である。
[result]
The following table shows the evaluation results of each example or comparative example. In addition, formulations of the photosensitive composition and the composition for forming the intermediate layer used to prepare the transfer film used in each example or comparative example are shown.
Compounds 1 to 4 (resin) are used in the formulation of the photosensitive composition in the form of a solution (resin solution) containing a compound that is a resin. ). For example, the photosensitive composition used in Example 1 contains 25.2 parts by mass of a resin solution having a solid content (compound 1) of 30% by mass with respect to the total mass. The solvent in the resin solution is PGMEA (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate).
The viscosity of the polymerizable compound is measured at a temperature of 25° C. using a Brookfield viscometer (TVB-15 manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000006
 表に示す結果より、本発明の方法によれば、直線性及び解像性に優れる導体パターンが得られることが確認された。 From the results shown in the table, it was confirmed that a conductor pattern with excellent linearity and resolution was obtained according to the method of the present invention.
 また、実施例1~7の比較より、測定Xにより求められる、現像液の染み込み長さXが、0.6μm以下であれば本発明の効果がより優れ、0.4μm以下であれば本発明の効果が更に優れることが確認された。 In addition, from the comparison of Examples 1 to 7, the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the penetration length X of the developer, which is obtained by the measurement X, is 0.6 μm or less, and the present invention is obtained when it is 0.4 μm or less. It was confirmed that the effect of
 実施例5と7との比較等により、本発明の方法に用いられる転写フィルムの感光性層が、重合性基を有する樹脂を含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された。 By comparing Examples 5 and 7, etc., it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the photosensitive layer of the transfer film used in the method of the present invention contains a resin having a polymerizable group.
 実施例1と7との比較、及び、実施例2と4との比較等により、本発明の方法に用いられる転写フィルムの感光性層が、3個以上の重合性基を有する重合性化合物を含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された。 Comparison between Examples 1 and 7 and between Examples 2 and 4 shows that the photosensitive layer of the transfer film used in the method of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound having 3 or more polymerizable groups. It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when it is included.
 実施例2と3との比較等により、本発明の方法に用いられる転写フィルムの感光性層が、I/O値が0.70未満である樹脂を含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された。 By comparing Examples 2 and 3, etc., it was found that the effects of the present invention are more excellent when the photosensitive layer of the transfer film used in the method of the present invention contains a resin having an I/O value of less than 0.70. was confirmed.
 実施例2と5と6との比較等により、本発明の方法に用いられる転写フィルムの感光性層が、clogPが5.0以上の重合性化合物を含む場合に本発明の効果がより優れ、clogPが5.5超の重合性化合物を含む場合に本発明の効果が更に優れることが確認された。 By comparing Examples 2, 5 and 6, etc., the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the photosensitive layer of the transfer film used in the method of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound having a clogP of 5.0 or more. It was confirmed that the effects of the present invention are more excellent when the polymerizable compound having a clogP of more than 5.5 is included.
[追加試験]
 上段までに記載の実施例及び比較例では、エッチング工程を実施することで、導体パターンを有する積層体を形成した。
 更に、実施例1~7で使用したのと同様の転写フィルムを使用し、エッチング工程の代わりにめっき工程を実施して導体パターンを有する積層体を作製した。めっき工程を経て作製された積層体が有する導体パターンの解像性及び直線性を評価したところ、上段までに記載の実施例及び比較例と同様の傾向の結果になることが確認された。
[Additional test]
In the examples and comparative examples described up to the upper stage, a laminate having a conductor pattern was formed by performing an etching process.
Furthermore, using the same transfer film as used in Examples 1 to 7, a plating process was performed instead of the etching process to produce a laminate having a conductor pattern. When the resolution and linearity of the conductor pattern of the laminate produced through the plating process were evaluated, it was confirmed that the results tended to be similar to those of the examples and comparative examples described up to the top.
 なお、具体的には以下のように、導体パターンを有する積層体を作製した。
 まず、上述の〔測定X〕における第1パターン形成段階までを同様に実施し、レジストパターンが形成された基板(レジストパターンを有する積層体)を得た。(ただし、導体パターン解像性(最小解像線幅)を評価する場合は、露光時の露光量を変動させて、最終的に形成される導体パターンの線幅を調整した)
 なお、上記積層体は、「PETフィルム-銅層-レジストパターン」の構成を有しており、銅層をシード層として使用した。
 上記積層体を、硫酸銅めっき液(硫酸銅75g/L、硫酸190g/L、塩素イオン50質量ppm、メルテックス株式会社製、「カパーグリームPCM」、5mL/L)に入れ、1A/dmの条件で銅めっき処理を行った。
 銅めっき処理後の上記積層体を水洗し乾燥した後、50℃の剥離液(三菱ガス化学社製、「R-100」、0.2体積%)に浸漬することによりレジストパターンを剥離し、積層体が有する銅層(シード層)を0.1質量%硫酸、及び、0.1質量%過酸化水素を含む水溶液で除去した。
 これにより、銅配線がパターンニングされた基板(導体パターンを有する積層体)を得て、導体パターン直線性(LWR)及び導体パターン解像性(最小解像線幅)を、上述したのと同様に評価した。
Specifically, a laminate having a conductor pattern was produced as follows.
First, the steps up to the first pattern formation step in [Measurement X] described above were performed in the same manner to obtain a substrate on which a resist pattern was formed (a laminate having a resist pattern). (However, when evaluating the conductor pattern resolution (minimum resolution line width), the line width of the finally formed conductor pattern was adjusted by varying the exposure dose during exposure.)
The laminate had a configuration of "PET film-copper layer-resist pattern", and the copper layer was used as a seed layer.
The laminate was placed in a copper sulfate plating solution (copper sulfate 75 g/L, sulfuric acid 190 g/L, chloride ion 50 ppm by mass, manufactured by Meltex Inc., "Coppergleam PCM", 5 mL/L), and 1 A/dm 2 Copper plating treatment was performed under the conditions of
After the laminate after the copper plating treatment is washed with water and dried, the resist pattern is peeled off by immersing it in a stripping solution (Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., "R-100", 0.2% by volume) at 50 ° C. The copper layer (seed layer) of the laminate was removed with an aqueous solution containing 0.1% by mass sulfuric acid and 0.1% by mass hydrogen peroxide.
As a result, a substrate (laminate having a conductor pattern) on which copper wiring is patterned is obtained, and the conductor pattern linearity (LWR) and conductor pattern resolution (minimum resolution line width) are measured in the same manner as described above. evaluated to
 101 表面に金属層を有する基板
 103 基板
 105 金属層
 107 ライン状のレジストパターン
 109 アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じている領域
 111 アルカリ金属の染み込みが生じていない領域
 x 長さ
 10 転写フィルム
 11 仮支持体
 13 中間層
 15 感光性層
 17 組成物層
 19 保護フィルム
 
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 101 Substrate having a metal layer on its surface 103 Substrate 105 Metal layer 107 Line-shaped resist pattern 109 Area where alkali metal has penetrated 111 Area where alkali metal has not penetrated x Length 10 Transfer film 11 Temporary support 13 Intermediate layer 15 Photosensitive layer 17 Composition layer 19 Protective film

Claims (21)

  1.  仮支持体と、感光性層とを有する転写フィルムを、前記感光性層側が、表面に金属層を有する基板の前記金属層に接するように、前記転写フィルムと前記基板とを貼合する貼合工程と、
     前記感光性層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
     露光された前記感光性層にアルカリ金属塩を含む水溶液を用いて現像処理を実施し、レジストパターンを形成する現像工程と、
     前記レジストパターンが配置されていない領域にある前記金属層に、エッチング処理を行うエッチング処理工程、又は、めっき処理を行うめっき処理工程と、
     前記レジストパターンを剥離するレジスト剥離工程と、
     更に、前記めっき処理工程を有する場合は、前記レジスト剥離工程によって露出した前記金属層を除去し、前記基板上に導体パターンを形成する除去工程と、を有する、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法であって、
     前記貼合工程と前記露光工程との間、又は、前記露光工程と前記現像工程との間に、更に、前記仮支持体を剥離する仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
     前記感光性層は、以下の測定Xで求められる長さXが、1.0μm以下となる、導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
     測定X:前記感光性層を、ライン幅とスペース幅が1:1のラインパターンで露光した後、前記現像工程で使用される前記水溶液で現像して得られるレジストパターンの断面を観察し、前記レジストパターンの側面におけるアルカリ金属の浸み込み長さを長さXとする。
    A transfer film having a temporary support and a photosensitive layer is laminated to the transfer film and the substrate such that the photosensitive layer side is in contact with the metal layer of a substrate having a metal layer on the surface. process and
    an exposure step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer;
    a developing step of developing the exposed photosensitive layer using an aqueous solution containing an alkali metal salt to form a resist pattern;
    an etching process of performing an etching process or a plating process of performing a plating process on the metal layer in a region where the resist pattern is not arranged;
    a resist stripping step of stripping the resist pattern;
    Furthermore, when the plating step is included, the method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern includes a removal step of removing the metal layer exposed by the resist stripping step and forming a conductor pattern on the substrate. and
    Between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the development step, a temporary support peeling step of peeling the temporary support,
    A method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern, wherein the photosensitive layer has a length X of 1.0 μm or less, which is obtained by the following measurement X.
    Measurement X: After exposing the photosensitive layer with a line pattern having a line width and a space width of 1:1, the cross section of the resist pattern obtained by developing with the aqueous solution used in the developing step is observed. Let length X be the penetration length of the alkali metal on the side surface of the resist pattern.
  2.  前記感光性層が、式Yで求められる感光性層の架橋反応量が0.20mmol/g以上となる、請求項1に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
     式Y:
     架橋反応量=(A×B)÷100
     ただし、露光前の前記感光性層の二重結合当量をAmmol/gとし、高圧水銀灯露光機を用いて波長365nmの光の露光量が20mJ/cmとなるように露光した後の前記感光性層をFT-IRで観測して求められる二重結合反応率をB%とする。
     なお、前記高圧水銀灯露光機を用いて露光される前記感光性層の膜厚は3μmとする。
    2. The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to claim 1, wherein the photosensitive layer has a crosslinking reaction amount of 0.20 mmol/g or more as determined by the formula Y.
    Formula Y:
    Crosslinking reaction amount = (A × B) ÷ 100
    However, the double bond equivalent of the photosensitive layer before exposure is Ammol/g, and the photosensitivity after exposure using a high-pressure mercury lamp exposure machine so that the exposure amount of light with a wavelength of 365 nm is 20 mJ / cm 2 The double bond reaction rate obtained by observing the layer with FT-IR is defined as B%.
    The film thickness of the photosensitive layer exposed using the high-pressure mercury lamp exposure device is set to 3 μm.
  3.  前記感光性層が、重合開始剤及び重合性化合物を含む、請求項1又は2に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
  4.  前記重合性化合物が、2官能以上の重合性化合物を含む、請求項3に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to claim 3, wherein the polymerizable compound contains a polymerizable compound having a functionality of two or more.
  5.  前記重合性化合物が、3官能以上の重合性化合物を含む、請求項3又は4に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the polymerizable compound contains a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
  6.  前記重合性化合物が、エチレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物を含む、請求項3~5のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 3 to 5, wherein the polymerizable compound contains a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group.
  7.  前記感光性層が、I/O値が0.70未満である樹脂を含む、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having an I/O value of less than 0.70.
  8.  前記感光性層が、重合性基を有する樹脂を含む、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having a polymerizable group.
  9.  前記感光性層が、重量平均分子量が5,000~30,000である樹脂を含む、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having a weight average molecular weight of 5,000 to 30,000.
  10.  前記感光性層が、酸価が、80~200mgKOH/gである樹脂を含む、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a resin having an acid value of 80 to 200 mgKOH/g.
  11.  前記感光性層の膜厚が、5μm以下である、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the thickness of the photosensitive layer is 5 µm or less.
  12.  前記転写フィルムが、前記仮支持体と前記感光性樹層との間に、中間層を有する、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the transfer film has an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer.
  13.  前記中間層が、水溶性樹脂を含む、請求項12に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to claim 12, wherein the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble resin.
  14.  前記中間層が、水溶性セルロース誘導体、多価アルコール類、多価アルコール類のアルキレンオキサイド付加物、ポリエーテル類、フェノール誘導体、及び、アミド化合物からなる群より選ばれる1種以上を含む請求項12又は13に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 12. The intermediate layer comprises one or more selected from the group consisting of water-soluble cellulose derivatives, polyhydric alcohols, alkylene oxide adducts of polyhydric alcohols, polyethers, phenol derivatives, and amide compounds. 14. A method for producing a laminate having the conductor pattern according to 13.
  15.  前記貼合工程と前記露光工程との間に、前記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
     前記露光工程が、フォトマスクを介してパターン露光を行う工程である、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
    Between the bonding step and the exposure step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
    12. The method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to claim 1, wherein said exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask.
  16.  前記貼合工程と前記露光工程との間に、前記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
     前記露光工程が、露出した前記感光性層の表面とフォトマスクとを接触させてパターン露光を行う工程である、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
    Between the bonding step and the exposure step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
    The production of a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure by bringing the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer into contact with a photomask. Method.
  17.  前記貼合工程と前記露光工程との間に、前記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
     前記露光工程が、露出した前記中間層の表面とフォトマスクとを接触させてパターン露光を行う工程である、請求項12~14のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
    Between the bonding step and the exposure step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
    The method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein the exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure by bringing the exposed surface of the intermediate layer into contact with a photomask. .
  18.  前記露光工程と前記現像工程との間に、前記仮支持体剥離工程を有し、
     前記露光工程が、フォトマスクを介してパターン露光を行う工程である、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。
    Between the exposure step and the development step, the temporary support peeling step is provided,
    12. The method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to claim 1, wherein said exposure step is a step of performing pattern exposure through a photomask.
  19.  前記フォトマスクが、メッシュ状に配置された遮光部を含む、請求項15~18のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein the photomask includes a light shielding portion arranged in a mesh pattern.
  20.  前記フォトマスクが、円形ドット状に配置された遮光部を含む、請求項15~18のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein the photomask includes light shielding portions arranged in circular dots.
  21.  前記フォトマスクが、円形ドット状に配置された開口部を含む、請求項15~18のいずれか1項に記載の導体パターンを有する積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate having a conductor pattern according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein the photomask includes openings arranged in circular dots.
PCT/JP2022/006927 2021-02-26 2022-02-21 Method for manufacturing laminate having conductor pattern WO2022181539A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023502388A JPWO2022181539A1 (en) 2021-02-26 2022-02-21
CN202280016396.1A CN116917806A (en) 2021-02-26 2022-02-21 Method for manufacturing laminate with conductor pattern

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021031151 2021-02-26
JP2021-031151 2021-02-26
JP2021069681 2021-04-16
JP2021-069681 2021-04-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022181539A1 true WO2022181539A1 (en) 2022-09-01

Family

ID=83048096

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/006927 WO2022181539A1 (en) 2021-02-26 2022-02-21 Method for manufacturing laminate having conductor pattern

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022181539A1 (en)
TW (1) TW202238267A (en)
WO (1) WO2022181539A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013024913A (en) * 2011-07-15 2013-02-04 Asahi Kasei E-Materials Corp Photosensitive element
JP2016033637A (en) * 2014-07-28 2016-03-10 日立化成株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, method for forming resist pattern, and method for manufacturing printed wiring board

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013024913A (en) * 2011-07-15 2013-02-04 Asahi Kasei E-Materials Corp Photosensitive element
JP2016033637A (en) * 2014-07-28 2016-03-10 日立化成株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, method for forming resist pattern, and method for manufacturing printed wiring board

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202238267A (en) 2022-10-01
JPWO2022181539A1 (en) 2022-09-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022181539A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate having conductor pattern
WO2022181611A1 (en) Production method for laminate having conductor pattern
WO2022181485A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
WO2022181456A1 (en) Transfer film and method for manufacturing conductor pattern
WO2022181455A1 (en) Transfer film, and method for manufacturing conductor pattern
WO2023145156A1 (en) Transfer film and method for forming conductor pattern
WO2023119998A1 (en) Method for producing laminate having conductor pattern, photosensitive composition, and transfer film
WO2024004430A1 (en) Transfer film, pattern forming method, and circuit wiring manufacturing method
WO2022138154A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and transfer film
JP2023020517A (en) Transfer film and method for producing laminate having conductor pattern
WO2023100553A1 (en) Transfer film, laminate having conductor pattern, method for producing laminate having conductor pattern, and method for producing transfer film
WO2022138493A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and transfer film
JP2023035807A (en) Method for producing laminate having conductive pattern and transfer film
WO2021220980A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
WO2022138468A1 (en) Transfer material and method for producing laminated body
JP2023034627A (en) Transfer film, and method for manufacturing laminate having conductor pattern
JP2023020993A (en) Method for manufacturing laminate including transparent conductive pattern, and, method for manufacturing touch panel
TW202311871A (en) Method for producing laminate having a conductive pattern, transfer film
TW202311872A (en) Method for producing laminate having conductor pattern, transfer film
JP2023043527A (en) Photosensitive composition, transfer film, and manufacturing method of laminate having conductor pattern
JP2023020049A (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate having conductor pattern, and photosensitive composition
KR20230019041A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive composition layer, transfer film, method for producing laminate having a conductive pattern
JP2024018375A (en) Production method of laminate including conductive pattern and production method of touch panel
JP2023076381A (en) Photosensitive composition, transfer film, pattern formation method, and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP2023097347A (en) Method for manufacturing vapor deposition mask

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22759575

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023502388

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202280016396.1

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22759575

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1